WO2005094865A1 - Compound having angiogenic effect - Google Patents
Compound having angiogenic effect Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2005094865A1 WO2005094865A1 PCT/JP2005/006124 JP2005006124W WO2005094865A1 WO 2005094865 A1 WO2005094865 A1 WO 2005094865A1 JP 2005006124 W JP2005006124 W JP 2005006124W WO 2005094865 A1 WO2005094865 A1 WO 2005094865A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- group
- substituted
- amino acid
- peptide
- aromatic
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Ceased
Links
Classifications
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
- A61K38/04—Peptides having up to 20 amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
- A61K38/08—Peptides having 5 to 11 amino acids
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07K—PEPTIDES
- C07K7/00—Peptides having 5 to 20 amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
- C07K7/04—Linear peptides containing only normal peptide links
- C07K7/06—Linear peptides containing only normal peptide links having 5 to 11 amino acids
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
Definitions
- the present invention is in the field of medicine. More particularly, the present invention relates to a medicament for forming a novel angiogenic agent.
- amino acid derivatives are convenient building units for combinatorial chemical libraries, and their structure can be optimized in a short time by solid-phase synthesis. Therefore, if a compound that promotes angiogenesis more strongly exists, it can be advantageously synthesized and administered alone or in combination.
- Patent Document 1 Conventionally, experiments have been attempted in which a peptide sequence is modified (Patent Document 1). However, such modification at the peptide level alone has a limitation in enhancing the activity. Special In Patent Document 1, modifications other than peptides have been attempted, but compounds having angiogenic activity exceeding those of peptides have been found.
- angiogenesis has been enhanced more than natural peptides, and the appearance of a compound has been awaited.
- Patent document l WO 03Z030925
- the present inventors have conducted intensive studies and found that a peptide having a specific modification of an aromatic group in a specific amino acid sequence unexpectedly has enhanced angiogenic activity. Was completed.
- the present invention provides the following.
- a composition for angiogenesis comprising a peptide, comprising a sequence of VVXGL (SEQ ID NO: 1), wherein X is a variant of an aromatic amino acid.
- composition according to item 1 wherein X is a modified form of phenalanine or tyrosine.
- composition according to item 1 wherein the modification includes a peptide in which the para, ortho, or meta position of the side chain of the aromatic amino acid is substituted with an electron-withdrawing substituent.
- composition according to item 1 wherein X is a group in which an aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid is substituted with a hydrophobic group.
- composition according to item 1 wherein X is an aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid substituted with an alkyl group.
- composition according to item 1 wherein X is substituted with an alkyl group at the para-position of the aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid.
- the X is an aromatic amino acid wherein the aromatic group is substituted with a C1-C6 alkyl group, Item 1.
- composition for forming a vascular network comprising a peptide comprising the sequence WXGL, wherein X is a variant of an aromatic amino acid.
- composition according to item 12 wherein the modification includes a peptide in which the para, ortho, or meta position of the aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid is substituted with an electron-withdrawing substituent.
- composition according to item 12 wherein X is a group in which the aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid is substituted with a hydrophobic group.
- composition according to item 12 wherein X is an aromatic amino acid in which the aromatic group is substituted with an alkyl group.
- composition according to item 12 wherein X is a group in which the aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid is substituted with a methyl group.
- a method for forming a blood vessel which comprises administering the composition according to any one of Items 1 to L1 to a site of a patient where angiogenesis is desired.
- a method for forming a vascular network comprising administering the composition according to claim 1.
- WXGL a peptide called WXGL, wherein X is a modified aromatic amino acid or a modified variant thereof or a salt thereof, for use in the production of a pharmaceutical composition for forming a vascular network of a peptide.
- angiogenesis agent of the present invention is useful for regenerating and repairing organs using biological substitutes such as artificial bones, and for ischemic diseases such as myocardial infarction, cerebral infarction, and obstructive aortic sclerosis, which are a large part of lifestyle-related diseases. It is also useful for treatment.
- FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of the action of adhering cells to form a lumen between them.
- FIG. 2 shows an example of the action of forming a lumen by comparing VEGF and peptide SWYGLR (SEQ ID NO: 2).
- FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the state of a tissue around a microcell observed with a microscope using a DAS assay 5 days later in Example 3.
- FIG. 4 shows the state of angiogenesis and formation of a vascular network when peptide SWYGLR (SEQ ID NO: 2) was used.
- FIG. 5 shows the state of angiogenesis and vascular network formation using peptide SWYGLR (SEQ ID NO: 2) and the modified peptide of the present invention.
- FIG. 6 shows a balance sheet of the vascular network ability of the peptide of the present invention. Description of Sequence Listing
- SEQ ID NO: 1 is an amino acid sequence WXGL showing the basic structure of the peptide of the present invention. Where X is a variant of an aromatic amino acid.
- SEQ ID NO: 2 is a peptide (SVVYGLR) capable of angiogenesis in osteobontin.
- SEQ ID NO: 4 SWF (pMe) GLR (where F (pMe) is a phenyl group of phenylalanine substituted with a methyl group at the para-position)
- SEQ ID NO: 5 SWF (pF) GLR (where F (pF) is obtained by substituting a fluoro group at the para-position of the phenyl group of phenylalanine)
- SEQ ID NO: 6 SWF (pNO) GLR (where F (pNO) is a phenylalanine phenol
- SEQ ID NO: 7 SWF (D) GLR (where F (D) is the D-form of phenalanine)
- SEQ ID NO: 8 SWF (pEt) GLR (where F (pEt) is The phenyl group of realanine is substituted with an ethyl group at the para position.)
- SEQ ID NO: 9 SWF (pPr) GLR (where F (pPr) is a phenyl group in which a propyl group is substituted with a propyl group at the para position)
- SEQ ID NO: 10 SWF (pHex) GLR (where, F (pHex) is phenylylalanine in which a hexyl group is substituted at the para-position of the phenyl group)
- SEQ ID NO: 18 SWF (pMe) GL (where F (pMe) is a phenyl group of phenylalanine With a methyl group substituted at the para-position)
- VVF (pMe) GL (where F (pMe) is a phenylalanine in which a methyl group is substituted at the para-position of the phenyl group)
- SEQ ID NO: 20 is another exemplary sequence of the peptide of the present invention.
- protein protein
- polypeptide oligopeptide
- peptide refers to a polymer of amino acids of any length.
- the polymer may be linear or branched or cyclic.
- the amino acids may be naturally occurring or non-naturally occurring or modified amino acids. These terms may also include those assembled into a complex of multiple polypeptide chains.
- the term also embraces natural or artificially modified amino acid polymers. Such modifications include, for example, disulfide bond formation, glycosylation, lipidation, acetylation, phosphorylation, or any other manipulation or modification (eg, conjugation with a labeling component).
- This definition also includes, for example, polypeptides containing one or more analogs of an amino acid (eg, including unnatural amino acids, etc.), peptide-like conjugates (eg, peptoids) and those known in the art. Other modifications are included.
- polypeptides containing one or more analogs of an amino acid eg, including unnatural amino acids, etc.
- peptide-like conjugates eg, peptoids
- polynucleotide As used herein, the terms “polynucleotide”, “oligonucleotide” and “ “Nucleic acid” is used interchangeably herein and refers to a polymer of nucleotides of any length. The term also includes “derivative oligonucleotides” or “derivative polynucleotides.” “Derivative oligonucleotide” or “derivative polynucleotide” refers to an oligonucleotide or polynucleotide having an unusual force or a bond between nucleotides containing a derivative of a nucleotide, and is used interchangeably.
- oligonucleotide examples include, for example, 2 ′ O-methyl-ribonucleotide, a derivative oligonucleotide in which a phosphodiester bond in an oligonucleotide is converted to a phosphorothioate bond, and a phosphorus in an oligonucleotide.
- Derivative oligonucleotide substituted with propylperacyl derivative oligonucleotide in which peracyl in oligonucleotide is substituted with C-5 thiazole peracyl, cytosine in oligonucleotide substituted with C-5 propynylcytosine
- a particular nucleic acid sequence also has a conservatively modified version thereof (e.g., a degenerate codon substitution), similar to the explicitly indicated sequence. ) And complementary sequences are contemplated. Specifically, degenerate codon substitutions create a sequence in which the third position of one or more selected (or all) codons is replaced with a mixed base and a Z or deoxyinosine residue. (Batzer et al., Nucleic Acid Res. 19: 5081 (1991); Ohtsuka et al., J. Biol. Chem. 260: 2605- 2608 (1985); Rossolini et al., Mol Cell. Probes 8: 91- 98 (1994)
- complex molecule refers to a molecule formed by linking a plurality of molecules such as polypeptides, polynucleotides, lipids, and sugars.
- Such complex molecules include, for example, Examples include, but are not limited to, glycolipids, glycopeptides, and the like. It is understood that the peptide of the present invention includes a complex in which an alkyl group, a PEG group, a sugar chain, and the like are bound.
- an "isolated" biological agent eg, a nucleic acid or protein
- a nucleic acid or protein is defined as another biological agent in a cell of an organism in which the biological agent naturally exists.
- Factors e.g., when it is a nucleic acid, a nucleic acid containing a factor other than the nucleic acid and a nucleic acid sequence other than the target nucleic acid; when it is a protein, it contains an factor other than the protein and an amino acid sequence other than the target protein
- Protein or the like Protein or the like.
- isolated nucleic acids and proteins include nucleic acids and proteins that have been purified by standard purification methods. Thus, isolated nucleic acids and proteins include chemically synthesized nucleic acids and proteins.
- a "purified" biological agent eg, a nucleic acid or a protein
- a purified biological agent is at least a part of a factor naturally associated with the biological agent. Means that has been removed.
- the purity of the biological agent in the purified biological agent is higher (ie, more concentrated) than the state in which the biological agent is normally present.
- purified and isolated preferably refer to at least 75% by weight, more preferably at least 85% by weight, even more preferably at least 95% by weight. %, And most preferably at least 98% by weight, of the same type of biological agent.
- homology of a gene refers to the degree of identity between two or more gene sequences.
- similarity refers to two or more similarities when conservative substitutions are regarded as positive (identical) in the above homology. It refers to the degree of identity between gene sequences. Therefore, if there is a conservative substitution, Identity and similarity differ depending on the presence of When there is no conservative substitution, identity and similarity show the same numerical value.
- amino acid is used in a meaning commonly used in the art, and refers to an organic compound having a carboxyl group and an amino group.
- amino acids may be natural or unnatural amino acids.
- natural amino acid refers to the L-isomer of a natural amino acid. Natural amino acids include glycine, alanine, norin, leucine, isoleucine, serine, methionine, threonine, phenylalanine, tyrosine, tryptophan, cysteine, proline, histidine, aspartic acid, asparagine, glutamic acid, glutamine, ⁇ -force Xyglutamic acid, arginine, ortin, and lysine. Unless otherwise indicated, all amino acids referred to in the present specification usually mean L-form, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and forms using D-form amino acids are also within the scope of the present invention. It is understood that.
- amino acid variant refers to a molecule that is not a natural amino acid but is similar in physical properties and / or function to a natural amino acid.
- modified amino acids include a hydrophobic group, phenylalanine having a benzyl side chain (para-, meta-, ortho-position, etc.) to which an alkyl group, a halo group, a nitro group, etc. are bonded, etyonine, canavanine , 2-methylglutamine and the like. It is understood that, in the present invention, amino acid variants may include unnatural amino acids and amino acid mimetics.
- unnatural amino acid means an amino acid that is not normally found in nature in a protein.
- unnatural amino acids include norleucine, para-nitrophenylalanine, homophenylalanine, para-fluorophenylalanine, 3-amino-2-benzylpropionic acid, the D- or L-form of homoarginine, and D-phenylalanine. No.
- amino acid mimetic refers to a compound that has a structure different from the general chemical structure of an amino acid, but that functions in a manner similar to a naturally occurring amino acid.
- nucleotide may be a natural or non-natural one as long as it has an ability to encode an amino acid.
- fragment refers to a polypeptide or polynucleotide having a sequence length of l to n-1 relative to a full-length polypeptide or polynucleotide (having a length of n). Refers to tide. It is understood that variants of the peptides of the invention also include such fragments.
- the length of the fragment can be appropriately changed depending on the purpose.
- a lower limit of the length in the case of a polypeptide, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 1, 5, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50 and more amino acids, and integer lengths not specifically listed herein (eg, 11) are also suitable as lower limits. possible.
- a polynucleotide 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100 and more nucleotides are mentioned, and specific listings are given here. Lengths expressed as unintended integers (eg, 11, etc.) may also be appropriate as lower limits.
- the lengths of polypeptides and polynucleotides can be represented by the numbers of amino acids or nucleic acids, respectively, as described above, but the above numbers are not absolute and have the same function. As far as it has, the above-mentioned number as an upper limit or adjustment is intended to include a few above and below (or, for example, 10% above and below) the number. In order to express such an intention, in this specification, "about” may be used before a number. However, it should be understood that the presence or absence of "about” herein does not affect the interpretation of that number.
- the "corresponding" amino acid or nucleic acid refers to an action similar to a predetermined amino acid in a polypeptide or polynucleotide serving as a reference for comparison with respect to a certain polypeptide molecule or polynucleotide molecule, respectively.
- an antisense molecule of a polynucleotide can be a similar portion of an ortholog corresponding to a particular portion of the antisense molecule.
- the ability of the specific sequence in human osteopontin to be used is understood.
- the term "corresponding" gene refers to, in a certain species, Refers to a gene that has or is expected to have the same action as the predetermined gene in the above, and when there are a plurality of genes having such an action, refers to those having the same evolutionary origin.
- the corresponding gene for a gene may be an ortholog or species homolog of that gene.
- Such corresponding genes can be identified using techniques well known in the art.
- the corresponding gene in an animal can be obtained by using the sequence of the reference gene for the corresponding gene (for example, the mouse osteopontin gene) or the peptide of the present invention or its coding sequence itself as a query sequence (eg, It can be found by searching the sequence database of humans and rats.
- Amino acids may be referred to herein by either their commonly known three letter symbols or by the one letter symbols recommended by the IUPAC- IUB Biochemica 1 Nomenclature Commission. Nucleotides may also be referred to by the generally recognized one-letter code.
- the hydrophobicity index is preferably within ⁇ 2, more preferably within ⁇ 1, and even more preferably within ⁇ 0.5. It is understood in the art that such substitution of amino acids based on hydrophobicity is efficient.
- hydrophilicity index can also be considered in designing polypeptides. As described in US Pat. No. 4,554,101, the following hydrophilicity indices have been assigned to amino acid residues: arginine (+3.0); lysine (+3.0); aspartic acid Glutamic acid (+ 3.0 ⁇ 1); Serine (+0.3); Asparagine (+0.2); Glutamine (+0.2); Glycine (0); Threonine (+ 3.0 ⁇ 1); Proline (0.5 ⁇ 1); alanine (0.5); histidine (0.5); cysteine (1.1); methionine (1.3); valine ( I-1.5); Leucine (1-1.8); Isoloisin (1-1.8); Tyrosine (1-2.3); Fehlalanine (1-2.5); and Tryptophan (3.4).
- an amino acid can be substituted for another that has a similar hydrophilicity index and still provide a bioisostere.
- the hydrophilicity index is preferably within ⁇ 2, more preferably within ⁇ 1, and Even more preferably, it is within ⁇ 0.5.
- conservative substitution refers to an amino acid substitution in which the hydrophilicity index or Z and hydrophobicity index of the original amino acid and the amino acid to be substituted are similar to those described above. And permutation.
- conservative substitution include, for example, those having a hydrophilicity index or a hydrophobicity index of 2 or less, preferably ⁇ 1 or less, more preferably ⁇ 0.5 or less. But not limited to them.
- conservative substitutions include, for example, hydrophobic amino acids (such as alanine, palin, leucine, and isoleucine), acidic amino acids (such as glutamic acid, aspartic acid, 4-carboxyglutamic acid, and aminocunic acid). It is understood that it can also be prepared by exchanging basic amino acids (arginine, histidine, lysine, etc.) with each other and aromatic amino acids (phenylalanine, tyrosine, tryptophan, etc.).
- hydrophobic amino acids such as alanine, palin, leucine, and isoleucine
- acidic amino acids such as glutamic acid, aspartic acid, 4-carboxyglutamic acid, and aminocunic acid. It is understood that it can also be prepared by exchanging basic amino acids (arginine, histidine, lysine, etc.) with each other and aromatic amino acids (phenylalanine, tyrosine, tryptophan, etc.).
- conservative substitutions are well known to those skilled in the art and include, for example, substitutions within each of the following groups: arginine and lysine; glutamic and aspartic acid; serine and threonine; glutamine and asparagine; Isoleucine, and the like, are not limited thereto.
- the "variant" when referring to a polypeptide or polynucleotide is a substance in which a part of the substance such as the original polypeptide or polynucleotide is modified.
- Such variants include substitutional variants, addition variants, deletion variants, truncated variants, allelic variants, and the like.
- Alleles refer to genetic variants that belong to the same locus and are distinct from each other. Therefore, “allelic variant” refers to a variant that has an allelic relationship to a certain gene. Such allelic variants usually have sequences identical or very similar to their corresponding alleles, and usually have rarely different biological May have activity.
- “Species homologue or homolog” means homology (preferably 60% or more homology, more preferably 80% or more) at the amino acid level or nucleotide level with a certain gene in a certain species. , 85% or more, 90% or more, 95% or more homology). Methods for obtaining such species homologs will be apparent from the description herein.
- "Ortholog” is an orthologue Also referred to as an orthologous gene! /,,, Are genes derived from speciation from a common ancestor that has two genes.
- the human and mouse ⁇ -hemoglobin genes are orthologs.
- the human human hemoglobin gene and ⁇ -hemoglobin gene are paralogs (genes generated by gene duplication).
- Orthologs are useful for estimating molecular phylogenetic trees. Orthologs of the present invention may also be useful in the present invention, as orthologs can usually perform the same function in another species as the original species.
- conservatively modified variant refers to a nucleic acid that encodes the same or essentially the same amino acid sequence, and essentially the same if the nucleic acid does not encode an amino acid sequence. Sequence. Because of the degeneracy of the genetic code, many functionally identical nucleic acids encode any given protein. For example, the codons GCA, GCC, GCG, and GCU all encode the amino acid alanine.
- nucleic acid variation is a "silent modification (mutation)," which is one type of conservatively modified mutation.
- Every nucleic acid sequence herein which encodes a polypeptide also describes every possible silent variation of the nucleic acid.
- each codon in the nucleic acid except AUG, which is usually the only codon for methionine, and TGG, which is usually the only codon for tryptophan
- AUG which is usually the only codon for methionine
- TGG which is usually the only codon for tryptophan
- each silent variation of a nucleic acid which encodes a polypeptide is implicit in each described sequence.
- modifications may be made to avoid substitution of the amino acid cysteine, which greatly affects the conformation of the polypeptide.
- base sequence modification methods include cleavage with a restriction enzyme or the like, ligation treatment with a DNA polymerase, Klenow fragment, DNA ligase, or the like, site-specific base substitution using a synthetic oligonucleotide, or the like. (Site-directed mutagenesis; Mark Zoller and Michael Smith, Methods in Enzymology, 100, 468-500 (1983)) Modifications can also be made by methods commonly used in the field of molecular biology.
- amino acid addition, deletion, or modification in addition to amino acid substitution, amino acid addition, deletion, or modification can also be performed.
- Amino acid substitution refers to substitution of the original peptide with one or more, for example, 1 to 3 amino acids.
- the addition of an amino acid refers to the addition of one or more, for example, 1 to 3 amino acids to the original peptide chain.
- Amino acid deletion refers to the deletion of one or more, for example, 1 to 3 amino acids from the original peptide.
- Amino acid modifications include, but are not limited to, amidation, carboxylation, sulfation, halogenation, alkylation, glycosylation, phosphorylation, hydroxylation, acylation (eg, acetylation).
- the amino acid to be substituted or added may be a natural amino acid or a non-natural amino acid or an amino acid analog. Natural amino acids are preferred.
- substitution, addition or deletion of a polypeptide or polynucleotide refers to an amino acid or its substitute, or a nucleotide, respectively, relative to an original polypeptide or polynucleotide. Or its substitute power means to be replaced, added or removed. Techniques for such substitution, addition or deletion are well known in the art, and examples of such techniques include site-directed mutagenesis techniques.
- the number of substitutions, additions, or deletions may be any number as long as the number is one or more. ) Can be much as long as For example, such a number can be one or several, and preferably can be within 20%, 10%, or 3 or less, 2 or less, 1 or less of the total length, etc. .
- hydrophobic group is used as an index for determining hydrophobicity.
- the hydrophobicity index (Kyte and Doolittle, J. Mol. Biol., 157, 105-132 (1982))
- Examples of such a hydrophobic group include, but are not limited to, an alkyl group and an alkyl group.
- alkyl refers to a monovalent group generated by the loss of one hydrogen atom in an aliphatic hydrocarbon (alkane) such as methane, ethane, and propane.
- n 2n + l is represented by one (where n is a positive integer).
- Alkyl can be straight or branched.
- substituted alkyl refers to an alkyl in which H of the alkyl is substituted by a substituent defined below.
- C1-C2 alkyl C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C5 alkyl, C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C7 alkyl, C1-C8 alkyl, C1-C9 alkyl, C1-C10 alkyl C1-C12 alkyl or C1-C12 alkyl, C1-C2-substituted alkyl, C1-C3-substituted alkyl, C1-C4-substituted alkyl, C1-C5-substituted alkyl, C1-C6-substituted Alkyl, C1-C7 substituted alkyl, C1-C8 substituted alkyl, C1-C9 substituted alkyl, C1-C10 substituted alkyl, C1-C11 substituted alkyl or C1-C12 substituted alkyl.
- C 1 -C 10 alkyl means a linear or branched alkyl having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, such as methyl (CH—), ethyl (CH-1), n-propyl (CH CH CH—), iso
- Alkyl is C1-C10 alkyl in which one or more hydrogen atoms have been replaced by substituents.
- optionally substituted alkyl means that “alkyl” or “substituted alkyl” as defined above may be different from the above.
- alkylene refers to a divalent group formed by the loss of two hydrogen atoms in an aliphatic hydrocarbon (alkane) such as methylene, ethylene, and propylene. — CH — (where n is a positive integer). Alkylene is straight chain or branched n 2n
- substituted alkylene refers to a substituent defined below.
- Alkylene in which H of alkylene is substituted by a group include Cl-C2 alkylene, C1-C3 alkylene, C1-C4 alkylene, C1-C5 alkylene, C1-C6 alkylene, C1-C7 alkylene, C1-C8 alkylene, C1-C9 alkylene, C1-C10 Alkylene, 1 to 11 alkylene or 1 to 12 alkylene, C1 to C2 substituted alkylene, C1 to C3 substituted alkylene, C1 to C4 substituted alkylene, C1 to C5 substituted alkylene, C1-C6-substituted alkylene, C1-C7-substituted alkylene, C1-C8-substituted alkylene, C1-C9-substituted alkylene, C
- C1-C10 substituted alkylene refers to C1-C1
- alkylene of which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with a substituent.
- alkylene may include one or more atoms selected from an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom.
- substituted or alkylene may be a shift of "alkylene” or "substituted alkylene” defined above. means.
- cycloalkyl refers to alkyl having a cyclic structure. “Substituted cycloalkyl” refers to cycloalkyl in which H of cycloalkyl is replaced by a substituent defined below.
- C3-C4 cycloalkyl C3-C5 cycloalkyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C3-C7 cycloalkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C3-C9 cycloalkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C3-C11 Cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C3-C4-substituted cycloalkyl, C3-C5-substituted Cycloalkyl, C3-C6-substituted cycloalkyl, C3-C7-substituted cycloalkyl, C3-C8-substituted cycloalkyl, C3-C9-substituted cycloalkyl, C3-C10-substituted cycloalkyl , C3-C11 substituted cycloalkyl or C3-C12
- the "optionally substituted cycloalkyl” means that the "cycloalkyl” or the “substituted cycloalkyl” defined above may be shifted. You.
- alkenyl refers to a monovalent group generated by the loss of one hydrogen atom from an aliphatic hydrocarbon having one double bond in the molecule, and is generally represented by CH1.
- substituted alkenyl refers to an alkenyl in which H of the alkenyl is substituted by a substituent defined below.
- C2-C3 anore keninole C2-C4 anore keninore, C2-C5 anore keninore, C2-C6 alkalle, C2-C7 alkalle, C2-C8 alkalle, C2-C9 alkalle, C2-C10 scale, J2-J11 scale or J2-J12 scale, C2-C3-substituted scale, C2-C4-substituted scale, C2-C5 Substituted alkyl, C2-C6 substituted alkyl, C2-C7 substituted alkyl, C2-C8 substituted alkyl, C2-C9 substituted alkyl, C2-C10 It may be a substituted alkyl, a C2-C11 substituted alkyl, or a C2-C12 substituted alkyl.
- H CH is exemplified.
- C2-C10 substituted alkyl is
- alkenylene refers to a divalent group formed by losing two hydrogen atoms from an aliphatic hydrocarbon having one double bond in the molecule, and generally a CH 1 so
- substituted alkelenes refers to alkelenes in which the H of the alkene is substituted with a substituent as defined below. Specific examples include C2-C25 alkylenes and C2-C25-substituted alkylenes, particularly C2-C3 alkylenes, C2-C4 alkylenes, C2-C5 alkylenes.
- C2-C10 substituted alkylene refers to C2-C10 alkylene, in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with a substituent.
- alkene includes one or more atoms that are also selected from oxygen and sulfur nuclear! / ⁇ .
- the "optionally substituted alkenylene” may be a deviation from the above defined “alkylene” or "substituted alkenylene”.
- cycloalkyl refers to an alkyl having a cyclic structure.
- substituted cycloalkyl refers to a cycloalkyl in which H of the cycloalkyl is substituted by a substituent defined below.
- C3-C4 cycloalkyl C3-C5 cycloalkyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C3-C7 cycloalkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C3-C9 cycloalkyl, C3-C10 Cycloalkyl, C3-C11 cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C3-C4-substituted cycloalkyl, C3-C5-substituted cycloalkyl, C3-C6-substituted cycloalkyl, C3 -C7 substituted cycloalkyl, C3-C8 substituted cycloalkyl, C3-C9 substituted cycloalkyl, C3-C10 substituted cycloalkyl , A 3- to 11-substituted cycloalkyl or a 3- to 12-substituted cycloalkyl
- cycloalkyl which may be substituted may be a shift of the "cycloalkyl” or the "substituted cycloalkyl” as defined above.
- alkynyl refers to a monovalent group such as acetylene formed by the loss of one hydrogen atom from an aliphatic hydrocarbon having one triple bond in the molecule. Generally represented by CH (where n is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2). "Substituted al n 2n_3
- “Kyl” refers to an alkyl in which H of the alkyl is substituted by a substituent defined below. Specific examples include C2-C3 alkyl, C2-C4 alkyl, C2-C5 alkyl, C2-C6 alkyl, C2-C7 alkyl, C2-C8 alkyl, C2- C9 alkyl, C2-C10 alkyl, C2-C11 alkyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, C2-C3-substituted alkyl, C2-C4-substituted alkyl, C2-C5-substituted Alkyl, C2-C6-substituted alkyl, C2-C7-substituted alkyl, C2-C8-substituted alkyl, C2-C9-substituted alkyl, C2-C10-substituted Or a C2-C11 substituted alkyl or a C2-C12 substituted alkyl.
- C2-C10 alkyl means, for example, a linear or branched alkyl containing 2 to 10 carbon atoms, such as ethur (CH ⁇ C—), 1 propynyl ( CH C ⁇ C). Also, for example, C2-C10 substituted alkyl
- Nyl refers to C2-C10 alkyl in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with a substituent.
- alkyl is defined as “alkoxy” as defined above.
- alkoxy refers to a monovalent group generated by losing a hydrogen atom of a hydroxy group of an alcohol, and is generally represented by CHO (where n is 1 or more).
- Substituted alkoxy refers to alkoxy in which H of the alkoxy is substituted by a substituent defined below. Specific examples include C1-C2 alkoxy, C1 ⁇ C3 alkoxy, C1 ⁇ C4 alkoxy, C1 ⁇ C5 alkoxy, C1 ⁇ C6 alkoxy, C1 ⁇ C7 alkoxy, C1 ⁇ C8 alkoxy, C1 ⁇ C9 alkoxy, C1 ⁇ C10 alkoxy, C1 ⁇ C11 alkoxy, C1 ⁇ C12 alkoxy, C1-C2-substituted alkoxy, C1-C3-substituted alkoxy, C1-C4-substituted alkoxy, C1-C5-substituted alkoxy, C1-C6-substituted alkoxy, C1-C7-substituted alkoxy, C1 It may be -C8-substituted alkoxy, C
- Mouth oxy CH CH CH O
- Mouth oxy CH CH CH O
- optionally substituted alkoxy means that the "alkoxy" or “substituted alkoxy” defined above may be shifted.
- heterocycle (group) refers to a group having a cyclic structure including carbon and hetero atoms.
- the hetero atom is selected from the group consisting of 0, S, and N forces, and may be the same or different, may contain one, or may contain two or more.
- Heterocyclic groups can be aromatic or non-aromatic, and can be monocyclic or polycyclic. Heterocyclic groups may be substituted.
- substituted or optionally a heterocycle refers to a “heterocyclic ring (group)” or a “substituted heterocycle (group)” as defined above.
- Base means that it may be misaligned.
- alcohol refers to an organic compound in which one or more hydrogen atoms of an aliphatic hydrocarbon are substituted with a hydroxyl group.
- ROH is also referred to as ROH.
- R is an alkyl group.
- R may be C1-C6 alkyl.
- examples of the alcohol include, but are not limited to, methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, 2-prono-Vole and the like.
- Carbocyclic group refers to a group containing a cyclic structure containing only carbon, and includes the above-mentioned “cycloalkyl”, “substituted cycloalkyl”, “cycloalkyl” And “substituted cycloalkyl”.
- Carbocyclic groups can be aromatic or non-aromatic And can be monocyclic or polycyclic.
- substituted carbocyclic group refers to a carbocyclic group in which H of the carbocyclic group is substituted by a substituent defined below.
- C3-C4 carbocyclic group C3-C5 carbocyclic group, C3-C6 carbocyclic group, C3-C7 carbocyclic group, C3-C8 carbocyclic group, C3-C9 carbocyclic group, C3-C10 Carbocyclic group, C3-C11 carbocyclic group, C3-C12 carbocyclic group, C3-C4-substituted carbocyclic group, C3-C5-substituted carbocyclic group, C3-C6-substituted carbocyclic group, C3- C7-substituted carbocycle, C3-C8-substituted carbocycle, C3-C9-substituted carbocycle, C3-C10-substituted carbocycle, C3-C11-substituted carbocycle or C3 It may be a -C12 substituted carbocyclic group.
- the carbocyclic group can also be a C4-C7 carbocyclic group or a C4-C7 substituted carbocyclic group.
- Examples of the carbon ring group include one in which one phenyl group hydrogen atom is deleted.
- the hydrogen deletion position may be any position that is chemically possible, whether on an aromatic ring or on a non-aromatic ring.
- substituted or optionally a carbocyclic group refers to a deviation from the above-defined “carbocyclic group” or “substituted carbocyclic group”. It also means.
- heterocyclic group refers to a group having a cyclic structure including carbon and hetero atoms.
- the heteroatom is selected from the group consisting of 0, S, and N forces, and may be the same or different, and may include one or two or more.
- Heterocyclic groups can be aromatic or non-aromatic, and can be monocyclic or polycyclic.
- “Substituted heterocyclic group” refers to a heterocyclic group in which H of the heterocyclic group is substituted by a substituent defined below.
- C3-C4 carbocyclic group C3-C5 carbocyclic group, C3-C6 carbocyclic group, C3-C7 carbocyclic group, C3-C8 carbocyclic group, C3-C9 carbocyclic group, C3-C10 Carbocyclic group, C3-C11 carbocyclic group, C3-C12 carbocyclic group, C3-C4-substituted carbocyclic group, C3-C5-substituted carbocyclic group, C3-C6-substituted carbocyclic group, C3 -C7 substituted carbocyclic group, C3-C8 substituted carbocyclic group, C3-C9 substituted carbocyclic group, C3-C10 substituted carbocyclic group, J3-J11 substituted carbocycle It may be a group or a 3- to C12-substituted carbocyclic group in which one or more carbon atoms have been substituted with
- the heterocyclic group may also be a C4-C7 carbocyclic group or a C4-C7 substituted carbocyclic group in which one or more carbon atoms have been substituted with one or more heteroatoms.
- a heterocyclic group examples thereof include a phenyl group, a pyrrolyl group, a furyl group, an imidazolyl group, and a pyridyl group.
- the position of deletion of hydrogen may be any position that is chemically possible, and may be on an aromatic ring or on a non-aromatic ring.
- a carbocyclic group or a heterocyclic group may be substituted with a divalent substituent in addition to being substituted with a monovalent substituent as defined below.
- halogen refers to a monovalent group of elements such as fluorine (F), chlorine (C1), bromine (Br), and iodine (I) belonging to Group 7B of the periodic table.
- hydroxy refers to a group represented by OH.
- substituted hydroxy refers to a compound in which H of hydroxy is substituted by a substituent defined below.
- thiol is a group in which an oxygen atom of a hydroxy group is substituted with a sulfur atom (mercapto group), and is represented by SH.
- substituted thiol refers to a group in which H of mercapto is substituted with a substituent defined below.
- cyano refers to a group represented by -CN.
- Niro means -NO
- substituted amino refers to an amino in which H of the amino is substituted with a substituent as defined below.
- carboxy refers to a group represented by -COOH.
- substituted carboxy refers to carboxy in which H is substituted with a substituent as defined below.
- acyl refers to a monovalent group formed by removing OH from a carboxylic acid.
- Representative examples of acetyl groups include acetyl (CH 2 CO 3) and benzoyl (CH 2 CO 3)
- substituted acyl refers to the hydrogen of an acyl substituted with a substituent as defined below.
- amide refers to a group in which hydrogen of ammonia is substituted with an acid group (acyl group). And preferably represented by -CONH. "Substituted amide” refers to an amide substituted
- carbon refers to one (C) which is a characteristic group of aldehyde and ketone.
- Substituted carbonyl refers to a carbonyl group substituted with a substituent selected as described below.
- Thiocarbol includes thioketone and thioaldehyde.
- Substituted thiocarbol means thiocarbonyl substituted with a substituent selected as described below.
- sulfol is a generic term for a substance containing SO 2 as a characteristic group.
- Substituted sulfol means a sulfol substituted with a substituent selected below.
- sulfiel is a generic term for a substance containing SO- which is a characteristic group.
- substituted sulfiel means sulfiel which has been replaced by a substituent selected below.
- aryl refers to a group formed by the removal of one hydrogen atom bonded to the ring of an aromatic hydrocarbon, and is included in the present specification as a carbocyclic group.
- substitution refers to replacement of one or more hydrogen atoms in an organic compound or a substituent with another atom or atomic group. It is also possible to remove one hydrogen atom and substitute with a monovalent substituent, and it is also possible to remove two hydrogen atoms and substitute with a divalent substituent.
- substitution refers to replacing one or more hydrogen atoms in an organic compound or a substituent with another atom or atomic group. It is also possible to remove one hydrogen atom and substitute with a monovalent substituent, and it is also possible to remove two hydrogen atoms and substitute with a divalent substituent.
- Examples of the substituent in the present invention include alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkyl, alkoxy, carbocyclic group, heterocyclic group, halogen, hydroxy, thiol, nitro nitro, Carboxy with ami, rubamoyl, asil, asilamino, chio Examples include, but are not limited to, carboxy, amide, substituted carboyl, substituted thiocarbol, substituted sulfonyl or substituted sulfinyl, or any inorganic substituent (e.g., a silicon-containing substituent). Not limited. In the present invention, such substituents can be appropriately used in designing linkers and biomolecules.
- each when a plurality of substituents are present, each may independently be a hydrogen atom or an alkyl or any inorganic substituent (for example, a silicon-containing substituent). It cannot be a hydrogen atom. More preferably, independently, when there are a plurality of substituents, each may be independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and a C1-C6 alkyl group or any inorganic substituent (eg, a silicon-containing substituent).
- the substituents may all have a substituent other than hydrogen, but preferably have at least one hydrogen, more preferably 2 to n (where n is the number of substituents) hydrogen. Can have. It may be preferable that the number of hydrogen atoms in the substituent is large.
- the substituents other than hydrogen are preferably C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C5 alkyl, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C2 alkyl, methyl or any inorganic substituent (e.g., (Containing substituent).
- any inorganic substituent e.g., (Containing substituent).
- Cl, C2, ..., Cn represent the number of carbon atoms. Accordingly, C1 is used to represent a substituent having one carbon atom.
- optical isomer refers to one or a pair of non-superimposable compounds in which the structure of the crystal or molecule is a mirror image. It is a form of stereoisomer that differs only in optical rotation, despite other properties being the same. In the present invention, those having high optical isomer purity can be preferably used.
- the term "protection reaction” refers to a reaction in which a protecting group such as Boc is added to a functional group for which protection is desired. By protecting the functional group with the protecting group, the reaction of the functional group having higher reactivity can be suppressed, and only the functional group having lower reactivity can be reacted.
- the protection reaction can be performed, for example, by a dehydration reaction.
- the term "deprotection reaction” refers to a reaction for eliminating a protecting group such as Boc.
- Examples of the deprotection reaction include a reaction such as a reduction reaction using PdZC.
- the deprotection reaction can be performed, for example, by hydrolysis.
- protecting group includes, for example, a fluorenylmethoxycarbol (Fmoc) group, an acetyl group, a benzyl group, a benzoyl group, a t-butoxycarbol group, t-butyldimethyl group, silyl group, trimethylsilylethyl group, N-phthalimidyl group, trimethylsilylethyloxycarbonyl group, 2-tro-5,5-dimethoxybenzyl group, 2-nitro-4,5-dimethoxy
- Typical protective groups include a benzyloxycarbol group and a sulfamate group.
- Protecting groups can be used to protect moieties that are not involved in binding in biomolecules.
- the protecting group can be used, for example, to protect a reactive functional group such as an amino group and a carboxyl group.
- Various protecting groups can be used depending on the reaction conditions and purpose.
- the protecting group for the hydroxy group includes acetyl, benzyl, silyl and derivatives thereof, and the protecting group for the amino group includes acetyl, benzyloxycarbyl, t-butoxycarbol and the like. Inductors and the like can be used.
- a trimethylsilylethyloxycarboxy group, a 2-toro-4,5 dimethoxybenzyloxycarboxy group or a derivative thereof is preferable.
- the target product is obtained by removing contaminants (unreacted weight loss, by-products, solvent, etc.) from the reaction solution by a method commonly used in the art (for example, extraction, distillation, After removal by washing, concentration, precipitation, filtration, drying, etc.), isolation by a combination of post-treatment methods commonly used in the art (eg, adsorption, elution, distillation, precipitation, precipitation, chromatography, etc.). obtain.
- a method commonly used in the art for example, extraction, distillation, After removal by washing, concentration, precipitation, filtration, drying, etc.
- isolation by a combination of post-treatment methods commonly used in the art (eg, adsorption, elution, distillation, precipitation, precipitation, chromatography, etc.). obtain.
- angiogenesis refers to the formation of new blood vessels and the activity of such formation.
- vascular network formation refers to the formation of new blood vessels or existing vascular forces and the activity of forming such networks! , U.
- the vascular network forming ability is determined by the angiogenesis index and the length of the newly formed blood vessel, or the vascular network forming ability or the vascular network forming index.
- Indicated by Angiogenesis can be determined by observing whether the reticulated force has formed (e.g., the bifurcation of a blood vessel joining more blood vessels and increasing the number of its junctions).
- the vascular network formation index is calculated as follows in this specification.
- the length of the new blood vessel is determined.
- the length is measured as follows. Observation was made with a stereomicroscope (Olympus, SZX12, Japan). The obtained image was read by Photoshop (registered trademark) (Adobe, Japan). Count in pixels.
- Nwl Network formation Although angiogenesis is observed as described above, each new blood vessel is a single fe.
- Nw2 In the middle stage of network formation, each new blood vessel is in a state in which a side branch on a ladder is engaged.
- Nw3 The network is in the final stage, and the ladder upper branch has more side branches.
- Nw4 Network maturation stage, showing a wide range of neovascular plexus.
- the ability to form a vascular network usually means such a vascular network formation index force of at least 2, preferably 2.5 or more, and more preferably 2.5 or more. It is understood that it is preferably 3 or more, more preferably 3.5 or more.
- blood vessel in the present specification is used in a sense commonly used in the art, and includes not only ordinary arteries and veins, but also capillaries.
- cell adhesion molecule or "adhesion molecule” is used interchangeably and refers to the approach of two or more cells to each other (cell adhesion) or the relationship between a substrate and a cell. Refers to molecules that mediate adhesion between Generally, a molecule involved in cell-cell adhesion (cell-cell adhesion) (cell-cell adhesion molecule) and a molecule involved in cell-extracellular matrix adhesion (cell-substrate adhesion) (cell-substrate adhesion molecule) Divided into In the present invention, any molecule is useful and can be used effectively.
- the cell adhesion molecule includes a protein on the substrate side during cell-substrate adhesion, but in the present specification, a protein on the cell side (for example, integrin) is also included, and other than the protein, Even a molecule, as long as it mediates cell adhesion, falls within the concept of a cell adhesion molecule or cell adhesion molecule herein.
- cadherin many molecules belonging to the immunoglobulin superfamily (NCAM, Ll, ICAM, facyclin ⁇ , ⁇ , etc.), selectins, and the like are known, and cell membranes are formed by unique molecular reactions. It is also known to combine
- the major cell adhesion molecule that works for cell-substrate adhesion is integrin, which recognizes and binds to various proteins contained in the extracellular matrix.
- integrin the major cell adhesion molecule that works for cell-substrate adhesion
- These cell adhesion molecules Are all located on the cell membrane surface and can be regarded as a type of receptor (cell adhesion receptor). Accordingly, such receptors located on the cell membrane can also be used in the tissue pieces of the present invention.
- Such receptors include, but are not limited to, for example, ⁇ integrin, j8 intedarin, CD44, syndecan, and aggrecan.
- extracellular matrix molecules such as fibronectin and laminin
- integrins binding partners
- the function of each adhesion receptor in cell-cell adhesion and cell-substrate adhesion is not strict, and varies depending on the distribution of partner molecules (ligands).
- partner molecules ligands
- some integrins are also involved in cell-cell adhesion, such as adhesion between blood cells.
- growth factors, cytokins, and the like are present as cell membrane proteins, they react with their receptors distributed on other cells and consequently adhere the cells.
- growth factors and cytokins can also be used as biomolecules contained in the tissue piece of the present invention.
- Whether a molecule is a cell adhesion molecule can be determined by biochemical quantification (SDS-PAG method, labeled collagen method), immunological quantification (enzyme antibody method, fluorescent antibody method, immunohistological examination) PD The determination can be made by determining a positive result in an assay such as the R method or the hybridization method.
- cell adhesion molecules include collagen, integrin, fibronectin, laminin, vitronectin, fibrinogen, the immunoglobulin parfamily (e.g., CD2, CD4, CD8, ICM1, ICAM2, VCAM1), selectin, cadherin, and the like. But not limited thereto.
- the adhesion factors used in the tissue piece of the present invention include Those that transmit such an auxiliary signal for cell activation into a cell are preferred. This is because, after being applied to an injured site in a certain tissue or organ as a tissue piece, cell activation can promote the proliferation of cells aggregated therein and / or cells in the tissue or organ. Whether such an auxiliary signal can be transmitted into cells is determined by biochemical quantification (SDS-PAGE, labeled collagen method), immunological quantification (enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay, immunofluorescent assay, immunohistochemical assay). Investigation) It can be determined by determining positive in the PDR method and the hybridization method.
- Examples of the cell adhesion molecule include cadherin, which is widely known as a cell adhesion molecule in tissue-fixing cell lines, and cadherin can be used in a preferred embodiment of the present invention.
- examples of cell adhesion molecules include immunoglobulin superfamily molecules (CD2, LFA-3, ICAM-1, CD2, CD4, CD8, ICM1, ICAM2, VCAM1).
- Integrin family molecules LFA-1, Mac-1, gpllbllla, pl50, 95, VLA1, VLA2, VLA3, VLA4, VLA5, VLA6, etc.
- selectin family molecules L-selectin, E-selectin, P— Selectin
- such molecules may be particularly useful for treating tissues or organs of the blood-immune system.
- the cell adhesion molecule In order for non-fixed cells to work in a specific tissue, the cell adhesion molecule needs to adhere to that tissue. In this case, it is thought that the adhesion between cells is gradually strengthened by the primary adhesion by the constantly expressed selectin molecule and the like, followed by the secondary adhesion of the activated integrin molecule and the like. Therefore, as a cell adhesion molecule used in the present invention, such a factor that mediates primary adhesion, a factor that mediates secondary adhesion, or both may be used together.
- cell adhesive protein refers to a protein having a function of mediating cell adhesion as described above. Therefore, in the present specification, the cell adhesive protein includes a protein on the substrate side during cell-substrate adhesion, but herein also includes a protein on the cell side (eg, integrin). For example, when cultured cells are seeded under serum-free conditions on a substrate (glass or plastic) to which the protein on the substrate side has been adsorbed, the integrin, a receptor, recognizes the cell adhesion protein and the cells Glue to the quality.
- the protein contained in the tissue piece of the present invention may advantageously include an RGD sequence such as RGD, YIGSR.
- RGD sequence such as RGD, YIGSR.
- cell adhesion proteins are present in extracellular matrices, cultured cell surfaces, and in plasma 'serum' various body fluids. Its functions in vivo include not only the adhesion of cells to the extracellular matrix, but also the movement, proliferation, morphology, and tissue construction of cells. Apart from cellular actions, some proteins exhibit a function of regulating blood coagulation and complement action. In the present invention, proteins having such functions may also be useful. Examples of such cell adhesion proteins include, but are not limited to, fibronectin, collagen, vitronectin, laminin, and the like.
- RGD molecule refers to a protein molecule containing the amino acid sequence RGD (Arg-Gly-Asp) or a functionally identical sequence thereof.
- the RGD molecule is characterized by containing RGD, which is an amino acid sequence useful as an amino acid sequence of a cell adhesion active site of a cell adhesion protein, or another amino acid sequence which is functionally equivalent.
- the RGD sequence was discovered as a cell adhesion site of fibronectin, and was later found on a number of molecules exhibiting cell adhesion activities, such as type I collagen, laminin, vitronectin, fibrinogen, von Willebrand factor, and entactin.
- the biomolecule in the present invention may be a chemically synthesized RGD molecule.
- RGD molecules include, but are not limited to, for example, the GRGDSP peptide, in addition to the naturally occurring molecules described above.
- integrin eg, the receptor for fibronectin
- a functionally equivalent molecule of RGD may use such an integrin. It can be identified by examining the interaction.
- integrin refers to a transmembrane glycoprotein that is a receptor involved in cell adhesion. Integrins are present on the cell surface and function when cells adhere to the extracellular matrix. It is known that it is involved in cell-cell adhesion in blood cell systems. Such integrins include, for example, fibronectin, vitronectin Receptor, such as protein and collagen, platelet lib / Ilia, macrophage Mac-1, lymphocyte LFA-1 and VLA-1-6, and Drosophila PSA, but are not limited thereto.
- Integrin usually has a heterodimer structure in which a ⁇ chain having a molecular weight of 130 to 210 kDa and a j8 chain having a molecular weight of 95 to 130 kDa are non-covalently and one-to-one associated with a j8 chain. Is it an ⁇ chain and f row? J, Q;, Q;, Q;, Q;, Q;, Q; ', Q;, ⁇ , ⁇ , ⁇ v , ⁇ ⁇ , and the like, but are not limited thereto.
- the j8 chain for example, j8, ⁇ , ⁇ , ⁇ , ⁇ ,
- Examples of such a heterodimer include, in addition to GpIIbllla, VLA-1, VLA-2, VLA-3, VLA-4, VLA-5, VLA-6, CD51 / CD29, LFA- 1, Mac- 1, pl50, 90 , vitronectin receptor, j8 4 subfamilies, j8 5 subfamily, j8 6 sub family, LPAM-1, HML- but are not limited to such 1.
- the extracellular domain of the ⁇ chain has a divalent cation binding site
- the extracellular domain of the ⁇ chain has a cysteine-rich region
- the intracellular domain of the ⁇ chain has a tyrosine phosphorylation site in many cases.
- the recognition site in the binding ligand is often an RGD sequence.
- an integrin may be an RGD molecule.
- the present invention provides a peptide comprising the sequence VVXGL (SEQ ID NO: 1), wherein X is a variant of an aromatic amino acid.
- the present invention provides a composition for angiogenesis, comprising a peptide comprising the sequence VVXGL, wherein X is a variant of an aromatic amino acid.
- the present invention provides a composition for forming a vascular network, comprising a peptide comprising the sequence VVXGL, wherein X is a variant of an aromatic amino acid.
- the composition for angiogenesis and the composition for forming a vascular network of the present invention represents an amino acid having an aromatic ring in a side chain or a variant thereof.
- X represents an amino acid having an aromatic ring in a side chain or a variant thereof.
- the present invention provides an angiogenic agent and a composition for forming a vascular network (also referred to as a vascular network forming agent), comprising the above-mentioned peptide.
- This sequence was designed based on the pentapeptide WYGL contained in SEQ ID NO: 2, and it is known to those skilled in the art that any variant other than WYGL may be within the scope of the present invention. it is obvious.
- X is a modified form of phenylalanine or tyrosine.
- This angiogenic agent when naturally occurring, has a tyrosine at X. Therefore, it is advantageous to be a variant of the natural amino acids phenalanine or tyrosine.
- the modification of tyrosine in the side chain fuel group has a strong angiogenic activity of a peptide having tyrosine in X and feniralanine which can also be seen as a variant thereof. Based on that.
- the vascular network-forming activity of the peptide having phenalanine which can also be regarded as a cysteine in X and a variant thereof, was also strong. Therefore, it is understood that by making similar modifications to the peptide of the present invention, both the angiogenic activity and the vascular network forming activity can be enhanced.
- the angiogenesis ability can be indicated by the number of angiogenesis.
- the angiogenic potential can be assessed by scoring, wherein the peptide of the invention or a variant thereof has a score of at least 3, preferably a score of 3.5, More preferably, it has a score of 4, and even more preferably has a score of 4.5.
- the vascular network forming ability can be indicated by a vascular network forming ability index.
- the ability of the peptide of the invention to form a vascular network is at least 5, preferably at least 7, more preferably at least 8, more preferably at least 9, more preferably at least 10, More preferably at least 11, more preferably at least 12, more preferably at least 13, more preferably at least 14, more preferably at least 15.
- Such a value is already remarkable when the vascular network forming ability index is actually, for example, about 8 or more. It is clear from the fact that the appearance of a reticulated blood vessel is observed almost always.
- the peptide of the present invention may contain an exogenous sequence as long as it contains the above specific sequence and has a vascular potential and a Z vascular network forming ability.
- the peptide of the present invention may be a peptide in which the para, ortho, or meta position of the side chain of the aromatic amino acid is substituted with an electron-withdrawing substituent.
- X in the peptide of the present invention may be a substituent in which an aromatic group of an aromatic amino acid is substituted with a hydrophobic group.
- a hydrophobic group for example, an alkyl group such as a methyl group
- the present invention may advantageously have any hydrophobic group substituted, especially in the para position, instead of the hydroxyl group of tyrosine.
- the hydrophobic group preferably increases the hydrophobicity index more preferably by 0.5, more preferably by 1.0, and more preferably by 1.5 or 2.
- hydrophobic group can be, for example, an alkyl group, but is not limited thereto.
- One preferred such hydrophobic group can include, but is not limited to, for example, an alkyl group or a substituted alkyl group.
- such hydrophobic groups are C1-C6 alkyl groups, even more preferably C1-C3 alkyl groups, and in one preferred embodiment may be methyl groups.
- the hydrophobic group eg, an alkyl group
- the hydrophobic group can be substituted with a nora group of an aromatic group.
- the aromatic side chain is preferably a phenyl group, but is not limited thereto. It is understood that another example is also preferable, such as a side chain of tributophan. Is done.
- amino acid sequence of the peptide of the present invention further comprises an amino acid sequence X -X -X -X -X -X
- X is an amino acid having an aromatic ring in the side chain or a leucine (I) or a variant thereof,
- the peptide may be a peptide containing the amino acid sequence represented by the above or a variant thereof.
- X is serine or a variant thereof, and more preferably, X is serine.
- X is palin or a variant thereof, more preferably
- X is Norin.
- X is palin or a variant thereof, more preferably
- X is Norin.
- X is glycine or a variant thereof, more preferably
- X is glycine
- X is leucine or a variant thereof, more preferably
- X is leucine
- X is arginine or a variant thereof, and in a more preferred embodiment, X is arginine.
- the peptide of the present invention may have a sequence of the combination of the above X to X, preferably of the embodiment.
- peptide having a physiological activity when one or more amino acids in the amino acid sequence are substituted or deleted, or one or more amino acids are inserted or added to the amino sequence. Even so, it is well known that the physiological activity may be maintained. Therefore, in the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1, one to three amino acids are substituted, or one or two amino acids located at one or both ends are deleted, or the amino acid Other amino acids at one or both ends of the sequence Peptides having an amino acid sequence to which a sequence is added (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “peptide variants” for convenience) and having an angiogenic action and a Z or vascular network forming action are also included in the scope of the present invention. It is.
- the modified peptide of the present invention can be modified by modifying the side chain of the aromatic amino acid with a natural amino acid in another amino acid sequence (for example, an alkyl group or a nitro group on the side chain of the amino acid). , Introduction of halogen, etc.). Further, such an amino acid may be a D-type amino acid.
- a peptide having an amino acid sequence in which one amino acid at the N-terminus or C-terminus of the amino acid sequence of WXGL has been deleted has an angiogenesis effect and a Z- or vascular network-forming effect comparable to those of the peptide having the amino acid sequence represented by VVXGL. It is understood that they can be activated and fall within the scope of the present invention.
- one or two amino acids are substituted in the sequence other than X in the amino acid sequence shown in VVXGL.
- a peptide having an amino acid sequence in which one amino acid located at one or both ends is deleted, or another amino acid sequence is added at one or both ends of the amino acid sequence Peptides having a neoplastic and Z or vascular network forming effect may be provided.
- the number of substituents on the aromatic ring, preferably on the phenol group is 1 to 5, and preferably 1 to 3.
- the aromatic ring is preferably a condensed ring such as a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring containing a benzene ring (may be a heterocyclic ring such as a tributophan side chain), and particularly preferably a fluor group. is there.
- the upper limit of the size of the peptide used in the present invention is not limited at all. However, if it is too large, production becomes difficult, handling is inconvenient, and vascular new life per unit weight is required. Therefore, the total number of amino acids of the peptide is usually 4 to 350, preferably 4 to 50, more preferably 5 to 20, and more preferably 5 to 10 And more preferably 6 to 10. Amino shown in X—X—X—X—X—X—X
- Whether the peptide of the present invention has an angiogenic action and an action of forming a Z or vascular network was determined by specifically ascertaining whether or not a microcell filled with a peptide solution was placed on the back of a mouse as shown in the Examples below. It can be examined by observing the state of formation of capillaries in the tissue surrounding the implanted tissue.
- the peptide or variant of the present invention can be easily synthesized manually or by a conventional method using a commercially available peptide synthesizer.
- a large-sized peptide is produced by a conventional method using genetic engineering, then modifying the side chain or modifying the genetic engineering technique to use a modified tRNA (Taki M. et al., FEBS Lett. 507, 35-38, 2001; Hohsaka T. et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc, 121, 34-40, 1999; and Hohsa ka T. et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. , 118, 9778—9779, 1996).
- the peptide used in the present invention is designed based on amino acids that constitute a natural protein, and is degraded to amino acids by the action of peptidase in vivo. High safety. In fact, no toxicity was observed in in vivo experiments using mice performed in the following examples. This indicates that the amount of use that exerts its medicinal effect is not so toxic, and that it has been used! /
- the angiogenic agent and the vascular network forming agent of the present invention may be targeted to capillaries. This is because the capillaries can have the normal physiological activity that they have naturally by being networked in a network.
- the present invention provides, for the first time, a conjugate having enhanced angiogenic activity and Z or vascular network forming ability, thereby achieving a powerful therapeutic effect, stabilizing effect, and prevention that could not be achieved by conventional angiogenic agents. The effect can be demonstrated.
- Angiogenesis can also be promoted by binding the peptide to a carrier and implanting the carrier with the peptide bound into a living body. This can selectively act on the necessary parts because it is fixed to the carrier, and a new DDS (drug delivery system) M) as a potential.
- Local administration of the angiogenesis agent of the present invention to a biomaterial implanted portion by application, spraying or the like promotes angiogenesis and promotes postoperative healing.
- the carrier include, but are not particularly limited to, biomacromolecules such as fats and proteins used for bone substitutes, tooth substitutes, and artificial organs.
- a protein in the present specification, when used as a carrier, unless otherwise specified, the term "protein” includes a protein-containing complex such as a glycoprotein and a phosphoprotein). Can be used as a carrier.
- the protein used as a carrier may be a biocompatible, non-uniform protein, and in particular, a cell-adhesive protein in order to improve bonding with a biological tissue.
- a cell adhesion protein include, but are not limited to, collagen (gelatin), fibronectin, vitronectin, laminin, and the like, and partial hydrolyzate thereof.
- these proteins are preferably purified proteins from which allergens have been removed, and are also preferable in terms of preventing allergic reactions.
- various collagens derived from animals are commercially available as collagen. However, these contain allergens with low purity and are poor in reproducibility of quality, so that it is not preferable to apply them to clinical use.
- gelatin obtained by partially hydrolyzing animal-derived collagen and removing allergens is commercially available for clinical use, it is preferable to use such purified collagen or a partially hydrolyzed product thereof.
- the amount of the peptide bound to the carrier is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected.
- the weight ratio of the carrier to the peptide is about 100: 1 to 1: 1. And preferably about 20: 1 to 5: 1.
- the bond between the carrier and the peptide is preferably a covalent bond. Bonding can be easily carried out, for example, by bonding the amino group at the N-terminus of the peptide to any amino group in the carrier using a bonding cross-linking agent such as dartalaldehyde. An example of a suitable bonding method is described. In the case of binding to a resin such as an artificial organ, a monomer containing a group that can be used for binding to a peptide, such as an amino group, is contained in the resin. Can be previously copolymerized, and the amino group or the like can be bonded to the N-terminal amino group of the peptide.
- the carrier to which the peptide is bound can be embedded in a living body as it is, in addition to spraying the coated text.
- the peptide-bound carrier can be used alone or in combination with other medicinal ingredients as a suture, various orthopedic materials, a wound adhesion promoter, and the like.
- a mixture of the carrier protein bound with the peptide and other materials such as carbonate apatite or the cell adhesive protein not bound with the peptide of the present invention can be used as a bone substitute or the like.
- the amount of the peptide contained in the final biomaterial such as bone substitute is not particularly limited, it is usually about 0.1 to: LOmg per 100 g of biomaterial.
- the carriers used herein are preferably pharmaceutically acceptable, such as antioxidants, preservatives, coloring agents, flavorings, and diluents, milk ⁇ includes, but is not limited to, narcotics, suspending agents, solvents, fillers, bulking agents, buffers, delivery vehicles, diluents, excipients and Z or pharmaceutical adjuvants.
- the medicament of the invention will be in the form of a composition comprising a peptide of the invention, or a variant or derivative thereof, together with one or more physiologically acceptable carriers, excipients or diluents. Is administered.
- suitable vehicles may be water for injection, physiological solutions, or artificial cerebrospinal fluid, which may be supplemented with other materials common in compositions for parenteral delivery. is there.
- an acceptable carrier, excipient or stabilizer is non-toxic to the recipient, and preferably inert at the dosages and concentrations employed.
- phosphates, citrates or other organic acids e.g., phosphates, citrates or other organic acids; ascorbic acid, a-tocopherol; low molecular weight polypeptides; proteins (e.g., serum albumin, gelatin or immunoglobulins); hydrophilic polymers (e.g.
- Amino acids eg, glycine, glutamine, asparagine, arginine or lysine
- monosaccharides eg., glutamine, asparagine, arginine or lysine
- Disaccharides and other carbohydrates including glucose, mannose or dextrin
- chelating agents eg, EDTA
- sugar alcohols eg, mannitol or sorbitol
- salt-forming counterions eg, sodium
- Non-ionic surface activators eg, Tween, pluronic or polyethylene glycol (PEG)
- exemplary suitable carriers include neutral buffered saline or saline mixed with serum albumin.
- the product is formulated as a lyophilizate using a suitable excipient (eg, sucrose).
- suitable excipient eg, sucrose
- Other standard carriers, diluents and excipients may be included as desired.
- Other exemplary compositions include Tris buffer at pH 7.0-8.5 or acetate buffer at pH 4.0-5.5, which further comprises sorbitol or a suitable alternative thereof. May be included.
- the carrier is preferably a protein, more preferably a cell adhesion protein.
- the cell adhesion protein used in the present invention may be collagen.
- the peptide of the present invention can be locally administered to a tissue in which angiogenesis is desired, alone or in the form of an injection solution dissolved in a physiological buffer.
- Local administration of the angiogenic agent of the present invention to a wound or the like caused by surgery or trauma by injection, application, spraying, etc. promotes angiogenesis and promotes wound healing.
- the peptide concentration in the peptide solution used for injection or application or spraying is not particularly limited. Usually, the concentration is about 1 ng (nanogram) to (/ zg (microgram) ZmL.
- the dose can be appropriately selected depending on the size and depth of the wound or the like, but it is sufficient that the whole wound is covered with the peptide solution. It can be administered once to several times every day to several days until the wound heals.
- the injection solution may contain various components usually contained in a remedy for wounds, such as other disinfectants and anti-inflammatory analgesics.
- the medicament of the present invention can be administered orally or parenterally.
- the medicament of the present invention can be administered intravenously or subcutaneously.
- the medicament used in the present invention may be in the form of a pyrogen-free, pharmaceutically acceptable aqueous solution.
- the preparation of such pharmaceutically acceptable compositions takes into account pH, isotonicity, stability, etc. By doing so, those skilled in the art can easily carry out.
- the administration method includes oral administration, parenteral administration (for example, intravenous administration, intramuscular administration, subcutaneous administration, intradermal administration, mucosal administration, rectal administration, vaginal administration, local administration to the affected area, Skin administration).
- Formulations for such administration may be provided in any formulation.
- Such preparations include, for example, solutions, injections, and sustained-release preparations.
- the medicament of the present invention may contain a physiologically acceptable carrier, excipient or stabilizing agent (Japanese Pharmacopoeia, 14th edition, its supplement or its latest edition, Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, if necessary). , 18th Edition, AR Lrennaro, ed., Mack Publisnmg Company, 1990, etc.) and a glycan composition having the desired degree of purity to form a lyophilized cake or aqueous solution. Can be prepared and stored.
- the amount of the composition of the present invention to be administered depends on the purpose of use, target disease (type, severity, etc.), age, weight, sex, medical history, cell morphology or type of the patient, and the like. Thus, those skilled in the art can easily determine.
- the frequency of applying the treatment method of the present invention to the subject (or patient) also depends on the purpose of use, target disease (type, severity, etc.), patient age, weight, sex, medical history, and course of treatment. In consideration of the above, a person skilled in the art can easily determine. Frequently, for example, once every few months (eg, once a week – once a month). It is preferable to administer once a week to once a month while monitoring the progress
- the present invention provides a method for generating a blood vessel, which comprises administering the composition for angiogenesis of the present invention to a site of a patient in which angiogenesis is desired. I do.
- the present invention forms a vascular network, which comprises administering the composition for forming a vascular network of the present invention to a site of a patient where formation of a vascular network is desired.
- compositions used in the above methods can take any of the forms detailed herein. It is understood that the administration method used herein can also use any form.
- the present invention provides a composition for forming an angiogenesis and Z or vascular network of the invention at a site in a patient where angiogenesis and Z or vascular network formation is desired. Provided for angiogenesis and forming a Z or vascular network.
- patient refers to an organism to which the treatment of the present invention is applied, and is also referred to as “subject” or “subject”.
- the patient can preferably be a human.
- compositions of the present invention provide methods of treatment, inhibition and prevention by administering to a patient an effective amount of a composition of the present invention.
- the compositions of the present invention can be substantially purified (including, for example, conditions in which there is substantially no ability to limit its effects or substances that produce undesirable side effects).
- the animal targeted by the present invention may be any organism (eg, an animal (eg, a vertebrate, an invertebrate)) as long as it has an immune system or a similar system.
- it is a vertebrate animal (e.g., a metal eel, alfalfa, chondrichthyes, teleosts, amphibians, reptiles, birds, mammals, etc.), and more preferably, a mammal (e.g., a monotreme, marsupial) , Rodents, dermis, skin wings, carnivores, carnivores, carnivores, longnoses, ungulates, artiodactyla, tubulars, squamata, squids, cetaceans, primates, rodents Teeth, egrets).
- a vertebrate animal e.g., a metal eel, alfalfa, chondrichthyes,
- Illustrative patients include, but are not limited to, animals such as, for example, horses, pigs, horses, birds, cats, dogs, and the like. More preferably, primates (eg, chimpanzees, diphones, humans) are targeted. Most preferably, humans are targeted.
- animals such as, for example, horses, pigs, horses, birds, cats, dogs, and the like.
- primates eg, chimpanzees, diphones, humans
- humans are targeted.
- compositions of the present invention can be administered orally or parenterally.
- administration methods include oral administration, parenteral administration (e.g., intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous, intradermal, mucosal (intranasal, intravaginal, sub-airway, intrathecal, rectal) Mucosal and intestinal mucosa), topical administration to the affected area, dermal administration, etc.).
- compositions used in the present invention are preferably pyrogen-free.
- the preparation of such pharmaceutically acceptable compositions depends on the skill of the art in considering pH, isotonicity, stability and the like. Can be easily performed.
- Formulations for such administration may be provided in any formulation.
- Such preparation forms include, for example, liquid preparations, injections, and sustained release preparations.
- Methods of introduction include, but are not limited to, administration as an oral agent, inhalation (eg, lungs), syringe, catheter, injection using a tube, needleless injection, gene gun, and the like. In this case, it can be administered together with other biologically active agents.
- the amount of the medicament used in the prophylactic method of the present invention can be easily determined by those skilled in the art in consideration of the purpose of use, target disease (eg, type), age, weight, and medical history of the patient. I can do it.
- the frequency of applying the treatment method of the present invention to a patient (or patient) also depends on the purpose of use, target disease (type, severity, etc.), age, weight, medical history, and course of the patient, and the like. Those skilled in the art can easily determine.
- the frequency may include, for example, daily-once-monthly administration (eg, once a week, once a month), or once every year before the epidemic.
- the interval between boosts can be at least about 3 weeks.
- the dose of the composition or the like of the present invention varies depending on the age, body weight, symptoms, administration method, and the like of the patient, and is not particularly limited.
- administering refers to giving the medicament or the like of the present invention or a pharmaceutical composition containing the same, alone or in combination with another therapeutic agent, to a host to be treated. means.
- the combination may be administered, for example, either as a mixture, simultaneously, separately but simultaneously or concurrently; or sequentially. This includes the indication that the combined agents are administered together as a therapeutic mixture, and the procedure in which the combined agents are administered separately but simultaneously (e.g., through separate mucous membranes to the same individual). Also included.
- “Combination” administration further includes separately administering one of the compounds or agents given first, followed by the second.
- the administration of the medicament of the present invention may be performed by any method, but it is advantageous to use needleless injection. This is a drug that exempts the patient from administration without undue burden.
- the needleless syringe in the present invention refers to a gas pressure or an elastic part without using a needle. It refers to a medical device that moves a piston by the force of a material to inject a drug solution onto the skin and administers a drug component subcutaneously, more preferably, into cells under the skin.
- ShimaJet TM manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation
- Medi-Jector Vision (Elite medical Inc. ⁇ )
- Henget manufactured by Penjet
- Penjet manufactured by Penjet
- the present invention relates to a medicament for angiogenesis, comprising a peptide called VVXGL, wherein X is a modified aromatic amino acid, a peptide or a modified variant thereof, or a salt thereof.
- a use for the manufacture of a composition comprising a peptide called VVXGL, wherein X is a modified aromatic amino acid, a peptide or a modified variant thereof, or a salt thereof.
- the present invention comprises a pharmaceutical composition for forming a vascular network, comprising a sequence of WXGL, wherein X is a variant of an aromatic amino acid, a peptide or a variant thereof, or a salt thereof.
- a pharmaceutical composition for forming a vascular network comprising a sequence of WXGL, wherein X is a variant of an aromatic amino acid, a peptide or a variant thereof, or a salt thereof.
- compositions used in the above uses may take any of the forms detailed herein.
- any technique of cultivated land can be used as a technique for producing a pharmaceutical composition in the art.
- the region having an angiogenic activity and Z or vascular network forming activity is included in the amino acid sequence shown in WXL, the peptide having the amino acid sequence shown in VVXGL or a partial amino acid thereof is substituted or its terminal.
- cell-adhesive action of cell-adhesive peptides such as fibronectin and laminin is exerted by RGD, a region consisting of only three amino acids, YIGSR, and a region consisting of only five amino acids. It can be inferred from the fact that they are things. Therefore, since the region having an angiogenic activity is included in the amino acid sequence shown in VVXGL, the peptide having the amino acid sequence shown in WXGL or a partial amino acid thereof has been substituted or the terminal region has been deleted.
- the above-mentioned peptide or peptide variant region may have an interaction. Is considered to exert an angiogenic effect as long as it is exposed.
- the three-dimensional structure of an artificial peptide can be easily predicted from its primary sequence using commercially available computer software. The peptides whose regions are exposed can be easily designed.
- Computer programs for performing computer modeling can also be used in the process of selecting fragments or chemicals.
- Useful programs that can be used in linking individual chemicals or fragments include:
- CAVEAT PA Bartlett et al., "CAVEAT: A Program to Facilitate the Structure-Derived Design of Biologically Active MoleculesJ (Molecular Recognition in Chemical and Biological Problems, Special Pu b., Royal Chem. Soc., 78 G, Lauri and PA Barlett, "CAVEAT: a Program to Facilitate the Design of Organic Moleculesj, J. Comput. Aided Mol. Des., 8, 51-66 (1994). CAVEAT is available from the University of California, Berkeley, CA.
- HOOK (MB Eisen et al., "HOOK: A Program for Finding Novel Molecular Architectures that Satisfy the Chemical and Steric Requirements of a Macromolecule Binding Site", Proteins: Struct., Funct., Genet., 19, 199-221 (1994)). HOOK is available from Molecular Simulations, San Diego, CA.
- LUDI H. — J. Bohm, “The Computer Program LUDI: A New Met hod for the De Novo Design of Enzyme InhibitorsJ, J. Comp. Aid.
- LUDI is available from Molecular Simulations Incorporated, San Diego, CA.
- the material is optimized Competitive angiogenic potential can be tested and optimized by computational evaluation.
- the substance of the present invention can be further optimized by calculation, for example, so that there is no electrostatic repulsion interaction with surrounding water molecules.
- Such non-complementary electrostatic interactions include charge-charge repulsion interactions, dipole-dipole repulsion interactions, and charge-dipole repulsion interactions.
- Another approach possible with the present invention is the computational screening of small molecule databases for chemicals or compounds that can bind, in whole or in part, to LOX-1.
- the quality of the fit of such a material to the binding site can be determined from either shape complementarity or the estimated interaction energy [EC Meng et al., J. Comp. Chem. , 16, 505-524 (1992)].
- the compound library used in the present invention can be prepared or obtained by any means including, but not limited to, combinatorial chemistry technology, fermentation methods, plant and cell extraction procedures, and the like. be able to. Methods for creating combinatorial libraries are well known in the art. For example, ER Fel der, Chimia 1994, 48, 512-541; Gallop et al., Med. Chem. 1994, 37, 1233-1251; RA Houghten, Trends Genet. 1993, 9, 235-239; Houghten et al., Nature 1991, 354, 84-86; Lam et al., Nature 1991, 354, 82-84; Carell et al., Chem. Biol.
- the computer used may be any computer as long as the program can be executed, for example, Windows (registered trademark) -based, UNIX (registered trademark) -based, Mac (registered trademark) OS-based, LINUX-based, and the like. But not limited to them.
- the peptide was synthesized using a solid phase synthesis method developed by Merrifield (Merrifield, RB (1963) Solid phase peptide synthesis. I. the synthesis of a tetrapeptide. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 85, 2149-2154), and the Fmoc method using a 9-fluorenylmethycarboxyl (Fmoc) group as a protecting group for the CK-amino group.
- the synthesized peptides are as follows, and include, in principle, those having WXGL (SEQ ID NO: 1) and SWYGLR (SEQ ID NO: 2) which is a natural type as a control.
- SEQ ID NO: 2 SWYGLR
- SEQ ID NO: 4 SVVF (pMe) GLR (where F (pMe) is obtained by substituting a methyl group at the para-position of the phenyl group of phenylalanine)
- SEQ ID NO: 5 SWF (pF) GLR (where F (pF) is a phenyl group of phenylalanine with a fluoro group substituted at the para-position)
- SEQ ID NO: 6 SWF (pNO) GLR (where F (pNO) is phenyl of phenylalanine)
- SEQ ID NO: 7 SWF (D) GLR (where F (D) is the D-form of phenylalanine)
- SEQ ID NO: 8 SWF (pEt) GLR (where F (pEt) is fenilalanine With a phenyl group substituted with an ethyl group at the para-position)
- SEQ ID NO: 9 SWF (pPr) GLR (where F (pPr) is a phenyl group in which the propyl group is substituted at the para-position of the phenyl group of hua- / realanine)
- SEQ ID NO: 10 SWF (pHex) GLR (where F (pHex) is a phenyl group substituted with a hexyl group at the para-position of the phenyl group)
- SEQ ID NO: 17 VVF (pMe) GLR (where F (pMe) is a phenylalanine in which a methyl group is substituted at the para-position of the phenyl group)
- SEQ ID NO: 18 SWF (pMe) GL (where F (pMe) is phenylalanine in which a methyl group is substituted at the para-position of the phenyl group)
- SEQ ID NO: 19 ⁇ 1 ⁇ ) 0 (where? 1 ⁇ 6) is the substitution of a methyl group at the para-position of the phenyl group of phenylalanine
- SEQ ID NO: 21 SWF (pMe) GLR (where, F (pMe) is a compound obtained by substituting a methyl group at the ortho-position of the phenyl group of phenylalanine)
- SEQ ID NO: 22 SWF (pF) GLR (where, F (pF) is a ferrule having a fluoro group substituted at the ortho position of the ferule group)
- SEQ ID NO: 23 SWF (pNO) GLR (where F (pNO) is
- SEQ ID NO: 24 SWF (pMe) GLR (where F (pMe) is a phenylalanine in which a methyl group is substituted at the meta position of the phenyl group)
- SEQ ID NO: 25 SWF (pF) GLR (where F (pF) is a ferrule having a fluoro group substituted at the meta-position of the ferule group)
- SEQ ID NO: 26 SWF (pNO) GLR (where F (pNO) is
- Rat vascular endothelial cells are three-dimensionally implanted in the presence of the peptide of the present invention synthesized in Example 1.
- TRLEC cells transformed rat lung endothelial cells
- TRLEC cells were seeded in the collagen I layer mixed with a peptide solution having a concentration of lOngZml, and cultured in a carbon dioxide incubator for 14 days. Controls were performed with no factor (1) and with VEGF (+), a protein known conventionally as an angiogenic factor.
- the cultured cells were observed under a microscope. As a result, the control showed no luminal formation.
- the peptide of the present invention and VEGF formed a lumen, and cells surrounding the lumen were adhered to each other. Observation of the lumen with an electron microscope at 7000x magnification As a result, it was confirmed that a plurality of micropirai (fine cell projections) were formed on the inner wall of the lumen. Further, at a magnification of 15,000, the junction of the vascular endothelial cells surrounding the lumen was observed. As a result, a region where the endothelial cells were tightly bonded, that is, a tight junction was observed.
- the endothelial cells acquired polarity and formed a lumen.
- Polarity is a property of cells having a part that shares functions such as head and tail.Even if endothelial cells are normally cultured, they lose polarity and do not form a lumen, so it was induced by this peptide. Is shown.
- the peptide of the present invention was significantly superior in tube formation length to VEGF. From these results, the peptide of the present invention has the effect of adhering cells to each other in a tissue composed of vascular endothelial cultured cells to form a lumen between them (in vivo, this lumen is Blood vessels).
- FIG. FIG. 2 shows a comparison between VEGF and the peptide SVVYG LR (SEQ ID NO: 2).
- FIGS. 4 and 5 show the state of angiogenesis when peptide SWYGLR (SEQ ID NO: 2) was used. As shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5, it was clarified that the blood vessels were newly formed, and the newly formed blood vessels were renewed and began to be reticulated. Therefore, it was revealed that the peptide of the present invention is useful as an angiogenic agent and a Z or vascular network forming agent. When this was compared with VEGF and the control, peptide SVVYGLR (SEQ ID NO: 2) showed angiogenesis and reticulation, whereas VEGF showed angiogenesis but no reticulation. I got it. In the control, neither neovascularization nor reticulation was observed. Therefore, the peptide of the present invention has an angiogenic action and a vascular network. It has been shown that the ability to form stalk may be enhanced.
- VEGF 0.00 ⁇ 0
- Peptide S WF (pF) GLR (SEQ ID NO: 5): 4.1
- Peptide SWF (pNO) GLR SEQ ID NO: 6: 4.1.
- Score 2 100 or more and less than 125
- VEGF 2.75 ⁇ 1.03
- Peptide SWF (pMe) GLR SEQ ID NO: 4
- Peptide SWF (pF) GLR SEQ ID NO: 5
- Nwl Network formation Although neovascularization was observed in the above, each new blood vessel was a single fe.
- Nw2 In the middle stage of network formation, each new blood vessel is in a state in which a side branch on a ladder is engaged.
- Nw3 The network is in the final stage, and the upper branch of the ladder has more side branches.
- Nw4 Network maturation stage, showing a wide range of neovascular plexus.
- SWF (pMe) GLR and SW FGLR showed higher network index capacity than SVVYGLR on both days 5 and 10.
- SWYGLR SEQ ID NO: 2
- VVYGLR SEQ ID NO: 13
- SVVYGL SEQ ID NO: 12
- FIG. 6 shows a diagram summarizing these results. This is sometimes called a balance sheet in this specification.
- FreAlagin AD type As a carrier protein, FreAlagin AD type (manufactured by Miyagi-Danigaku Kogyo Co., Ltd., molecular weight 2000 to 20000), which is a gelatin obtained by partially hydrolyzing animal-derived collagen and removing allergens, was used.
- the FreAlagin AD type has been approved for clinical use.
- FreAlagin AD carrier protein
- reaction mixture was desalted with a G10 column (Pharmacia) using 5% acetic acid as an eluent.
- the main peak was lyophilized to give a bound compound almost quantitatively.
- Rat vascular endothelial cells were three-dimensionally cultured in the presence of the gelatin-binding peptide thus prepared. This operation was specifically performed as follows. Transformed rat lung endothelial cells (TRLEC cells) were used. Gelatin-binding peptide (conjugate) and collagen type I are mixed at a ratio of 1:10, and 10 ng (nanogram) / m TRLEG cells were seeded in the conjugate 'collagen mixed solution mixed layer at a concentration of 1 and cultured in a carbon dioxide incubator for 14 days. The control was no factor (1), and the protein VEGF (+) conventionally known as an angiogenic factor was used as a positive control.
- TRLEC cells Transformed rat lung endothelial cells
- Gelatin-binding peptide (conjugate) and collagen type I are mixed at a ratio of 1:10, and 10 ng (nanogram) / m TRLEG cells were seeded in the conjugate 'collagen mixed solution mixed layer at a
- the control was vigorous, forming no lumen at all.
- the peptide conjugate of the present invention and VEGF formed a lumen, and cells surrounding the lumen were adhered to each other.
- the adhesive activity of the side chain phenyl group substituted with a hydrophobic group was enhanced as compared with the natural type (SEQ ID NO: 2).
- gelatin-binding peptide has the effect of adhering cells to each other and forming a lumen between them in a tissue composed of cultured vascular endothelial cells (in vivo, this lumen It is evident that the effect of the peptide modification seen in vitro will be retained in vivo.
- a gelatin-binding peptide having a concentration of 100ngZml was dissolved in collagen I at a ratio of 1:10 to obtain a peptide-binding gelatin-collagen mixed solution having a concentration of 100ngZml.
- a microcell consisting of a 0.45 mm diameter cylinder up and down with a Millipore filter (MILLIPORE, USA, DAS Assay kit) in the back of the mouse, the gelatin-binding peptide and VEGF solution were placed in the microcell.
- MILLIPORE Millipore filter
- a phosphate buffer (PBS) containing no peptide alone was also injected (control). Five days later, the state of the tissue around the microcell was observed with a microscope.
- Gelatin binding peptide using SEQ ID NO: 2: 19.0
- Gelatin binding peptide using SEQ ID NO: 3: 20.0
- the present invention was demonstrated to have angiogenic ability even in vivo.
- Such an effect is a force that was not seen in VEGF, which has a remarkable angiogenesis ability, and it can be said that it provides a powerful effect that has not been obtained conventionally.
- the peptide of the present invention has a strong angiogenic action and a Z or vascular network forming ability, and can be used for a biological substitute material such as an artificial bone, an implant in an artificial organ, and a repair of the organ.
- a bone substitute is made of hydroxyapatite, a representative of artificial bone, to which a gelatin-binding peptide is attached as shown in Example 4. By implanting this in place of bone, it became possible to form a vascular network around it.
- a piece of tissue was prepared using polylactic glycolic acid (PLGA) as a support, the peptide SWYGLR (SEQ ID NO: 2) produced in Example 1 and its variant as a biomolecule, The angiogenic ability and the vascular network forming ability of the peptide of the present invention were demonstrated.
- PLGA polylactic glycolic acid
- Vycryl voriractin 910 mesh (copolymer of glycolic acid to lactate 90:10, PLGA), a biodegradable synthetic polymer, has a nitted mesh on the lumen side and a woven mesh on the outside (Woven mesh)
- a total of three sheets (0.2 mm each, 0.6 mm in total) were stacked, and a collagen-crosslinked PLGA-collagen composite membrane was used as a scaffold.
- a group in which only collagen type I was cross-linked using collagen as a cross-linking agent, and a group in which collagen SW was further cross-linked to peptide SWYGLR (SEQ ID NO: 2) were prepared.
- the crosslinking method is as follows. A 20 mm diameter patch is sewn to the main trunk of the pulmonary artery.
- ⁇ Cross-linking method The support is impregnated with a collagen solution. Next, freeze-dry and crosslink with dartal aldehyde saturated steam at 37 ° C for about 4 hours. Finally, the mixture was shaken three times in a 0.1 M glycine aqueous solution for 15 minutes, washed three times with distilled water, and freeze-dried. Thereby, a collagen-containing support is produced. The peptide SVVYGLR is immersed in this solution and crosslinked similarly.
- the strength of the support was measured with a tensile tester.
- a strip material having a width of 5 mm and a length of 30 mm was loaded in the short axis direction at a speed of 10 mmZ, and the load at break and the elastic modulus were measured.
- the tensile strength was 75 ⁇ 5N for the PLGA-collagen composite membrane and 34 ⁇ 11N for dataraldehyde-treated pericardium.
- Membranes to which the angiogenic peptide was bound also had comparable tensile strengths.
- VECs vascular endothelial cells
- VSMCs smooth muscle cells
- PSH-26 fluorescent antibodies
- Cell adhesion efficiency was compared between a PLGA-collagen composite membrane with only cross-linking treatment and a PLGA-collagen composite membrane with collagen type I and cross-linked type IV.
- coloring area (%) of the fluorescent dye per visual field it was found that the type of vascular endothelial cells (VECs) and smooth muscle cells (VSMCs), and those of the slipped cells were also collagen type I and type IV.
- Cell engraftment was observed in the crosslinked-treated support of the present invention, in which the coloring region of the fluorescent dye was significantly large.
- the number of blood vessels can be determined by performing immunohistological staining with a factor VIII-related antigen or the like and then counting.
- a sample is fixed with 10% buffered formalin, embedded in paraffin, several serial sections are prepared from each sample, and frozen. The frozen sections were then treated with a 2% paraformaldehyde solution in PBS for 5 minutes at room temperature. Fix and immerse in methanol containing 3% hydrogen peroxide for 15 minutes, then wash with PBS. Cover the sample with a serum albumin solution for approximately 10 minutes to block nonspecific reactions. Specimens are incubated overnight with an EPOS conjugated antibody against factor VIII-related antigen, which binds to HRP.
- vascular endothelial cells After washing the samples with PBS, they are immersed in a diaminobenzidine solution (eg, 0.3 mg Zml diaminobenzidine in PBS) to obtain positive staining.
- a diaminobenzidine solution eg, 0.3 mg Zml diaminobenzidine in PBS
- the stained vascular endothelial cells are counted, for example, under an optical microscope at a magnification of 200 times, and the counting result is expressed, for example, as the number of blood vessels per square millimeter.
- the presence of factor VIII is confirmed by determining whether the number of blood vessels is statistically significantly increased in calories, thereby confirming the presence of, for example, endothelial cells and vascular new life. Gender can be determined.
- Elastica 'Van' Giesson staining was performed to stain the elastic fibers.
- the procedure is as follows. If necessary, deparaffinize (for example, with pure ethanol), wash with water, and immerse the sample in a resorcin fuchsin solution available from Mutoh Chemical for 40-60 minutes. The sample is then washed with 70% alcohol and soaked in omni hematoxylin for 15 minutes. After that, rinse with running water for 5 minutes, and soak in Fan (1) 'Gison's solution for 2 minutes. Wash, quickly dehydrate, clear, enclose and confirm staining.
- HE staining was performed to observe the fixation of the support in the cells.
- the procedure is as follows. If necessary, the sample was deparaffinized (for example, with pure ethanol), washed with water, and immersed in omni hematoxylin for 10 minutes. After that, the sample was washed with running water, and colored with ammonia water for 30 seconds. After that, it is washed with running water for 5 minutes, stained with a 10-fold diluted solution of eosin hydrochloride for 2 minutes, dehydrated, cleared, sealed, and the staining can be confirmed.
- the cells were stained by the von Kossa method to observe calcification.
- the procedure is as follows. If necessary, remove paraffin (for example, with pure ethanol), wash with water (distilled water), and immerse in a 25% silver nitrate solution (under indirect light) for 2 hours. Then, wash with distilled water and soak in 42% 2% sodium thiosulfate (hypo) for 5 minutes. Then, wash with running water for 5 minutes Then soak for 5 minutes in Kärnmüroth. After that, it is washed with running water for 5 minutes, dehydrated, transparent, sealed, and stained.
- VECs autologous vascular endothelial cells
- VSMCs smooth muscle cells
- VSMCs vascular endothelial cells and squamous muscle cells
- Both the prepared support and the support seeded with autologous cells showed no apparent thrombus formation.
- HE staining showed PLGA remaining, with intervening connective tissue.
- the seeded vascular endothelial cells labeled with the fluorescent antibody are only scattered on the luminal side, and most of the cells are from the PLGA-collagen composite membrane. It was suggested that they had dropped out.
- Vascular endothelial cells were examined by factor VIII staining and smooth muscle cell ex SMA immunostaining. In both groups, a continuous monolayer of vascular endothelial cells was observed by factor VIII immunostaining, and oriented smooth muscle cells were observed in the lumen by ⁇ -S ⁇ immunostaining.
- the present invention is useful in any aspect where it is desired to form an angiogenic ability and a vascular network (medicine, medicine, dentistry, etc.).
- the present invention is also useful for treating lifestyle-related diseases (eg, myocardial infarction, cerebral infarction, ischemic diseases such as obstructive aortic sclerosis).
Landscapes
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
- Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
- Epidemiology (AREA)
- Immunology (AREA)
- General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
- Biochemistry (AREA)
- Molecular Biology (AREA)
- Biophysics (AREA)
- Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
- Cardiology (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
- Peptides Or Proteins (AREA)
- Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
Abstract
Description
明 細 書 Specification
血管新生作用化合物 Angiogenic compounds
技術分野 Technical field
[0001] 本発明は、医薬の分野にある。より詳細には、本発明は、新規血管新生剤を形成 するための医薬に関する。 [0001] The present invention is in the field of medicine. More particularly, the present invention relates to a medicament for forming a novel angiogenic agent.
背景分野 Background fields
[0002] 種々の活性ペプチドの報告があり、種々の領域において医薬として利用され始め ている。 [0002] There have been reports of various active peptides, and they have begun to be used as medicines in various fields.
[0003] 血管が関与する分野においてもこのような活性ペプチドの探求は盛んになつてきた 。特に、血管新生、血管形成などを司る因子の探求が種々行われており、阻害作用 および活性ィ匕作用の両方とも力 種々の疾患および障害 (例えば、がん、虚血性疾 患など)の治療および予防にぉ 、て活用されて 、る。 [0003] In fields involving blood vessels, the search for such active peptides has become active. In particular, various factors have been investigated for factors controlling angiogenesis, angiogenesis, etc., and both inhibitory and active effects are effective. Treatment of various diseases and disorders (eg, cancer, ischemic disease, etc.) It is used for prevention and prevention.
[0004] 現在先進国の死因として、心筋梗塞、脳梗塞など血管の閉塞に起因する虚血のた めにおこる疾患がかなり多数を占めている。また、死因とならないまでも閉塞性大動 脈硬化症のように下肢の切断を余儀なくされ、 QOL (生活の質)の損なわれる疾患も 見られる。これらの虚血性疾患に対しては、新たに血管を形成することによる血管ネ ットワーク形成療法に大きな期待が寄せられているが、上述のように血管形成だけで は、必ずしも十分ではなぐ実際にネットワークを形成し、十分に栄養を末端にまで行 き渡らせ、物質交換がスムーズになされるように血管が形成されることが望ま U、。 [0004] At present, diseases caused by ischemia caused by occlusion of blood vessels such as myocardial infarction and cerebral infarction account for a large number of deaths in developed countries. In addition, some diseases, such as obstructive atherosclerosis, which require amputation of the lower limbs and cause a loss of quality of life (QOL), even if they do not cause death. For these ischemic diseases, there is great expectation for vascular network formation therapy by forming new blood vessels, but as described above, vascular formation alone is not always sufficient, It is desirable that blood vessels be formed so that nutrients can be sufficiently transmitted to the ends and material exchange can be performed smoothly.
[0005] 一方、副作用を含む安全性、代謝性等で大きな利点を有するペプチドは、設計が 比較的容易であり高効率な合成法および検定法が確立されて 、る。加えてアミノ酸 誘導体はコンビナトリアルケミカルライブラリー構築の都合よいビルディングユニットで あり、固相合成法によって短時間で構造の最適化が可能である。従って、血管新生 をより強力に促進する化合物が存在すれば、これを合成し、単独投与あるいは複合 的に投与することができ有利である。 [0005] On the other hand, peptides that have great advantages in safety, metabolism, etc., including side effects, are relatively easy to design, and highly efficient synthetic methods and assay methods have been established. In addition, amino acid derivatives are convenient building units for combinatorial chemical libraries, and their structure can be optimized in a short time by solid-phase synthesis. Therefore, if a compound that promotes angiogenesis more strongly exists, it can be advantageously synthesized and administered alone or in combination.
[0006] 従来は、ペプチドの配列に改変を入れるような実験が試みられて 、る(特許文献 1) 。しかし、このようなペプチドレベルのみの改変では、活性の増進には限界がある。特 許文献 1では、ペプチド以外の改変も試みられているが、ペプチドを越えるような血 管新生活性を有する化合物は見出されて 、な 、。 [0006] Conventionally, experiments have been attempted in which a peptide sequence is modified (Patent Document 1). However, such modification at the peptide level alone has a limitation in enhancing the activity. Special In Patent Document 1, modifications other than peptides have been attempted, but compounds having angiogenic activity exceeding those of peptides have been found.
[0007] そこで、当該分野にお!、て、血管新生が天然のペプチドよりも亢進されて 、る化合 物の登場が待ち望まれて ヽる。 [0007] Therefore, in the art, angiogenesis has been enhanced more than natural peptides, and the appearance of a compound has been awaited.
特許文献 l :WO 03Z030925号 Patent document l: WO 03Z030925
発明の開示 Disclosure of the invention
発明が解決しょうとする課題 Problems to be solved by the invention
[0008] 従って、本発明は、天然のペプチド(SVVYGLR (配列番号 2) )よりも血管新生能 が亢進された物質を探索することを目的とする。本発明はまた、そのような物質を有 効成分として含む、ヒトの治療等の臨床使用が可能な新規な血管新生剤を提供する ことを目的とする。 [0008] Therefore, an object of the present invention is to search for a substance having an enhanced angiogenic ability compared to a natural peptide (SVVYGLR (SEQ ID NO: 2)). Another object of the present invention is to provide a novel angiogenic agent containing such a substance as an active ingredient and which can be used clinically for human treatment and the like.
[0009] 本発明者らは、鋭意研究の結果、特定のアミノ酸配列において芳香族基に特定の 改変を行ったペプチドが、予想外に、血管新生作用が亢進されていることを見出し、 本発明を完成した。 The present inventors have conducted intensive studies and found that a peptide having a specific modification of an aromatic group in a specific amino acid sequence unexpectedly has enhanced angiogenic activity. Was completed.
[0010] 従って、本発明は以下を提供する。 Accordingly, the present invention provides the following.
(1) VVXGL (配列番号 1)という配列を含み、ここで Xは芳香族アミノ酸の改変体であ る、ペプチドを含む、血管新生のための組成物。 (1) A composition for angiogenesis, comprising a peptide, comprising a sequence of VVXGL (SEQ ID NO: 1), wherein X is a variant of an aromatic amino acid.
(2)上記 Xは、フエ-ルァラニンまたはチロシンの改変体である、項目 1に記載の組成 物。 (2) The composition according to item 1, wherein X is a modified form of phenalanine or tyrosine.
(3)上記改変は、上記芳香族アミノ酸の側鎖のパラ位、オルト位またはメタ位が電子 吸引性の置換基で置換されるペプチドを含む、項目 1に記載の組成物。 (3) The composition according to item 1, wherein the modification includes a peptide in which the para, ortho, or meta position of the side chain of the aromatic amino acid is substituted with an electron-withdrawing substituent.
(4)上記 Xは、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基が疎水性基で置換される、項目 1に記 載の組成物。 (4) The composition according to item 1, wherein X is a group in which an aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid is substituted with a hydrophobic group.
(5)上記 Xは、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基がアルキル基で置換される、項目 1に 記載の組成物。 (5) The composition according to item 1, wherein X is an aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid substituted with an alkyl group.
(6)上記 Xは、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基のパラ位がアルキル基で置換される、 項目 1に記載の組成物。 (6) The composition according to item 1, wherein X is substituted with an alkyl group at the para-position of the aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid.
(7)上記 Xは、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基が C1〜C6アルキル基で置換される、 項目 1に記載の組成物。 (7) The X is an aromatic amino acid wherein the aromatic group is substituted with a C1-C6 alkyl group, Item 1. The composition according to Item 1.
(8)上記 Xは、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基が C1〜C3アルキル基で置換される、 項目 1に記載の組成物。 (8) The composition according to item 1, wherein in X, the aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid is substituted with a C1-C3 alkyl group.
(9)上記 Xは、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基がメチル基で置換される、項目 1に記 載の組成物。 (9) The composition according to item 1, wherein X is a group in which the aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid is substituted with a methyl group.
(10)上記 Xは、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基のパラ位がメチル基で置換される、 項目 1に記載の組成物。 (10) The composition according to item 1, wherein X is substituted with a methyl group at the para-position of the aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid.
(11)上記 Xは、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基はフエ-ル基であり、そのノ 位カ チル基で置換される、項目 1に記載の組成物。 (11) The composition according to item 1, wherein in X, the aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid is a phenyl group, and the aromatic group is substituted with a phenyl group.
(12) WXGLという配列を含み、ここで Xは芳香族アミノ酸の改変体である、ぺプチ ドを含む、血管ネットワーク形成のための組成物。 (12) A composition for forming a vascular network, comprising a peptide comprising the sequence WXGL, wherein X is a variant of an aromatic amino acid.
(13)上記 Xは、フエ-ルァラニンまたはチロシンの改変体である、項目 12に記載の 組成物。 (13) The composition according to item 12, wherein the X is a modified form of phenalanine or tyrosine.
(14)上記改変は、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基のパラ位、オルト位またはメタ位 が電子吸引性の置換基で置換されるペプチドを含む、項目 12に記載の組成物。 (14) The composition according to item 12, wherein the modification includes a peptide in which the para, ortho, or meta position of the aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid is substituted with an electron-withdrawing substituent.
(15)上記 Xは、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基が疎水性基で置換される、項目 12 に記載の組成物。 (15) The composition according to item 12, wherein X is a group in which the aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid is substituted with a hydrophobic group.
(16)上記 Xは、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基がアルキル基で置換される、項目 12 に記載の組成物。 (16) The composition according to item 12, wherein X is an aromatic amino acid in which the aromatic group is substituted with an alkyl group.
(17)上記 Xは、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基のパラ位がアルキル基で置換される 、項目 12に記載の組成物。 (17) The composition according to item 12, wherein in X, the para-position of the aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid is substituted with an alkyl group.
(18)上記 Xは、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基が C1〜C6アルキル基で置換される 、項目 12に記載の組成物。 (18) The composition according to item 12, wherein in X, the aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid is substituted with a C1-C6 alkyl group.
(19)上記 Xは、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基が C1〜C3アルキル基で置換される 、項目 12に記載の組成物。 (19) The composition according to item 12, wherein in X, the aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid is substituted with a C1-C3 alkyl group.
(20)上記 Xは、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基がメチル基で置換される、項目 12に 記載の組成物。 (20) The composition according to item 12, wherein X is a group in which the aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid is substituted with a methyl group.
(21)上記 Xは、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基のパラ位がメチル基で置換される、 項目 12に記載の組成物。 (21) The X is substituted with a methyl group at the para-position of the aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid, Item 13. The composition according to Item 12.
(22)上記 Xは、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基はフエ-ル基であり、そのパラ位でメ チル基で置換される、項目 12に記載の組成物。 (22) The composition according to item 12, wherein in X, the aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid is a phenyl group, and the aromatic group is substituted with a methyl group at the para position.
(23) WXGL (配列番号 1)という配列を含み、 Xは芳香族アミノ酸の改変体である、 ペプチド。 (23) A peptide comprising the sequence of WXGL (SEQ ID NO: 1), wherein X is a variant of an aromatic amino acid.
(24)上記 Xは、フエ-ルァラニンまたはチロシンの改変体である、項目 23に記載の ペプチド。 (24) The peptide according to item 23, wherein X is a modified form of phenalanine or tyrosine.
(25)上記改変は、上記芳香族アミノ酸の側鎖のパラ位、オルト位またはメタ位が電 子吸引性の置換基で置換されるペプチドを含む、項目 23に記載のペプチド。 (25) The peptide according to item 23, wherein the modification includes a peptide in which the para, ortho, or meta position of the side chain of the aromatic amino acid is substituted with an electron-withdrawing substituent.
(26)上記 Xは、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基が疎水性基で置換される、項目 23 に記載のペプチド。 (26) The peptide according to item 23, wherein X is one in which an aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid is substituted with a hydrophobic group.
(27)上記 Xは、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基がアルキル基で置換される、項目 23 に記載のペプチド。 (27) The peptide according to item 23, wherein X is an aromatic amino acid in which the aromatic group is substituted with an alkyl group.
(28)上記 Xは、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基のパラ位がアルキル基で置換される 、項目 23に記載のペプチド。 (28) The peptide according to item 23, wherein in X, the para position of the aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid is substituted with an alkyl group.
(29)上記 Xは、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基が C1〜C6アルキル基で置換される 、項目 23に記載のペプチド。 (29) The peptide according to item 23, wherein in X, the aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid is substituted with a C1-C6 alkyl group.
(30)上記 Xは、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基が C1〜C3アルキル基で置換される 、項目 23に記載のペプチド。 (30) The peptide according to item 23, wherein in X, the aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid is substituted with a C1-C3 alkyl group.
(31)上記 Xは、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基がメチル基で置換される、項目 23〖こ 記載のペプチド。 (31) The peptide according to item 23, wherein X is a group in which an aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid is substituted with a methyl group.
(32)上記 Xは、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基のパラ位がメチル基で置換される、 項目 23に記載のペプチド。 (32) The peptide according to item 23, wherein X is a para-substituted aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid substituted with a methyl group.
(33)上記 Xは、上記芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族基はフエ-ル基であり、そのノ 位がメ チル基で置換される、項目 23に記載のペプチド。 (33) The peptide according to item 23, wherein in X, the aromatic group of the aromatic amino acid is a phenyl group, and the amino position is substituted with a methyl group.
(34)血管新生が所望される患者の部位に項目 1〜: L 1のいずれか 1項に記載の組成 物を投与することを含む、血管を新生させるための方法。 (34) A method for forming a blood vessel, which comprises administering the composition according to any one of Items 1 to L1 to a site of a patient where angiogenesis is desired.
(35)血管のネットワークの形成が所望される患者の部位に項目 12〜22のいずれか 1項に記載の組成物を投与することを含む、血管ネットワークを形成させるための方 法。 (35) Any of items 12 to 22 at the site of the patient where formation of a vascular network is desired A method for forming a vascular network, comprising administering the composition according to claim 1.
(36) WXGLという配列を含み、ここで Xは芳香族アミノ酸の改変体もしくはその改 変体あるいはその塩である、ペプチドの、血管新生のための医薬組成物の製造のた めの使用。 (36) Use of a peptide comprising the sequence WXGL, wherein X is a modified aromatic amino acid or a modified variant thereof or a salt thereof, for the manufacture of a pharmaceutical composition for angiogenesis.
(37) WXGLという配列を含み、ここで Xは芳香族アミノ酸の改変体もしくはその改 変体あるいはその塩である、ペプチドの、血管ネットワークを形成させるための医薬 糸且成物の製造のための使用。 (37) Use of a peptide called WXGL, wherein X is a modified aromatic amino acid or a modified variant thereof or a salt thereof, for use in the production of a pharmaceutical composition for forming a vascular network of a peptide. .
[0011] 従って、本発明のこれらおよび他の利点は、添付の図面を参照して、以下の詳細な 説明を読みかつ理解すれば、当業者には明白〖こなることが理解される。 [0011] Accordingly, it is understood that these and other advantages of the present invention will become apparent to those skilled in the art upon reading and understanding the following detailed description, with reference to the accompanying drawings.
発明の効果 The invention's effect
[0012] 本発明により、強い血管新生作用を有するペプチドが見出され、それを有効成分と して含む新規な血管新生剤が初めて提供された。本発明の血管新生剤は、人工骨 等の生体代用材料を用いた臓器の再生'修復、生活習慣病として大きな部分を占め る心筋梗塞、脳梗塞、閉塞性大動脈硬化症などの虚血性疾患の治療にも有用であ る。 [0012] According to the present invention, a peptide having a strong angiogenic action was found, and a novel angiogenic agent containing the peptide as an active ingredient was provided for the first time. The angiogenesis agent of the present invention is useful for regenerating and repairing organs using biological substitutes such as artificial bones, and for ischemic diseases such as myocardial infarction, cerebral infarction, and obstructive aortic sclerosis, which are a large part of lifestyle-related diseases. It is also useful for treatment.
図面の簡単な説明 Brief Description of Drawings
[0013] [図 1]図 1は、細胞同士を接着させてそれらの間に管腔を形成する作用の模式図を示 す。 FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of the action of adhering cells to form a lumen between them.
[図 2]図 2は、 VEGFおよびペプチド SWYGLR (配列番号 2)を比較した管腔を形 成する作用例を示す。 FIG. 2 shows an example of the action of forming a lumen by comparing VEGF and peptide SWYGLR (SEQ ID NO: 2).
[図 3]図 3は、実施例 3において、 5日後に、 DASアツセィによってマイクロセル周辺の 組織の様子を顕微鏡で観察した図を示す。 [FIG. 3] FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the state of a tissue around a microcell observed with a microscope using a DAS assay 5 days later in Example 3.
[図 4]図 4は、ペプチド SWYGLR (配列番号 2)を用いた場合の血管新生および血 管ネットワーク形成の様子を示す。 FIG. 4 shows the state of angiogenesis and formation of a vascular network when peptide SWYGLR (SEQ ID NO: 2) was used.
[図 5]図 5は、ペプチド SWYGLR (配列番号 2)ならびに本発明の改変ペプチドを用 いた場合の血管新生および血管ネットワーク形成の様子である。 FIG. 5 shows the state of angiogenesis and vascular network formation using peptide SWYGLR (SEQ ID NO: 2) and the modified peptide of the present invention.
[図 6]図 6は、本発明のペプチドの血管ネットワーク能のバランスシートを示す。 配列表の説明 FIG. 6 shows a balance sheet of the vascular network ability of the peptide of the present invention. Description of Sequence Listing
配列番号 1は、本発明のペプチドの基本構造を示すアミノ酸配列 WXGLである。こ こで Xは芳香族アミノ酸の改変体である。 SEQ ID NO: 1 is an amino acid sequence WXGL showing the basic structure of the peptide of the present invention. Where X is a variant of an aromatic amino acid.
配列番号 2は、ォステオボンチン内の血管新生能を有するペプチド(SVVYGLR)で ある。 SEQ ID NO: 2 is a peptide (SVVYGLR) capable of angiogenesis in osteobontin.
配列番号 3:SWFGLR SEQ ID NO: 3: SWFGLR
配列番号 4: SWF (pMe) GLR (ここで、 F (pMe)は、フエ二ルァラニンのフエニル基 のパラ位にメチル基が置換されたものである) SEQ ID NO: 4: SWF (pMe) GLR (where F (pMe) is a phenyl group of phenylalanine substituted with a methyl group at the para-position)
配列番号 5: SWF (pF) GLR (ここで、 F (pF)は、フエ-ルァラニンのフエ-ル基の パラ位にフルォロ基が置換されたものである) SEQ ID NO: 5: SWF (pF) GLR (where F (pF) is obtained by substituting a fluoro group at the para-position of the phenyl group of phenylalanine)
配列番号 6:SWF(pNO ) GLR (ここで、 F(pNO )は、フエ二ルァラニンのフエ-ル SEQ ID NO: 6: SWF (pNO) GLR (where F (pNO) is a phenylalanine phenol
2 2 twenty two
基のパラ位に-トロ基が置換されたものである) With-toro group substituted at the para position of the group)
配列番号 7:SWF(D)GLR (ここで、 F(D)は、フエ-ルァラニンの D体である) 配列番号 8:SWF(pEt)GLR (ここで、 F(pEt)は、フエ二/レアラニンのフエニル基 のパラ位にェチル基が置換されたものである) SEQ ID NO: 7: SWF (D) GLR (where F (D) is the D-form of phenalanine) SEQ ID NO: 8: SWF (pEt) GLR (where F (pEt) is The phenyl group of realanine is substituted with an ethyl group at the para position.)
配列番号 9: SWF (pPr) GLR (ここで、 F (pPr)は、フエ-ルァラニンのフエ-ル基の パラ位にプロピル基が置換されたものである) SEQ ID NO: 9: SWF (pPr) GLR (where F (pPr) is a phenyl group in which a propyl group is substituted with a propyl group at the para position)
配列番号 10:SWF(pHex)GLR (ここで、 F(pHex)は、フエ二ルァラニンのフエ二 ル基のパラ位にへキシル基が置換されたものである) SEQ ID NO: 10: SWF (pHex) GLR (where, F (pHex) is phenylylalanine in which a hexyl group is substituted at the para-position of the phenyl group)
配列番号 11:SWYGL SEQ ID NO: 11: SWYGL
配列番号 12:SWFGL SEQ ID NO: 12: SWFGL
配列番号 13:WYGLR SEQ ID NO: 13: WYGLR
配列番号 14:WFGLR SEQ ID NO: 14: WFGLR
配列番号 15:WYGL SEQ ID NO: 15: WYGL
配列番号 16:WFGL SEQ ID NO: 16: WFGL
配列番号17:\^ ?( ^^)00^(ここで、 F(pMe)は、フエ二ルァラニンのフエニル基 のパラ位にメチル基が置換されたものである) SEQ ID NO: 17: \ ^? (^^) 00 ^ (where F (pMe) is a phenyl group of phenylalanine substituted with a methyl group at the para-position)
配列番号 18: SWF (pMe) GL (ここで、 F (pMe)は、フエ-ルァラニンのフエ-ル基 のパラ位にメチル基が置換されたものである) SEQ ID NO: 18: SWF (pMe) GL (where F (pMe) is a phenyl group of phenylalanine With a methyl group substituted at the para-position)
配列番号19 :VVF (pMe) GL (ここで、F (pMe)は、フエ-ルァラニンのフエ-ル基 のパラ位にメチル基が置換されたものである) SEQ ID NO: 19: VVF (pMe) GL (where F (pMe) is a phenylalanine in which a methyl group is substituted at the para-position of the phenyl group)
配列番号 20は、本発明のペプチドの別の模式的配列例である。 SEQ ID NO: 20 is another exemplary sequence of the peptide of the present invention.
発明を実施するための最良の形態 BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
[0015] 以下、本発明を説明する。本明細書の全体にわたり、単数形の表現は、特に言及 しない限り、その複数形の概念をも含むことが理解されるべきである。従って、単数形 の冠詞 (例えば、英語の場合は「a」、「an」、「the」など)は、特に言及しない限り、そ の複数形の概念をも含むことが理解されるべきである。また、本明細書において使用 される用語は、特に言及しない限り、当該分野で通常用いられる意味で用いられるこ とが理解されるべきである。したがって、他に定義されない限り、本明細書中で使用さ れる全ての専門用語および科学技術用語は、本発明の属する分野の当業者によつ て一般的に理解されるのと同じ意味を有する。矛盾する場合、本明細書 (定義を含め て)が優先する。 Hereinafter, the present invention will be described. It should be understood that throughout this specification, the use of the singular includes the plural concept unless specifically stated otherwise. Therefore, it is to be understood that singular articles (eg, "a", "an", "the", etc. in English) also include the concept of the plural unless specifically stated otherwise. . It is to be understood that the terms used in the present specification are used in a meaning commonly used in the art unless otherwise specified. Thus, unless otherwise defined, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this invention belongs. . In case of conflict, the present specification, including definitions, will control.
[0016] (用語) [0016] (term)
本明細書において使用される用語「タンパク質」、「ポリペプチド」、「オリゴペプチド」 および「ペプチド」は、本明細書において同じ意味で使用され、任意の長さのアミノ酸 のポリマーをいう。このポリマーは、直鎖であっても分岐していてもよぐ環状であって もよい。アミノ酸は、天然のものであっても非天然のものであってもよぐ改変されたァ ミノ酸であってもよい。これらの用語はまた、複数のポリペプチド鎖の複合体へとァセ ンブルされたものを包含し得る。この用語はまた、天然または人工的に改変されたァ ミノ酸ポリマーも包含する。そのような改変としては、例えば、ジスルフイド結合形成、 グリコシル化、脂質化、ァセチル化、リン酸ィ匕または任意の他の操作もしくは改変(例 えば、標識成分との結合体化)。この定義にはまた、例えば、アミノ酸の 1または 2以 上のアナログを含むポリペプチド (例えば、非天然のアミノ酸などを含む)、ペプチド 様ィ匕合物 (例えば、ぺプトイド)および当該分野において公知の他の改変が包含され る。 The terms "protein", "polypeptide", "oligopeptide" and "peptide" as used herein are used interchangeably herein and refer to a polymer of amino acids of any length. The polymer may be linear or branched or cyclic. The amino acids may be naturally occurring or non-naturally occurring or modified amino acids. These terms may also include those assembled into a complex of multiple polypeptide chains. The term also embraces natural or artificially modified amino acid polymers. Such modifications include, for example, disulfide bond formation, glycosylation, lipidation, acetylation, phosphorylation, or any other manipulation or modification (eg, conjugation with a labeling component). This definition also includes, for example, polypeptides containing one or more analogs of an amino acid (eg, including unnatural amino acids, etc.), peptide-like conjugates (eg, peptoids) and those known in the art. Other modifications are included.
[0017] 本明細書において使用される用語「ポリヌクレオチド」、「オリゴヌクレオチド」および「 核酸」は、本明細書において同じ意味で使用され、任意の長さのヌクレオチドのポリ マーをいう。この用語はまた、「誘導体オリゴヌクレオチド」または「誘導体ポリヌクレオ チド」を含む。「誘導体オリゴヌクレオチド」または「誘導体ポリヌクレオチド」とは、ヌク レオチドの誘導体を含む力、またはヌクレオチド間の結合が通常とは異なるオリゴヌク レオチドまたはポリヌクレオチドをいい、互換的に使用される。そのようなオリゴヌタレ ォチドとして具体的には、例えば、 2 ' O—メチルーリボヌクレオチド、オリゴヌクレオ チド中のリン酸ジエステル結合がホスホロチォエート結合に変換された誘導体オリゴ ヌクレオチド、オリゴヌクレオチド中のリン酸ジエステル結合が N3,一 P5,ホスホロアミ デート結合に変換された誘導体オリゴヌクレオチド、オリゴヌクレオチド中のリボースと リン酸ジエステル結合とがペプチド核酸結合に変換された誘導体オリゴヌクレオチド、 オリゴヌクレオチド中のゥラシルが C 5プロピ-ルゥラシルで置換された誘導体オリ ゴヌクレオチド、オリゴヌクレオチド中のゥラシルが C— 5チアゾールゥラシルで置換さ れた誘導体オリゴヌクレオチド、オリゴヌクレオチド中のシトシンが C— 5プロピニルシト シンで置換された誘導体オリゴヌクレオチド、オリゴヌクレオチド中のシトシンがフエノ キサジン修飾シトシン(phenoxazine— modified cytosine)で置換された誘導体 オリゴヌクレオチド、 DNA中のリボースが 2,—O プロピルリボースで置換された誘 導体オリゴヌクレオチドおよびオリゴヌクレオチド中のリボースが 2,ーメトキシエトキシリ ボースで置換された誘導体オリゴヌクレオチドなどが例示される。他にそうではな!/、と 示されなければ、特定の核酸配列はまた、明示的に示された配列と同様に、その保 存的に改変された改変体 (例えば、縮重コドン置換体)および相補配列を包含するこ とが企図される。具体的には、縮重コドン置換体は、 1またはそれ以上の選択された( または、すべての)コドンの 3番目の位置が混合塩基および Zまたはデォキシイノシ ン残基で置換された配列を作成することにより達成され得る(Batzer et al. , Nucl eic Acid Res. 19 : 5081 (1991) ; Ohtsuka et al. , J. Biol. Chem. 260 : 26 05 - 2608 (1985); Rossolini et al. , Mol. Cell. Probes 8 : 91— 98 (1994)[0017] As used herein, the terms "polynucleotide", "oligonucleotide" and " "Nucleic acid" is used interchangeably herein and refers to a polymer of nucleotides of any length. The term also includes "derivative oligonucleotides" or "derivative polynucleotides." “Derivative oligonucleotide” or “derivative polynucleotide” refers to an oligonucleotide or polynucleotide having an unusual force or a bond between nucleotides containing a derivative of a nucleotide, and is used interchangeably. Specific examples of such an oligonucleotide include, for example, 2 ′ O-methyl-ribonucleotide, a derivative oligonucleotide in which a phosphodiester bond in an oligonucleotide is converted to a phosphorothioate bond, and a phosphorus in an oligonucleotide. Derivative oligonucleotide in which acid diester bond is converted to N3,1-P5, phosphoramidate bond, derivative oligonucleotide in which ribose and phosphodiester bond in oligonucleotide are converted to peptide nucleic acid bond, and peracil in oligonucleotide is C 5 Derivative oligonucleotide substituted with propylperacyl, derivative oligonucleotide in which peracyl in oligonucleotide is substituted with C-5 thiazole peracyl, cytosine in oligonucleotide substituted with C-5 propynylcytosine Derivative oligonucleotides, derivative oligonucleotides in which cytosine in the oligonucleotide is replaced by phenoxazine-modified cytosine, derivative oligonucleotides in which ribose in DNA is replaced by 2, -O-propylribose, and oligonucleotides Derivative oligonucleotides in which ribose in nucleotides is substituted with 2, -methoxyethoxy ribose are exemplified. Unless otherwise indicated! /, A particular nucleic acid sequence also has a conservatively modified version thereof (e.g., a degenerate codon substitution), similar to the explicitly indicated sequence. ) And complementary sequences are contemplated. Specifically, degenerate codon substitutions create a sequence in which the third position of one or more selected (or all) codons is replaced with a mixed base and a Z or deoxyinosine residue. (Batzer et al., Nucleic Acid Res. 19: 5081 (1991); Ohtsuka et al., J. Biol. Chem. 260: 2605- 2608 (1985); Rossolini et al., Mol Cell. Probes 8: 91- 98 (1994)
) o ) o
本明細書にぉ 、て「複合分子」とは、ポリペプチド、ポリヌクレオチド、脂質、糖など の分子が複数種連結してできた分子をいう。そのような複合分子としては、例えば、 糖脂質、糖ペプチドなどが挙げられるがそれらに限定されない。本発明のペプチドは 、このように、アルキル基、 PEG基、糖鎖などが結合した複合体を包含することが理 解される。 As used herein, the term “complex molecule” refers to a molecule formed by linking a plurality of molecules such as polypeptides, polynucleotides, lipids, and sugars. Such complex molecules include, for example, Examples include, but are not limited to, glycolipids, glycopeptides, and the like. It is understood that the peptide of the present invention includes a complex in which an alkyl group, a PEG group, a sugar chain, and the like are bound.
[0019] 本明細書において「単離された」生物学的因子 (例えば、核酸またはタンパク質な ど)とは、その生物学的因子が天然に存在する生物体の細胞内の他の生物学的因 子 (例えば、核酸である場合、核酸以外の因子および目的とする核酸以外の核酸配 列を含む核酸;タンパク質である場合、タンパク質以外の因子および目的とするタン パク質以外のアミノ酸配列を含むタンパク質など)から実質的に分離または精製され たものをいう。「単離された」核酸およびタンパク質には、標準的な精製方法によって 精製された核酸およびタンパク質が含まれる。したがって、単離された核酸およびタ ンパク質は、化学的に合成した核酸およびタンパク質を包含する。 [0019] As used herein, an "isolated" biological agent (eg, a nucleic acid or protein) is defined as another biological agent in a cell of an organism in which the biological agent naturally exists. Factors (e.g., when it is a nucleic acid, a nucleic acid containing a factor other than the nucleic acid and a nucleic acid sequence other than the target nucleic acid; when it is a protein, it contains an factor other than the protein and an amino acid sequence other than the target protein) Protein or the like). "Isolated" nucleic acids and proteins include nucleic acids and proteins that have been purified by standard purification methods. Thus, isolated nucleic acids and proteins include chemically synthesized nucleic acids and proteins.
[0020] 本明細書にぉ 、て使用される「精製された」生物学的因子 (例えば、核酸またはタ ンパク質など)とは、その生物学的因子に天然に随伴する因子の少なくとも一部が除 去されたものをいう。したがって、通常、精製された生物学的因子におけるその生物 学的因子の純度は、その生物学的因子が通常存在する状態よりも高い (すなわち濃 縮されている)。 [0020] As used herein, a "purified" biological agent (eg, a nucleic acid or a protein) is at least a part of a factor naturally associated with the biological agent. Means that has been removed. Thus, typically, the purity of the biological agent in the purified biological agent is higher (ie, more concentrated) than the state in which the biological agent is normally present.
[0021] 本明細書中で使用される「精製された」および「単離された」は、好ましくは少なくと も 75重量%、より好ましくは少なくとも 85重量%、よりさらに好ましくは少なくとも 95重 量%、そして最も好ましくは少なくとも 98重量%の、同型の生物学的因子が存在する ことを意味する。 [0021] As used herein, "purified" and "isolated" preferably refer to at least 75% by weight, more preferably at least 85% by weight, even more preferably at least 95% by weight. %, And most preferably at least 98% by weight, of the same type of biological agent.
[0022] 本明細書において遺伝子 (例えば、核酸配列、アミノ酸配列など)の「相同性」とは、 2以上の遺伝子配列の、互いに対する同一性の程度をいう。従って、ある 2つの遺伝 子の相同性が高いほど、それらの配列の同一性または類似性は高い。 2種類の遺伝 子が相同性を有するか否かは、配列の直接の比較、または核酸の場合ストリンジェン トな条件下でのノ、イブリダィゼーシヨン法によって調べられ得る。本明細書にぉ 、て、 遺伝子 (例えば、核酸配列、アミノ酸配列など)の「類似性」とは、上記相同性におい て、保存的置換をポジティブ(同一)とみなした場合の、 2以上の遺伝子配列の、互い に対する同一性の程度をいう。従って、保存的置換がある場合は、その保存的置換 の存在に応じて同一性と類似性とは異なる。また、保存的置換がない場合は、同一 性と類似性とは同じ数値を示す。 [0022] As used herein, "homology" of a gene (eg, a nucleic acid sequence, an amino acid sequence, etc.) refers to the degree of identity between two or more gene sequences. Thus, the higher the homology between two genes, the higher the identity or similarity between their sequences. Whether the two genes have homology can be determined by direct sequence comparison or, in the case of nucleic acids, by stringent conditions under stringent conditions. As used herein, the term “similarity” of a gene (eg, a nucleic acid sequence, an amino acid sequence, etc.) refers to two or more similarities when conservative substitutions are regarded as positive (identical) in the above homology. It refers to the degree of identity between gene sequences. Therefore, if there is a conservative substitution, Identity and similarity differ depending on the presence of When there is no conservative substitution, identity and similarity show the same numerical value.
[0023] 本明細書において「アミノ酸」とは、当該分野において通常用いられる意味で用いら れ、カルボキシル基とアミノ基とを有する有機化合物をいう。本明細書においてァミノ 酸は、天然アミノ酸であっても非天然アミノ酸であっても良い。 [0023] In the present specification, "amino acid" is used in a meaning commonly used in the art, and refers to an organic compound having a carboxyl group and an amino group. As used herein, amino acids may be natural or unnatural amino acids.
[0024] 本明細書において使用される「天然のアミノ酸」とは、天然のアミノ酸の L—異性体 を意味する。天然のアミノ酸は、グリシン、ァラニン、ノ リン、ロイシン、イソロイシン、セ リン、メチォニン、トレオニン、フエ二ルァラニン、チロシン、トリプトファン、システィン、 プロリン、ヒスチジン、ァスパラギン酸、ァスパラギン、グルタミン酸、グルタミン、 γ—力 ルボキシグルタミン酸、アルギニン、オル-チン、およびリジンである。特に示されな い限り、本明細書でいう全てのアミノ酸は、通常 L体を意図するが、本発明はそれに 限定されず、 D体のアミノ酸を用いた形態もまた本発明の範囲内にあることが理解さ れる。 [0024] As used herein, "natural amino acid" refers to the L-isomer of a natural amino acid. Natural amino acids include glycine, alanine, norin, leucine, isoleucine, serine, methionine, threonine, phenylalanine, tyrosine, tryptophan, cysteine, proline, histidine, aspartic acid, asparagine, glutamic acid, glutamine, γ-force Xyglutamic acid, arginine, ortin, and lysine. Unless otherwise indicated, all amino acids referred to in the present specification usually mean L-form, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and forms using D-form amino acids are also within the scope of the present invention. It is understood that.
[0025] 本明細書にぉ 、て「アミノ酸改変体」とは、天然のアミノ酸ではな 、が、天然のァミノ 酸の物性および Ζまたは機能に類似する分子をいう。アミノ酸改変体としては、例え ば、疎水性基、フエ-ルァラニンのベンジル側鎖 (パラ位、メタ位、オルト位など)にァ ルキル基、ハロ基、ニトロ基などが結合したもの、ェチォニン、カナバニン、 2—メチル グルタミンなどが挙げられる。本発明では、アミノ酸改変体は、非天然アミノ酸および アミノ酸模倣物を包含することがあることが理解される。 [0025] As used herein, the term "amino acid variant" refers to a molecule that is not a natural amino acid but is similar in physical properties and / or function to a natural amino acid. Examples of the modified amino acids include a hydrophobic group, phenylalanine having a benzyl side chain (para-, meta-, ortho-position, etc.) to which an alkyl group, a halo group, a nitro group, etc. are bonded, etyonine, canavanine , 2-methylglutamine and the like. It is understood that, in the present invention, amino acid variants may include unnatural amino acids and amino acid mimetics.
[0026] 本明細書において「非天然アミノ酸」とは、タンパク質中で通常は天然に見出されな いアミノ酸を意味する。非天然アミノ酸の例として、ノルロイシン、パラ—ニトロフエニル ァラニン、ホモフエ-ルァラニン、パラ一フルオロフェ-ルァラニン、 3—アミノー 2—ベ ンジルプロピオン酸、ホモアルギニンの D体または L体および D—フエ-ルァラニンが 挙げられる。 [0026] As used herein, "unnatural amino acid" means an amino acid that is not normally found in nature in a protein. Examples of unnatural amino acids include norleucine, para-nitrophenylalanine, homophenylalanine, para-fluorophenylalanine, 3-amino-2-benzylpropionic acid, the D- or L-form of homoarginine, and D-phenylalanine. No.
[0027] 本明細書にお!、て「アミノ酸模倣物」とは、アミノ酸の一般的な化学構造とは異なる 構造を有するが、天然に存在するアミノ酸と同様な様式で機能する化合物をいう。 [0027] As used herein, the term "amino acid mimetic" refers to a compound that has a structure different from the general chemical structure of an amino acid, but that functions in a manner similar to a naturally occurring amino acid.
[0028] 本明細書において「ヌクレオチド」は、アミノ酸をコードする能力を有する限り、天然 のものでも非天然のものでもよ 、。 [0029] 本明細書にぉ 、て、「フラグメント」とは、全長のポリペプチドまたはポリヌクレオチド( 長さが n)に対して、 l〜n— 1までの配列長さを有するポリペプチドまたはポリヌクレオ チドをいう。本発明のペプチドの改変体には、このようなフラグメントもまた含まれるこ とが理解される。フラグメントの長さは、その目的に応じて、適宜変更することができ、 例えば、その長さの下限としては、ポリペプチドの場合、 3、 4、 5、 6、 7、 8、 9、 10、 1 5, 20、 25、 30、 40、 50およびそれ以上のアミノ酸が挙げられ、ここの具体的に列挙 していない整数で表される長さ(例えば、 11など)もまた、下限として適切であり得る。 また、ポリヌクレオチドの場合、 5、 6、 7、 8、 9、 10、 15, 20、 25、 30、 40、 50、 75、 1 00およびそれ以上のヌクレオチドが挙げられ、ここの具体的に列挙していない整数 で表される長さ(例えば、 11など)もまた、下限として適切であり得る。本明細書にお いて、ポリペプチドおよびポリヌクレオチドの長さは、上述のようにそれぞれアミノ酸ま たは核酸の個数で表すことができるが、上述の個数は絶対的なものではなぐ同じ機 能を有する限り、上限または加減としての上述の個数は、その個数の上下数個(また は例えば上下 10%)のものも含むことが意図される。そのような意図を表現するため に、本明細書では、個数の前に「約」を付けて表現することがある。しかし、本明細書 では、「約」のあるなしはその数値の解釈に影響を与えないことが理解されるべきであ る。 [0028] In the present specification, "nucleotide" may be a natural or non-natural one as long as it has an ability to encode an amino acid. [0029] As used herein, the term "fragment" refers to a polypeptide or polynucleotide having a sequence length of l to n-1 relative to a full-length polypeptide or polynucleotide (having a length of n). Refers to tide. It is understood that variants of the peptides of the invention also include such fragments. The length of the fragment can be appropriately changed depending on the purpose.For example, as a lower limit of the length, in the case of a polypeptide, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 1, 5, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50 and more amino acids, and integer lengths not specifically listed herein (eg, 11) are also suitable as lower limits. possible. In the case of a polynucleotide, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100 and more nucleotides are mentioned, and specific listings are given here. Lengths expressed as unintended integers (eg, 11, etc.) may also be appropriate as lower limits. In the present specification, the lengths of polypeptides and polynucleotides can be represented by the numbers of amino acids or nucleic acids, respectively, as described above, but the above numbers are not absolute and have the same function. As far as it has, the above-mentioned number as an upper limit or adjustment is intended to include a few above and below (or, for example, 10% above and below) the number. In order to express such an intention, in this specification, "about" may be used before a number. However, it should be understood that the presence or absence of "about" herein does not affect the interpretation of that number.
[0030] 本明細書において、「対応する」アミノ酸または核酸とは、それぞれあるポリペプチド 分子またはポリヌクレオチド分子にぉ 、て、比較の基準となるポリペプチドまたはポリ ヌクレオチドにおける所定のアミノ酸と同様の作用を有する力、あるいは有することが 予測されるアミノ酸または核酸をいい、特に酵素分子にあっては、活性部位中の同 様の位置に存在し触媒活性に同様の寄与をするアミノ酸をいう。例えば、あるポリヌク レオチドのアンチセンス分子であれば、そのアンチセンス分子の特定の部分に対応 するオルソログにおける同様の部分であり得る。本発明のペプチドの場合、ヒトのォス テオボンチンにおける特定の配列が使用される力 他の種の動物のォステオポンチ ンにおける特定の配列において、本発明のペプチドに対応する部分が「対応するァ ミノ酸」に相当することが理解される。 [0030] In the present specification, the "corresponding" amino acid or nucleic acid refers to an action similar to a predetermined amino acid in a polypeptide or polynucleotide serving as a reference for comparison with respect to a certain polypeptide molecule or polynucleotide molecule, respectively. Refers to an amino acid or nucleic acid predicted to have, or particularly to an enzyme molecule, an amino acid present at a similar position in an active site and making a similar contribution to catalytic activity. For example, an antisense molecule of a polynucleotide can be a similar portion of an ortholog corresponding to a particular portion of the antisense molecule. In the case of the peptide of the present invention, the ability of the specific sequence in human osteopontin to be used. Is understood.
[0031] 本明細書において、「対応する」遺伝子とは、ある種において、比較の基準となる種 における所定の遺伝子と同様の作用を有するか、または有することが予測される遺伝 子をいい、そのような作用を有する遺伝子が複数存在する場合、進化学的に同じ起 源を有するものをいう。従って、ある遺伝子の対応する遺伝子は、その遺伝子のオル ソログあるいは種相同体であり得る。そのような対応する遺伝子は、当該分野におい て周知の技術を用いて同定することができる。したがって、例えば、ある動物における 対応する遺伝子は、対応する遺伝子の基準となる遺伝子 (例えば、マウスォステオポ ンチン遺伝子)の配列または本発明のペプチドまたはそのコード配列自体をクエリ配 列として用いてその動物(例えばヒト、ラット)の配列データベースを検索することによ つて見出すことができる。 [0031] As used herein, the term "corresponding" gene refers to, in a certain species, Refers to a gene that has or is expected to have the same action as the predetermined gene in the above, and when there are a plurality of genes having such an action, refers to those having the same evolutionary origin. Thus, the corresponding gene for a gene may be an ortholog or species homolog of that gene. Such corresponding genes can be identified using techniques well known in the art. Thus, for example, the corresponding gene in an animal can be obtained by using the sequence of the reference gene for the corresponding gene (for example, the mouse osteopontin gene) or the peptide of the present invention or its coding sequence itself as a query sequence (eg, It can be found by searching the sequence database of humans and rats.
[0032] アミノ酸は、その一般に公知の 3文字記号力、または IUPAC— IUB Biochemica 1 Nomenclature Commissionにより推奨される 1文字記号のいずれかにより、本 明細書中で言及され得る。ヌクレオチドも同様に、一般に認知された 1文字コードによ り言及され得る。 [0032] Amino acids may be referred to herein by either their commonly known three letter symbols or by the one letter symbols recommended by the IUPAC- IUB Biochemica 1 Nomenclature Commission. Nucleotides may also be referred to by the generally recognized one-letter code.
[0033] その文字コードは以下のとおりである。 [0033] The character codes are as follows.
アミノ酸 Amino acids
3文字記号 1文字記号 意味 3-letter symbol 1-letter symbol Meaning
Ala A ァラニン Ala A
Cys C システィン Cys C Sistine
Asp D ァスノ ラギン酸 Asp D Asno laginic acid
Glu E グルタミン酸 Glu E glutamic acid
Phe F フエ-ルァラニン Phe F Hue-Lualanin
Gly G グリシン Gly G glycine
His H ヒスチジン His H histidine
He I イソロイシン He I isoleucine
Lys K リジン Lys K Lysine
Leu L ロイシン Leu L Leucine
Met M メチォニン Met M Methionin
Asn N ァスノ ラギン Pro P プロリン Asn N Pro P Proline
Gin Q グルタミン Gin Q Glutamine
Arg R ァノレギニン Arg R Anoreginin
Ser S セリン Ser S Serine
Thr T トレオニン Thr T threonine
Val V ノ リン Val V
Trp w トリブトファン Trp w Tribute fan
Tyr Y チロシン Tyr Y tyrosine
Asx ァスパラギン又はァスパラギン酸 Asx asparagine or aspartic acid
Glx グノレタミン又はグルタミン酸Glx gnoretamine or glutamic acid
Xaa 不明又は他のアミノ酸。 Xaa Unknown or other amino acid.
塩基 Base
記号 意味 Symbol Meaning
a アデニン a Adenine
g グァニン g Guanin
シトシン Cytosine
チミン Thymine
ゥラシル Peracil
グァニン又はアデニンプリン アデニン又はシトシンアミノ基 Guanine or adenine purine Adenine or cytosine amino group
グァニン又はチミン ウラシルケト基 グァニン又はシトシン Guanine or thymine Uracilketo group Guanine or cytosine
アデニン又はチミン Zゥラシル Adenine or thymine Z ゥ racil
グァニン又はシトシン又はチミン ゥラシノレ アデニン又はグァニン又はチミン ゥラシノレ アデニン又はシトシン又はチミン Zゥラシル アデニン又はグァニン又はシトシン n アデニン又はグァニン又はシトシン又はチミン Zゥラシル、不明、または他の塩 基。 Guanine or cytosine or thymine ゥ lasinole adenine or guanine or thymine ゥ lasinole adenine or cytosine or thymine Z ゥ racil adenine or guanine or cytosine n Adenine or guanine or cytosine or thymine Z-racil, unknown or other base.
[0034] 本明細書では、アミノ酸配列および塩基配列の類似性、同一性および相同性の比 較は、配列分析用ツールである BLASTを用いてデフォルトパラメータを用いて算出 される。 [0034] In the present specification, the comparison of similarity, identity, and homology between amino acid sequences and base sequences is calculated using BLAST, a sequence analysis tool, with default parameters.
[0035] 本明細書において用いられる分子生物学的手法、生化学的手法、微生物学的手 法は、当該分野において周知であり慣用されるものであり、例えば、 Sambrook J. e t al. (,1989) . Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harborおよびその 3rd Ed. (2001); Ausubel, F. M. (1987) . Current Prot ocols in Molecular Biology, Greene Pub. AssociatESand Wiley— Inter science ; Ausubel, F. M. (1989) . short Protocols in Molecular Biology : A Compendium of Methods from Current Protocols in Molecular [0035] The molecular biological techniques, biochemical techniques, and microbiological techniques used herein are well known and commonly used in the art, and are described, for example, in Sambrook J. et al. (, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor and its 3rd Ed. (2001); Ausubel, FM (1987) .Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Greene Pub. AssociatESand Wiley—Inter science; Ausubel, FM (1989). ). short Protocols in Molecular Biology: A Compendium of Methods from Current Protocols in Molecular
Biology, Greene Pub. Associat ESand Wiley― Interscience; Innis , M. A. (1990) . PCR Protocols : A Guide to Methods and Applications, A cademic Press ; Ausubel, F. M. (1992) . Short Protocols in Molecular Biology: A Compendium of Methods from Current Protocols in Mol ecular Biology, Greene Pub. Associates ; Ausubel, F. M. (1995) . ShortBiology, Greene Pub. Associat ESand Wiley-Interscience; Innis, MA (1990) .PCR Protocols: A Guide to Methods and Applications, Academic Press; Ausubel, FM (1992) .Short Protocols in Molecular Biology: A Compendium of Methods from Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Greene Pub. Associates; Ausubel, FM (1995) .Short
Protocols in Molecular Biology: A Compendium of Methods from Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Greene Pub. Associates ; Inn is, M. A. et al. (1995) . PCR Strategies, Academic Press ; Ausubel, F. M. (1999) . Short Protocols in Molecular Biology: A Compendium ofProtocols in Molecular Biology: A Compendium of Methods from Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Greene Pub. Associates; Inn is, MA et al. (1995) .PCR Strategies, Academic Press; Ausubel, FM (1999). Short Protocols in Molecular Biology : A Compendium of
Methods from Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Wiley, and annual updates ; Sninsky, J. J. et al. (1999) . PCR Applications: Proto cols for Functional Genomics, Academic Press、別冊夹験医 「遺 ナ尊 入&発現解析実験法」羊土社、 1997などに記載されており、これらは本明細書にお V、て関連する部分 (全部であり得る)が参考として援用される。 Methods from Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Wiley, and annual updates; Sninsky, JJ et al. (1999) .PCR Applications: Protocols for Functional Genomics, Academic Press, Separate Investigator "Yodosha, 1997, etc., which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety (which may be all).
[0036] (改変) [0036] (Modification)
本発明においては、改変体もまた本発明の範囲内に入ることが理解される。そのよ うな改変を設計する際に、アミノ酸の疎水性指数が考慮され得る。ペプチドにおける 相互作用的な生物学的機能を与える際の疎水性アミノ酸指数の重要性は、一般に 当該分野で認められている(Kyte. Jおよび Doolittle, R. F. J. Mol. Biol. 157 (1 ) : 105- 132, 1982)。アミノ酸の疎水的性質は、生成したペプチドの二次構造に 寄与し、次いでそのペプチドと他の分子 (例えば、酵素、基質、レセプター、 DNA、 抗体、抗原など)との相互作用を規定する。各アミノ酸は、それらの疎水性および電 荷の性質に基づく疎水性指数を割り当てられる。それらは:イソロイシン(+4. 5);バ リン(+4. 2);ロイシン( + 3. 8);フエ-ルァラニン( + 2. 8);システィン Zシスチン( + 2. 5);メチォニン( + 1. 9);ァラニン( + 1. 8);グリシン(一0. 4);スレオニン(一0 . 7) ;セリン(一0. 8);トリプトファン(一0. 9) ;チロシン(一1. 3) ;プロリン(一1. 6) ;ヒ スチジン(一3. 2);グルタミン酸(一 3. 5) ;グルタミン(一 3. 5);ァスパラギン酸(一3 . 5);ァスパラギン(一3. 5) ;リジン(一3. 9);およびアルギニン(一4. 5) )である。 In the present invention, it is understood that variants also fall within the scope of the present invention. That's it In designing such modifications, the hydropathic index of amino acids can be considered. The importance of the hydrophobic amino acid index in conferring interactive biological functions on peptides is generally recognized in the art (Kyte. J and Doolittle, RFJ Mol. Biol. 157 (1): 105-). 132, 1982). The hydrophobic nature of amino acids contributes to the secondary structure of the resulting peptide, which in turn defines the interaction of the peptide with other molecules (eg, enzymes, substrates, receptors, DNA, antibodies, antigens, etc.). Each amino acid is assigned a hydrophobicity index based on its hydrophobicity and the nature of the charge. They are: isoleucine (+4.5); valine (+4.2); leucine (+3.8); hueralanine (+2.8); cysteine Z cystine (+2.5); methionine ( Alanine (+1.8); glycine (0.4); threonine (0.7); serine (0.8); tryptophan (0.9); tyrosine (1.1). 3); Proline (1-1.6); Histidine (1.3.2); Glutamic acid (13.5); Glutamine (13.5); Aspartic acid (13.5); Asparagine (1-3) 5); lysine (1-3.9); and arginine (1-4.5)).
[0037] あるアミノ酸を、同様の疎水性指数を有する他のアミノ酸により置換して、そして依 然として同様の生物学的機能を有するペプチド (例えば、酵素活性において等価な ペプチド)を生じさせ得ることが当該分野で周知である。このようなアミノ酸置換にお いて、疎水性指数が ± 2以内であることが好ましぐ ± 1以内であることがより好ましく 、および ±0. 5以内であることがさらにより好ましい。疎水性に基づくこのようなァミノ 酸の置換は効率的であることが当該分野において理解される。 [0037] The ability to substitute one amino acid for another amino acid having a similar hydrophobicity index and still produce a peptide having a similar biological function (eg, a peptide equivalent in enzymatic activity) Are well known in the art. In such amino acid substitutions, the hydrophobicity index is preferably within ± 2, more preferably within ± 1, and even more preferably within ± 0.5. It is understood in the art that such substitution of amino acids based on hydrophobicity is efficient.
[0038] 親水性指数もまた、ポリペプチドの設計にお!、て考慮され得る。米国特許第 4, 55 4, 101号に記載されるように、以下の親水性指数がアミノ酸残基に割り当てられてい る:アルギニン( + 3. 0);リジン( + 3. 0);ァスパラギン酸( + 3. 0± 1);グルタミン酸( + 3. 0± 1);セリン( + 0. 3);ァスパラギン( + 0. 2) ;グルタミン( + 0. 2) ;グリシン(0 );スレオニン(一0. 4);プロリン(一0. 5± 1);ァラニン(一0. 5);ヒスチジン(一0. 5) ;システィン(一1. 0);メチォニン(一1. 3);バリン(一 1. 5);ロイシン(一1. 8);ィソロ イシン(一 1. 8) ;チロシン(一2. 3);フエ-ルァラニン(一2. 5);およびトリプトファン( 3. 4)。アミノ酸が同様の親水性指数を有しかつ依然として生物学的等価体を与え 得る別のものに置換され得ることが理解される。このようなアミノ酸置換において、親 水性指数が ± 2以内であることが好ましぐ ± 1以内であることがより好ましぐおよび ±0. 5以内であることがさらにより好ましい。 [0038] The hydrophilicity index can also be considered in designing polypeptides. As described in US Pat. No. 4,554,101, the following hydrophilicity indices have been assigned to amino acid residues: arginine (+3.0); lysine (+3.0); aspartic acid Glutamic acid (+ 3.0 ± 1); Serine (+0.3); Asparagine (+0.2); Glutamine (+0.2); Glycine (0); Threonine (+ 3.0 ± 1); Proline (0.5 ± 1); alanine (0.5); histidine (0.5); cysteine (1.1); methionine (1.3); valine ( I-1.5); Leucine (1-1.8); Isoloisin (1-1.8); Tyrosine (1-2.3); Fehlalanine (1-2.5); and Tryptophan (3.4). It is understood that an amino acid can be substituted for another that has a similar hydrophilicity index and still provide a bioisostere. In such amino acid substitutions, the hydrophilicity index is preferably within ± 2, more preferably within ± 1, and Even more preferably, it is within ± 0.5.
[0039] 本発明にお 、て、「保存的置換」とは、アミノ酸置換にぉ 、て、元のアミノ酸と置換さ れるアミノ酸との親水性指数または Zおよび疎水性指数が上記のように類似して 、る 置換をいう。保存的置換の例としては、例えば、親水性指数または疎水性指数が、士 2以内のもの同士、好ましくは ± 1以内のもの同士、より好ましくは ±0. 5以内のもの 同士のものが挙げられるがそれらに限定されない。 [0039] In the present invention, "conservative substitution" refers to an amino acid substitution in which the hydrophilicity index or Z and hydrophobicity index of the original amino acid and the amino acid to be substituted are similar to those described above. And permutation. Examples of conservative substitution include, for example, those having a hydrophilicity index or a hydrophobicity index of 2 or less, preferably ± 1 or less, more preferably ± 0.5 or less. But not limited to them.
[0040] 本明細書において保存的置換は、例えば、疎水性アミノ酸 (ァラニン、パリン、ロイ シン、イソロイシンなど)同士、酸性アミノ酸(グルタミン酸、ァスパラギン酸、 4—カルボ キシグルタミン酸。アミノクェン酸など)同士、塩基性アミノ酸 (アルギニン、ヒスチジン 、リジンなど)同士、芳香族アミノ酸 (フエ-ルァラニン、チロシン、トリプトファンなど)同 士で交換することによつても作製することができることが理解される。従って、保存的 置換の例は、当業者に周知であり、例えば、次の各グループ内での置換:アルギニン およびリジン;グルタミン酸およびァスパラギン酸;セリンおよびスレオニン;グルタミン およびァスパラギン;ならびにパリン、ロイシン、およびイソロイシン、などが挙げられる 力 Sこれらに限定されない。 [0040] In the present specification, conservative substitutions include, for example, hydrophobic amino acids (such as alanine, palin, leucine, and isoleucine), acidic amino acids (such as glutamic acid, aspartic acid, 4-carboxyglutamic acid, and aminocunic acid). It is understood that it can also be prepared by exchanging basic amino acids (arginine, histidine, lysine, etc.) with each other and aromatic amino acids (phenylalanine, tyrosine, tryptophan, etc.). Thus, examples of conservative substitutions are well known to those skilled in the art and include, for example, substitutions within each of the following groups: arginine and lysine; glutamic and aspartic acid; serine and threonine; glutamine and asparagine; Isoleucine, and the like, are not limited thereto.
[0041] 本明細書において、「改変体」とは、ポリペプチドまたはポリヌクレオチドに関して言 及するとき、もとのポリペプチドまたはポリヌクレオチドなどの物質に対して、一部が変 更されているものをいう。そのような改変体としては、置換改変体、付加改変体、欠失 改変体、短縮 (truncated)改変体、対立遺伝子変異体などが挙げられる。対立遺伝 子 (allele)とは、同一遺伝子座に属し、互いに区別される遺伝的改変体のことをいう 。従って、「対立遺伝子変異体」とは、ある遺伝子に対して、対立遺伝子の関係にある 改変体をいう。そのような対立遺伝子変異体は、通常その対応する対立遺伝子と同 一または非常に類似性の高い配列を有し、通常はほぼ同一の生物学的活性を有す る力 まれに異なる生物学的活性を有することもある。「種相同体またはホモログ (ho molog)」とは、ある種の中で、ある遺伝子とアミノ酸レベルまたはヌクレオチドレベル で、相同性 (好ましくは、 60%以上の相同性、より好ましくは、 80%以上、 85%以上、 90%以上、 95%以上の相同性)を有するものをいう。そのような種相同体を取得する 方法は、本明細書の記載から明らかである。「オルソログ(ortholog)」とは、オルソロ ガス遺伝子(orthologous gene)とも!/、 、、二つの遺伝子がある共通祖先からの種 分化に由来する遺伝子をいう。例えば、多重遺伝子構造をもつヘモグロビン遺伝子 ファミリーを例にとると、ヒトおよびマウスの αヘモグロビン遺伝子はオルソログである 力 ヒトのひヘモグロビン遺伝子および βヘモグロビン遺伝子はパラログ (遺伝子重 複で生じた遺伝子)である。オルソログは、分子系統樹の推定に有用である。オルソ ログは、通常別の種においてもとの種と同様の機能を果たしていることがあり得ること から、本発明のオルソログもまた、本発明において有用であり得る。 [0041] In the present specification, the "variant" when referring to a polypeptide or polynucleotide is a substance in which a part of the substance such as the original polypeptide or polynucleotide is modified. Say. Such variants include substitutional variants, addition variants, deletion variants, truncated variants, allelic variants, and the like. Alleles refer to genetic variants that belong to the same locus and are distinct from each other. Therefore, “allelic variant” refers to a variant that has an allelic relationship to a certain gene. Such allelic variants usually have sequences identical or very similar to their corresponding alleles, and usually have rarely different biological May have activity. “Species homologue or homolog” means homology (preferably 60% or more homology, more preferably 80% or more) at the amino acid level or nucleotide level with a certain gene in a certain species. , 85% or more, 90% or more, 95% or more homology). Methods for obtaining such species homologs will be apparent from the description herein. "Ortholog" is an orthologue Also referred to as an orthologous gene! /,,, Are genes derived from speciation from a common ancestor that has two genes. For example, in the case of the hemoglobin gene family having a multigene structure, the human and mouse α-hemoglobin genes are orthologs.The human human hemoglobin gene and β-hemoglobin gene are paralogs (genes generated by gene duplication). . Orthologs are useful for estimating molecular phylogenetic trees. Orthologs of the present invention may also be useful in the present invention, as orthologs can usually perform the same function in another species as the original species.
本明細書にぉ 、て「保存的(に改変された)改変体」は、アミノ酸配列および核酸配 列の両方に適用される。特定の核酸配列に関して、保存的に改変された改変体とは 、同一のまたは本質的に同一のアミノ酸配列をコードする核酸をいい、核酸がァミノ 酸配列をコードしない場合には、本質的に同一な配列をいう。遺伝コードの縮重のた め、多数の機能的に同一の核酸が任意の所定のタンパク質をコードする。例えば、コ ドン GCA、 GCC、 GCG、および GCUはすべて、アミノ酸ァラニンをコードする。した がって、ァラニンがコドンにより特定される全ての位置で、そのコドンは、コードされた ポリペプチドを変更することなぐ記載された対応するコドンの任意のものに変更され 得る。このような核酸の変動は、保存的に改変された変異の 1つの種である「サイレン ト改変(変異)」である。ポリペプチドをコードする本明細書中のすべての核酸配列は また、その核酸の可能なすべてのサイレント変異を記載する。当該分野において、核 酸中の各コドン(通常メチォニンのための唯一のコドンである AUG、および通常トリプ トフアンのための唯一のコドンである TGGを除く) 1S 機能的に同一な分子を産生す るため〖こ改変され得ることが理解される。したがって、ポリペプチドをコードする核酸 の各サイレント変異は、記載された各配列において暗黙に含まれる。好ましくは、そ のような改変は、ポリペプチドの高次構造に多大な影響を与えるアミノ酸であるシステ インの置換を回避するようになされ得る。このような塩基配列の改変法としては、制限 酵素などによる切断、 DNAポリメラーゼ、 Klenowフラグメント、 DNAリガーゼなどに よる処理等による連結等の処理、合成オリゴヌクレオチドなどを用いた部位特異的塩 基置換法(特定部位指向突然変異法; Mark Zoller and Michael Smith, Me thods in Enzymology, 100, 468— 500 (1983) )力挙げ、られる力 この他にも 通常分子生物学の分野で用いられる方法によって改変を行うこともできる。 As used herein, the term "conservative (modified) variant" applies to both amino acid sequences and nucleic acid sequences. With respect to a particular nucleic acid sequence, a conservatively modified variant refers to a nucleic acid that encodes the same or essentially the same amino acid sequence, and essentially the same if the nucleic acid does not encode an amino acid sequence. Sequence. Because of the degeneracy of the genetic code, many functionally identical nucleic acids encode any given protein. For example, the codons GCA, GCC, GCG, and GCU all encode the amino acid alanine. Thus, at every position where an alanine is specified by a codon, that codon can be changed to any of the corresponding codons described, without altering the encoded polypeptide. Such nucleic acid variation is a "silent modification (mutation)," which is one type of conservatively modified mutation. Every nucleic acid sequence herein which encodes a polypeptide also describes every possible silent variation of the nucleic acid. In the art, each codon in the nucleic acid (except AUG, which is usually the only codon for methionine, and TGG, which is usually the only codon for tryptophan) 1S Produces functionally identical molecules It will be understood that this can be modified. Accordingly, each silent variation of a nucleic acid which encodes a polypeptide is implicit in each described sequence. Preferably, such modifications may be made to avoid substitution of the amino acid cysteine, which greatly affects the conformation of the polypeptide. Examples of such base sequence modification methods include cleavage with a restriction enzyme or the like, ligation treatment with a DNA polymerase, Klenow fragment, DNA ligase, or the like, site-specific base substitution using a synthetic oligonucleotide, or the like. (Site-directed mutagenesis; Mark Zoller and Michael Smith, Methods in Enzymology, 100, 468-500 (1983)) Modifications can also be made by methods commonly used in the field of molecular biology.
[0043] 本明細書中において、機能的に等価なペプチドを作製するために、アミノ酸の置換 のほかに、アミノ酸の付加、欠失、または修飾もまた行うことができる。アミノ酸の置換 とは、もとのペプチドを 1つ以上、例えば、 1〜3個のアミノ酸で置換することをいう。ァ ミノ酸の付加とは、もとのペプチド鎖に 1つ以上、例えば、 1〜3個のアミノ酸を付加す ることをいう。アミノ酸の欠失とは、もとのペプチドから 1つ以上、例えば、 1〜3個のァ ミノ酸を欠失させることをいう。アミノ酸修飾は、アミド化、カルボキシル化、硫酸化、ハ ロゲン化、アルキル化、グリコシル化、リン酸化、水酸化、ァシル化(例えば、ァセチル ィ匕)などを含むが、これらに限定されない。置換、または付加されるアミノ酸は、天然 のアミノ酸であってもよぐ非天然のアミノ酸、またはアミノ酸アナログでもよい。天然の アミノ酸が好ましい。 [0043] In the present specification, in order to produce a functionally equivalent peptide, in addition to amino acid substitution, amino acid addition, deletion, or modification can also be performed. Amino acid substitution refers to substitution of the original peptide with one or more, for example, 1 to 3 amino acids. The addition of an amino acid refers to the addition of one or more, for example, 1 to 3 amino acids to the original peptide chain. Amino acid deletion refers to the deletion of one or more, for example, 1 to 3 amino acids from the original peptide. Amino acid modifications include, but are not limited to, amidation, carboxylation, sulfation, halogenation, alkylation, glycosylation, phosphorylation, hydroxylation, acylation (eg, acetylation). The amino acid to be substituted or added may be a natural amino acid or a non-natural amino acid or an amino acid analog. Natural amino acids are preferred.
[0044] 本明細書にぉ 、て、ポリペプチドまたはポリヌクレオチドの「置換、付加または欠失」 とは、もとのポリペプチドまたはポリヌクレオチドに対して、それぞれアミノ酸もしくはそ の代替物、またはヌクレオチドもしくはその代替物力 置き換わること、付け加わること または取り除かれることをいう。このような置換、付加または欠失の技術は、当該分野 において周知であり、そのような技術の例としては、部位特異的変異誘発技術などが 挙げられる。置換、付加または欠失は、 1つ以上であれば任意の数でよぐそのような 数は、その置換、付加または欠失を有する改変体において目的とする機能 (例えば、 血管新生活性など)が保持される限り、多くすることができる。例えば、そのような数は 、 1または数個であり得、そして好ましくは、全体の長さの 20%以内、 10%以内、また は 3個以下、 2個以下、 1個以下などであり得る。 [0044] As used herein, the term "substitution, addition or deletion" of a polypeptide or polynucleotide refers to an amino acid or its substitute, or a nucleotide, respectively, relative to an original polypeptide or polynucleotide. Or its substitute power means to be replaced, added or removed. Techniques for such substitution, addition or deletion are well known in the art, and examples of such techniques include site-directed mutagenesis techniques. The number of substitutions, additions, or deletions may be any number as long as the number is one or more. ) Can be much as long as For example, such a number can be one or several, and preferably can be within 20%, 10%, or 3 or less, 2 or less, 1 or less of the total length, etc. .
[0045] (有機化学) [0045] (Organic chemistry)
本明細書にぉ 、て「疎水性基」とは、疎水性を図る指標疎水性インデックス (Kyte and Doolittle, J. Mol. Biol. , 157, 105?132 (1982)【こ記載されて!ヽる)また ίま logP (1—ォクタノール Ζ水の分配係数の対数値)を置換する前の基よりも上昇させ る任意の置換基をいう。そのような疎水性基としては、例えば、アルキル基、ァルケ- ル基などを挙げることができるが、それらに限定されない。 In the present specification, the term "hydrophobic group" is used as an index for determining hydrophobicity. The hydrophobicity index (Kyte and Doolittle, J. Mol. Biol., 157, 105-132 (1982)) Also, any substituent that increases the logP (1-octanol—the logarithm of the distribution coefficient of water) from the group before substitution. Examples of such a hydrophobic group include, but are not limited to, an alkyl group and an alkyl group.
[0046] 以下に本発明の化合物において含有され得る有機置換基を説明する。 [0047] 本明細書にぉ 、て「アルキル」とは、メタン、ェタン、プロパンのような脂肪族炭化水 素(アルカン)力も水素原子が一つ失われて生ずる 1価の基をいい、一般に C H Hereinafter, organic substituents that may be contained in the compound of the present invention will be described. [0047] As used herein, the term "alkyl" refers to a monovalent group generated by the loss of one hydrogen atom in an aliphatic hydrocarbon (alkane) such as methane, ethane, and propane. CH
n 2n+ l 一で表される(ここで、 nは正の整数である)。アルキルは、直鎖または分枝鎖であり得 る。本明細書において「置換されたアルキル」とは、以下に規定する置換基によって アルキルの Hが置換されたアルキルをいう。これらの具体例は、 C1〜C2アルキル、 C1〜C3アルキル、 C1〜C4アルキル、 C1〜C5アルキル、 C1〜C6アルキル、 C1 〜C7アルキル、 C1〜C8アルキル、 C1〜C9アルキル、 C1〜C10アルキル、 Cl〜 C11アルキルまたは C1〜C12アルキル、 C1〜C2置換されたアルキル、 C1〜C3置 換されたアルキル、 C1〜C4置換されたアルキル、 C1〜C5置換されたアルキル、 C 1〜C6置換されたアルキル、 C1〜C7置換されたアルキル、 C1〜C8置換されたァ ルキル、 C1〜C9置換されたアルキル、 C1〜C10置換されたアルキル、 C1〜C11 置換されたアルキルまたは C1〜C 12置換されたアルキルであり得る。ここで、例えば C 1〜C 10アルキルとは、炭素原子を 1〜 10個有する直鎖または分枝状のアルキル を意味し、メチル(CH—)、ェチル(C H一)、 n—プロピル(CH CH CH—)、イソ n 2n + l is represented by one (where n is a positive integer). Alkyl can be straight or branched. As used herein, the term "substituted alkyl" refers to an alkyl in which H of the alkyl is substituted by a substituent defined below. Examples of these are C1-C2 alkyl, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C5 alkyl, C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C7 alkyl, C1-C8 alkyl, C1-C9 alkyl, C1-C10 alkyl C1-C12 alkyl or C1-C12 alkyl, C1-C2-substituted alkyl, C1-C3-substituted alkyl, C1-C4-substituted alkyl, C1-C5-substituted alkyl, C1-C6-substituted Alkyl, C1-C7 substituted alkyl, C1-C8 substituted alkyl, C1-C9 substituted alkyl, C1-C10 substituted alkyl, C1-C11 substituted alkyl or C1-C12 substituted alkyl. Or alkyl. Here, for example, C 1 -C 10 alkyl means a linear or branched alkyl having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, such as methyl (CH—), ethyl (CH-1), n-propyl (CH CH CH—), iso
3 2 5 3 2 2 プロピル((CH ) CH―)、 n—ブチル(CH CH CH CH ―)、 n—ペンチル(CH C 3 2 5 3 2 2 Propyl ((CH) CH-), n-butyl (CH CH CH CH-), n-pentyl (CH C
3 2 3 2 2 2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 3
H CH CH CH 一)、 n—へキシル(CH CH CH CH CH CH 一)、 n—ヘプチルH CH CH CH 1), n-hexyl (CH CH CH CH CH CH 1), n-heptyl
2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2
(CH CH CH CH CH CH CH― )、 n—ォクチル(CH CH CH CH CH CH C (CH CH CH CH CH CH CH-), n-octyl (CH CH CH CH CH CH CH C
3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 23 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2
H CH ―)、 n—ノニル(CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH ―)、 n—デシルH CH—), n—nonyl (CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH—), n—decyl
2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
(CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH 一)、 C (CH ) CH CH CH (C (CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH I), C (CH) CH CH CH (C
3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 23 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2
H ) 、— CH CH (CH )などが例示される。また、例えば、 C1〜C10置換されたァH), —CH CH (CH) and the like. Also, for example, C1-C10 substituted
3 2 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 2
ルキルとは、 C1〜C10アルキルであって、そのうち 1または複数の水素原子が置換 基により置換されて 、るものを 、う。 Alkyl is C1-C10 alkyl in which one or more hydrogen atoms have been replaced by substituents.
[0048] 本明細書において「置換されていてもよいアルキル」とは、上で定義した「アルキル」 または「置換されたアルキル」の 、ずれであってもよ 、ことを意味する。 [0048] In the present specification, "optionally substituted alkyl" means that "alkyl" or "substituted alkyl" as defined above may be different from the above.
[0049] 本明細書にぉ 、て「アルキレン」とは、メチレン、エチレン、プロピレンのような脂肪 族炭化水素 (アルカン)力も水素原子が二つ失われて生ずる 2価の基を 、 、、一般に ― C H —で表される(ここで、 nは正の整数である)。アルキレンは、直鎖または分枝 n 2n [0049] As used herein, the term "alkylene" refers to a divalent group formed by the loss of two hydrogen atoms in an aliphatic hydrocarbon (alkane) such as methylene, ethylene, and propylene. — CH — (where n is a positive integer). Alkylene is straight chain or branched n 2n
鎖であり得る。本明細書において「置換されたアルキレン」とは、以下に規定する置換 基によってアルキレンの Hが置換されたアルキレンをいう。これらの具体例は、 Cl〜 C2アルキレン、 C1〜C3アルキレン、 C1〜C4アルキレン、 C1〜C5アルキレン、 C1 〜C6アルキレン、 C1〜C7アルキレン、 C1〜C8アルキレン、 C1〜C9アルキレン、 C 1〜C10アルキレン、じ1〜じ11ァルキレンまたはじ1〜じ12ァルキレン、 C1〜C2置 換されたアルキレン、 C1〜C3置換されたアルキレン、 C1〜C4置換されたアルキレ ン、 C1〜C5置換されたアルキレン、 C1〜C6置換されたアルキレン、 C1〜C7置換 されたアルキレン、 C1〜C8置換されたアルキレン、 C1〜C9置換されたアルキレン、 C 1〜C 10置換されたアルキレン、 C 1〜C 11置換されたアルキレンまたは C 1〜C 12 置換されたアルキレンであり得る。ここで、例えば C1〜C10アルキレンとは、炭素原 子を 1〜: LO個有する直鎖または分枝状のアルキレンを意味し、メチレン(一 CH―)、 Can be a chain. As used herein, the term "substituted alkylene" refers to a substituent defined below. Alkylene in which H of alkylene is substituted by a group. Specific examples of these include Cl-C2 alkylene, C1-C3 alkylene, C1-C4 alkylene, C1-C5 alkylene, C1-C6 alkylene, C1-C7 alkylene, C1-C8 alkylene, C1-C9 alkylene, C1-C10 Alkylene, 1 to 11 alkylene or 1 to 12 alkylene, C1 to C2 substituted alkylene, C1 to C3 substituted alkylene, C1 to C4 substituted alkylene, C1 to C5 substituted alkylene, C1-C6-substituted alkylene, C1-C7-substituted alkylene, C1-C8-substituted alkylene, C1-C9-substituted alkylene, C1-C10-substituted alkylene, C1-C11-substituted It can be alkylene or C1-C12 substituted alkylene. Here, for example, C1-C10 alkylene means a straight-chain or branched alkylene having 1 to LO carbon atoms, and methylene (1-CH-),
2 エチレン(一 C H —)、 n プロピレン(一 CH CH CH 一)、イソプロピレン(一(CH 2 Ethylene (one CH—), n propylene (one CH CH CH one), isopropylene (one CH
2 4 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 2 2 3
) C一)、 n—ブチレン(一 CH CH CH CH 一)、 n—ペンチレン(一 CH CH CH C) C-), n-butylene (one CH CH CH CH one), n-pentylene (one CH CH CH C
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 22 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
H CH 一)、 n—へキシレン(一 CH CH CH CH CH CH 一)、 n—ヘプチレン(一H CH-one), n-hexylene (one CH CH CH CH CH CH one), n-heptylene (one
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CH CH CH CH CH CH CH 一)、 n—ォクチレン(一CH CH CH CH CH C CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH) n-octylene (CH CH CH CH CH CH C
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 22 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
H CH CH 一)、 n—ノニレン(一 CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH —)、 nH CH CH one), n-nonylene (one CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH —), n
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 デシレン(一 CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH 一)、 CH C (CH ) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Decylene (one CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH one), CH C (CH)
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3
—などが例示される。また、例えば、 C1〜C10置換されたアルキレンとは、 C1〜C1— And the like. Also, for example, C1-C10 substituted alkylene refers to C1-C1
2 2
0アルキレンであって、そのうち 1または複数の水素原子が置換基により置換されてい るものをいう。本明細書において「アルキレン」は、酸素原子および硫黄原子から選 択される原子を 1またはそれ以上含んで 、てもよ 、。 O alkylene, of which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with a substituent. As used herein, “alkylene” may include one or more atoms selected from an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom.
[0050] 本明細書にぉ 、て「置換されて 、てもよ 、アルキレン」とは、上で定義した「アルキレ ン」または「置換されたアルキレン」の 、ずれであってもよ 、ことを意味する。 [0050] In the present specification, the term "substituted or alkylene" may be a shift of "alkylene" or "substituted alkylene" defined above. means.
[0051] 本明細書において「シクロアルキル」とは、環式構造を有するアルキルをいう。「置換 されたシクロアルキル」とは、以下に規定する置換基によってシクロアルキルの Hが置 換されたシクロアルキルをいう。具体例としては、 C3〜C4シクロアルキル、 C3〜C5 シクロアルキル、 C3〜C6シクロアルキル、 C3〜C7シクロアルキル、 C3〜C8シクロ アルキル、 C3〜C9シクロアルキル、 C3〜C10シクロアルキル、 C3〜C11シクロアル キル、 C3〜C12シクロアルキル、 C3〜C4置換されたシクロアルキル、 C3〜C5置換 されたシクロアルキル、 C3〜C6置換されたシクロアルキル、 C3〜C7置換されたシク 口アルキル、 C3〜C8置換されたシクロアルキル、 C3〜C9置換されたシクロアルキ ル、 C3〜C10置換されたシクロアルキル、 C3〜C11置換されたシクロアルキルまた は C3〜C12置換されたシクロアルキルであり得る。例えば、シクロアルキルとしては、 シクロプロピル、シクロへキシルなどが例示される。 [0051] In the present specification, "cycloalkyl" refers to alkyl having a cyclic structure. “Substituted cycloalkyl” refers to cycloalkyl in which H of cycloalkyl is replaced by a substituent defined below. Specific examples include C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C5 cycloalkyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C3-C7 cycloalkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C3-C9 cycloalkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C3-C11 Cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C3-C4-substituted cycloalkyl, C3-C5-substituted Cycloalkyl, C3-C6-substituted cycloalkyl, C3-C7-substituted cycloalkyl, C3-C8-substituted cycloalkyl, C3-C9-substituted cycloalkyl, C3-C10-substituted cycloalkyl , C3-C11 substituted cycloalkyl or C3-C12 substituted cycloalkyl. For example, examples of cycloalkyl include cyclopropyl and cyclohexyl.
[0052] 本明細書において「置換されていてもよいシクロアルキル」とは、上で定義した「シク 口アルキル」または「置換されたシクロアルキル」の 、ずれであってもよ 、ことを意味す る。 [0052] In the present specification, the "optionally substituted cycloalkyl" means that the "cycloalkyl" or the "substituted cycloalkyl" defined above may be shifted. You.
[0053] 本明細書において「ァルケニル」とは、分子内に二重結合を一つ有する脂肪族炭 化水素から水素原子が一つ失われて生ずる 1価の基をいい、一般に C H 一で表 [0053] In the present specification, "alkenyl" refers to a monovalent group generated by the loss of one hydrogen atom from an aliphatic hydrocarbon having one double bond in the molecule, and is generally represented by CH1.
n 2n- l される(ここで、 nは 2以上の正の整数である)。「置換されたァルケニル」とは、以下に 規定する置換基によってァルケ-ルの Hが置換されたァルケ-ルを!、う。具体例とし ては、 C2〜C3ァノレケニノレ、 C2〜C4ァノレケニノレ、 C2〜C5ァノレケニノレ、 C2〜C6ァ ルケ-ル、 C2〜C7ァルケ-ル、 C2〜C8アルケ -ル、 C2〜C9ァルケ-ル、 C2〜C 10ァルケ-ル、じ2〜じ11ァルケ-ルまたはじ2〜じ12ァルケ-ル、 C2〜C3置換さ れたァルケ-ル、 C2〜C4置換されたァルケ-ル、 C2〜C5置換されたァルケ-ル、 C2〜C6置換されたァルケ-ル、 C2〜C7置換されたァルケ-ル、 C2〜C8置換され たァルケ-ル、 C2〜C9置換されたァルケ-ル、 C2〜C10置換されたァルケ-ル、 C2〜C11置換されたァルケ-ルまたは C2〜C12置換されたァルケ-ルであり得る。 ここで、例えば C2〜C10アルキルとは、炭素原子を 2〜: L0個含む直鎖または分枝状 のァルケ-ルを意味し、ビュル(CH =CH )、ァリル(CH =CHCH ―)、 CH C n 2n- l (where n is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2). The term "substituted alkenyl" refers to an alkenyl in which H of the alkenyl is substituted by a substituent defined below. Specific examples include C2-C3 anore keninole, C2-C4 anore keninore, C2-C5 anore keninore, C2-C6 alkalle, C2-C7 alkalle, C2-C8 alkalle, C2-C9 alkalle, C2-C10 scale, J2-J11 scale or J2-J12 scale, C2-C3-substituted scale, C2-C4-substituted scale, C2-C5 Substituted alkyl, C2-C6 substituted alkyl, C2-C7 substituted alkyl, C2-C8 substituted alkyl, C2-C9 substituted alkyl, C2-C10 It may be a substituted alkyl, a C2-C11 substituted alkyl, or a C2-C12 substituted alkyl. Here, for example, C2-C10 alkyl means a straight-chain or branched alkaryl containing 2 to L0 carbon atoms, such as butyl (CH = CH), aryl (CH = CHCH-), CH C
2 2 2 3 2 2 2 3
H = CH などが例示される。また、例えば、 C2〜C10置換されたァルケ-ルとは、H = CH is exemplified. In addition, for example, C2-C10 substituted alkyl is
C2〜C10ァルケ-ルであって、そのうち 1または複数の水素原子が置換基により置 換されているものをいう。 C2 to C10 alkyl, in which one or more hydrogen atoms have been replaced by substituents.
[0054] 本明細書にぉ 、て「置換されて 、てもよ 、ァルケ-ル」とは、上で定義した「ァルケ[0054] In the present specification, the term "substituted or optionally substituted" refers to the above-defined
-ル」または「置換されたァルケ-ル」の 、ずれであってもよ 、ことを意味する。 This means that the deviation of the "-" or "substituted calendar" may be different.
[0055] 本明細書において「ァルケ二レン」とは、分子内に二重結合を一つ有する脂肪族炭 化水素から水素原子が二つ失われて生ずる 2価の基をいい、一般に C H 一で [0055] In the present specification, "alkenylene" refers to a divalent group formed by losing two hydrogen atoms from an aliphatic hydrocarbon having one double bond in the molecule, and generally a CH 1 so
n 2n-2 表される(ここで、 nは 2以上の正の整数である)。「置換されたァルケ-レン」とは、以 下に規定する置換基によってァルケ-レンの Hが置換されたァルケ-レンを!、う。具 体例としては、 C2〜C25ァルケ-レンまたは C2〜C25置換されたァルケ-レンが挙 げられ、なかでも特に C2〜C3アルケ-レン、 C2〜C4アルケ-レン、 C2〜C5アル ケ-レン、 C2〜C6ァルケ-レン、 C2〜C7ァルケ-レン、 C2〜C8ァルケ-レン、 C2 〜C9ァルケ-レン、 C2〜C10ァルケ-レン、じ2〜じ11ァルケ-レンまたはじ2〜じ 12ァルケ-レン、 C2〜C3置換されたァルケ-レン、 C2〜C4置換されたァルケ-レ ン、 C2〜C5置換されたァルケ-レン、 C2〜C6置換されたァルケ-レン、 C2〜C7 置換されたァルケ-レン、 C2〜C8置換されたァルケ-レン、 C2〜C9置換されたァ ルケ-レン、 C2〜C10置換されたァルケ-レン、 C2〜C11置換されたァルケ-レン または C2〜C12置換されたァルケ-レンが好ましい。ここで、例えば C2〜C10アル キルとは、炭素原子を 2〜10個含む直鎖または分枝状のァルケ-レンを意味し、 - CH = CH―、 一 CH = CHCH―、 - (CH ) C = CH—などが例示される。また、例 n 2n-2 (Where n is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2). The term "substituted alkelenes" refers to alkelenes in which the H of the alkene is substituted with a substituent as defined below. Specific examples include C2-C25 alkylenes and C2-C25-substituted alkylenes, particularly C2-C3 alkylenes, C2-C4 alkylenes, C2-C5 alkylenes. , C2-C6 alkalene, C2-C7 alkalene, C2-C8 alkalene, C2-C9 alkalene, C2-C10 alkalene, 2-11 alkalene or 2-12 Alkalene, C2-C3-substituted alkelenes, C2-C4-substituted alkelenes, C2-C5-substituted alkelenes, C2-C6-substituted alkelenes, C2-C7 substituted Alkalene, C2-C8 substituted alkene, C2-C9 substituted alkene, C2-C10 substituted alkene, C2-C11 substituted alkene or C2-C12 substituted Preferred is alkenylene. Here, for example, C2-C10 alkyl means a straight-chain or branched alkylene containing 2 to 10 carbon atoms, -CH = CH-, one CH = CHCH-,-(CH) C = CH— and the like. Also examples
2 3 twenty three
えば、 C2〜C10置換されたァルケ-レンとは、 C2〜C10ァルケ-レンであって、そ のうち 1または複数の水素原子が置換基により置換されているものをいう。本明細書 において「ァルケ-レン」は、酸素原子および硫黄原子力も選択される原子を 1また はそれ以上含んで!/ヽてもよ!/ヽ。 For example, C2-C10 substituted alkylene refers to C2-C10 alkylene, in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with a substituent. As used herein, “alkene” includes one or more atoms that are also selected from oxygen and sulfur nuclear! / ヽ.
[0056] 本明細書において「置換されていてもよいァルケ-レン」とは、上で定義した「アル ケ-レン」または「置換されたァルケ-レン」の 、ずれであってもよ 、ことを意味する。 [0056] In the present specification, the "optionally substituted alkenylene" may be a deviation from the above defined "alkylene" or "substituted alkenylene". Means
[0057] 本明細書にぉ 、て「シクロアルケ-ル」とは、環式構造を有するァルケ-ルを 、う。「 置換されたシクロアルケ-ル」とは、以下に規定する置換基によってシクロアルケ-ル の Hが置換されたシクロアルケ-ルをいう。具体例としては、 C3〜C4シクロアルケ- ル、 C3〜C5シクロアルケ-ル、 C3〜C6シクロアルケ-ル、 C3〜C7シクロアルケ- ル、 C3〜C8シクロアルケ-ル、 C3〜C9シクロアルケ-ル、 C3〜C10シクロアルケ -ル、 C3〜C11シクロアルケ-ル、 C3〜C12シクロアルケ-ル、 C3〜C4置換され たシクロアルケ-ル、 C3〜C5置換されたシクロアルケ-ル、 C3〜C6置換されたシク ロアルケ-ル、 C3〜C7置換されたシクロアルケ-ル、 C3〜C8置換されたシクロアル ケ -ル、 C3〜C9置換されたシクロアルケ-ル、 C3〜C10置換されたシクロアルケ- ル、じ3〜じ11置換されたシクロァルケ-ルまたはじ3〜じ12置換されたシクロァルケ -ルであり得る。例えば、好ましいシクロアルケ-ルとしては、 1—シクロペンテ-ル、 2—シクロへキセ-ルなどが例示される。 [0057] In the present specification, the term "cycloalkyl" refers to an alkyl having a cyclic structure. The “substituted cycloalkyl” refers to a cycloalkyl in which H of the cycloalkyl is substituted by a substituent defined below. Specific examples include C3-C4 cycloalkyl, C3-C5 cycloalkyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, C3-C7 cycloalkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C3-C9 cycloalkyl, C3-C10 Cycloalkyl, C3-C11 cycloalkyl, C3-C12 cycloalkyl, C3-C4-substituted cycloalkyl, C3-C5-substituted cycloalkyl, C3-C6-substituted cycloalkyl, C3 -C7 substituted cycloalkyl, C3-C8 substituted cycloalkyl, C3-C9 substituted cycloalkyl, C3-C10 substituted cycloalkyl , A 3- to 11-substituted cycloalkyl or a 3- to 12-substituted cycloalkyl. For example, preferred cycloalkyls include 1-cyclopentyl, 2-cyclohexyl and the like.
[0058] 本明細書において「置換されていてもよいシクロアルケ-ル」とは、上で定義した「シ クロアルケ-ル」または「置換されたシクロアルケ-ル」の 、ずれであってもよ 、ことを 意味する。 [0058] In the present specification, the "cycloalkyl which may be substituted" may be a shift of the "cycloalkyl" or the "substituted cycloalkyl" as defined above. Means
[0059] 本明細書において「アルキニル」とは、アセチレンのような、分子内に三重結合を一 つ有する脂肪族炭化水素から水素原子が一つ失われて生ずる 1価の基を 、い、一 般に C H 一で表される(ここで、 nは 2以上の正の整数である)。「置換されたアル n 2n_3 [0059] As used herein, the term "alkynyl" refers to a monovalent group such as acetylene formed by the loss of one hydrogen atom from an aliphatic hydrocarbon having one triple bond in the molecule. Generally represented by CH (where n is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2). "Substituted al n 2n_3
キ -ル」とは、以下に規定する置換基によってアルキ-ルの Hが置換されたアルキ- ルをいう。具体例としては、 C2〜C3アルキ-ル、 C2〜C4アルキ-ル、 C2〜C5アル キ -ル、 C2〜C6アルキ-ル、 C2〜C7アルキ-ル、 C2〜C8アルキ -ル、 C2〜C9 アルキ -ル、 C2〜C10アルキ-ル、 C2〜C11アルキ-ル、 C2〜C12アルキニル、 C2〜C3置換されたアルキ-ル、 C2〜C4置換されたアルキ-ル、 C2〜C5置換され たアルキ-ル、 C2〜C6置換されたアルキ-ル、 C2〜C7置換されたアルキ-ル、 C 2〜C8置換されたアルキ-ル、 C2〜C9置換されたアルキ-ル、 C2〜C10置換され たアルキ-ル、 C2〜C11置換されたアルキ-ルまたは C2〜C12置換されたアルキ -ルであり得る。ここで、例えば、 C2〜C10アルキ-ルとは、例えば炭素原子を 2〜1 0個含む直鎖または分枝状のアルキ-ルを意味し、ェチュル(CH≡C—)、 1 プロ ピニル(CH C≡C )などが例示される。また、例えば、 C2〜C10置換されたアルキ “Kyl” refers to an alkyl in which H of the alkyl is substituted by a substituent defined below. Specific examples include C2-C3 alkyl, C2-C4 alkyl, C2-C5 alkyl, C2-C6 alkyl, C2-C7 alkyl, C2-C8 alkyl, C2- C9 alkyl, C2-C10 alkyl, C2-C11 alkyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, C2-C3-substituted alkyl, C2-C4-substituted alkyl, C2-C5-substituted Alkyl, C2-C6-substituted alkyl, C2-C7-substituted alkyl, C2-C8-substituted alkyl, C2-C9-substituted alkyl, C2-C10-substituted Or a C2-C11 substituted alkyl or a C2-C12 substituted alkyl. Here, for example, C2-C10 alkyl means, for example, a linear or branched alkyl containing 2 to 10 carbon atoms, such as ethur (CH≡C—), 1 propynyl ( CH C≡C). Also, for example, C2-C10 substituted alkyl
3 Three
ニルとは、 C2〜C10アルキ-ルであって、そのうち 1または複数の水素原子が置換 基により置換されて 、るものを 、う。 Nyl refers to C2-C10 alkyl in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with a substituent.
[0060] 本明細書にぉ 、て「置換されて 、てもよ 、アルキ -ル」とは、上で定義した「アルキ[0060] As used herein, the term "substituted or optionally, alkyl" is defined as "alkoxy" as defined above.
-ル」または「置換されたアルキ-ル」の 、ずれであってもよ 、ことを意味する。 This means that the difference between “-alkyl” and “substituted alkyl” may be different.
[0061] 本明細書において「アルコキシ」とは、アルコール類のヒドロキシ基の水素原子が失 われて生ずる 1価の基をいい、一般に C H O で表される(ここで、 nは 1以上の [0061] In the present specification, "alkoxy" refers to a monovalent group generated by losing a hydrogen atom of a hydroxy group of an alcohol, and is generally represented by CHO (where n is 1 or more).
n 2n+ l n 2n + l
整数である)。「置換されたアルコキシ」とは、以下に規定する置換基によってアルコ キシの Hが置換されたアルコキシをいう。具体例としては、 C1〜C2アルコキシ、 C1 〜C3アルコキシ、 C1〜C4アルコキシ、 C1〜C5アルコキシ、 C1〜C6アルコキシ、 C 1〜C7アルコキシ、 C1〜C8アルコキシ、 C1〜C9アルコキシ、 C1〜C10アルコキシ 、 C1〜C11アルコキシ、 C1〜C12アルコキシ、 C1〜C2置換されたアルコキシ、 C1 〜C3置換されたアルコキシ、 C1〜C4置換されたアルコキシ、 C1〜C5置換されたァ ルコキシ、 C1〜C6置換されたアルコキシ、 C1〜C7置換されたアルコキシ、 C1〜C 8置換されたアルコキシ、 C1〜C9置換されたアルコキシ、 C1〜C10置換されたアル コキシ、 C1〜C11置換されたアルコキシまたは C 1〜C 12置換されたアルコキシであ り得る。ここで、例えば、 C1〜C10アルコキシとは、炭素原子を 1〜: L0個含む直鎖ま たは分枝状のアルコキシを意味し、メトキシ(CH O )、エトキシ(C H O )、 n—プ Integer). “Substituted alkoxy” refers to alkoxy in which H of the alkoxy is substituted by a substituent defined below. Specific examples include C1-C2 alkoxy, C1 ~ C3 alkoxy, C1 ~ C4 alkoxy, C1 ~ C5 alkoxy, C1 ~ C6 alkoxy, C1 ~ C7 alkoxy, C1 ~ C8 alkoxy, C1 ~ C9 alkoxy, C1 ~ C10 alkoxy, C1 ~ C11 alkoxy, C1 ~ C12 alkoxy, C1-C2-substituted alkoxy, C1-C3-substituted alkoxy, C1-C4-substituted alkoxy, C1-C5-substituted alkoxy, C1-C6-substituted alkoxy, C1-C7-substituted alkoxy, C1 It may be -C8-substituted alkoxy, C1-C9-substituted alkoxy, C1-C10-substituted alkoxy, C1-C11-substituted alkoxy or C1-C12-substituted alkoxy. Here, for example, C1-C10 alkoxy means a linear or branched alkoxy containing 1 to L0 carbon atoms, such as methoxy (CHO), ethoxy (CHO), n-propyl.
3 2 5 3 2 5
口ポキシ(CH CH CH O )などが例示される。 Mouth oxy (CH CH CH O) and the like are exemplified.
3 2 2 3 2 2
[0062] 本明細書において「置換されていてもよいアルコキシ」とは、上で定義した「アルコキ シ」または「置換されたアルコキシ」の 、ずれであってもよ 、ことを意味する。 [0062] In the present specification, "optionally substituted alkoxy" means that the "alkoxy" or "substituted alkoxy" defined above may be shifted.
[0063] 本明細書にぉ 、て「ヘテロ環 (基)」とは、炭素およびへテロ原子をも含む環状構造 を有する基をいう。ここで、ヘテロ原子は、 0、 Sおよび N力もなる群より選択され、同 一であっても異なっていてもよぐ 1つ含まれていても 2以上含まれていてもよい。へテ 口環基は、芳香族系または非芳香族系であり得、そして単環式または多環式であり 得る。ヘテロ環基は置換されていてもよい。 [0063] As used herein, the term "heterocycle (group)" refers to a group having a cyclic structure including carbon and hetero atoms. Here, the hetero atom is selected from the group consisting of 0, S, and N forces, and may be the same or different, may contain one, or may contain two or more. Heterocyclic groups can be aromatic or non-aromatic, and can be monocyclic or polycyclic. Heterocyclic groups may be substituted.
[0064] 本明細書にぉ 、て「置換されて 、てもよ 、ヘテロ環 (基)」とは、上で定義した「へテ 口環 (基)」または「置換されたへテロ環 (基)」の 、ずれであってもよ 、ことを意味する As used herein, the term “substituted or optionally a heterocycle (group)” refers to a “heterocyclic ring (group)” or a “substituted heterocycle (group)” as defined above. Base) ”means that it may be misaligned.
[0065] 本明細書において「アルコール」とは、脂肪族炭化水素の 1または 2以上の水素原 子をヒドロキシル基で置換した有機化合物をいう。本明細書においては、 ROHとも表 記される。ここで、 Rは、アルキル基である。好ましくは、 Rは、 C1〜C6アルキルであり 得る。アルコールとしては、例えば、メタノール、エタノール、 1 プロパノール、 2—プ ロノ V—ルなどが挙げられるがそれらに限定されない。 [0065] In the present specification, "alcohol" refers to an organic compound in which one or more hydrogen atoms of an aliphatic hydrocarbon are substituted with a hydroxyl group. In this specification, it is also referred to as ROH. Here, R is an alkyl group. Preferably, R may be C1-C6 alkyl. Examples of the alcohol include, but are not limited to, methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, 2-prono-Vole and the like.
[0066] 本明細書にぉ 、て「炭素環基」とは、炭素のみを含む環状構造を含む基であって、 前記の「シクロアルキル」、「置換されたシクロアルキル」、 「シクロアルケ-ル」、「置換 されたシクロアルケ-ル」以外の基を 、う。炭素環基は芳香族系または非芳香族系で あり得、そして単環式または多環式であり得る。「置換された炭素環基」とは、以下に 規定する置換基によって炭素環基の Hが置換された炭素環基を 、う。具体例として は、 C3〜C4炭素環基、 C3〜C5炭素環基、 C3〜C6炭素環基、 C3〜C7炭素環基 、 C3〜C8炭素環基、 C3〜C9炭素環基、 C3〜C10炭素環基、 C3〜C11炭素環基 、 C3〜C12炭素環基、 C3〜C4置換された炭素環基、 C3〜C5置換された炭素環 基、 C3〜C6置換された炭素環基、 C3〜C7置換された炭素環基、 C3〜C8置換さ れた炭素環基、 C3〜C9置換された炭素環基、 C3〜C10置換された炭素環基、 C3 〜C11置換された炭素環基または C3〜C12置換された炭素環基であり得る。炭素 環基はまた、 C4〜C7炭素環基または C4〜C7置換された炭素環基であり得る。炭 素環基としては、フエニル基力 水素原子が 1個欠失したものが例示される。ここで、 水素の欠失位置は、化学的に可能な任意の位置であり得、芳香環上であってもよぐ 非芳香環上であってもよ 、。 [0066] In the present specification, the term "carbocyclic group" refers to a group containing a cyclic structure containing only carbon, and includes the above-mentioned "cycloalkyl", "substituted cycloalkyl", "cycloalkyl" And "substituted cycloalkyl". Carbocyclic groups can be aromatic or non-aromatic And can be monocyclic or polycyclic. The term “substituted carbocyclic group” refers to a carbocyclic group in which H of the carbocyclic group is substituted by a substituent defined below. Specific examples include C3-C4 carbocyclic group, C3-C5 carbocyclic group, C3-C6 carbocyclic group, C3-C7 carbocyclic group, C3-C8 carbocyclic group, C3-C9 carbocyclic group, C3-C10 Carbocyclic group, C3-C11 carbocyclic group, C3-C12 carbocyclic group, C3-C4-substituted carbocyclic group, C3-C5-substituted carbocyclic group, C3-C6-substituted carbocyclic group, C3- C7-substituted carbocycle, C3-C8-substituted carbocycle, C3-C9-substituted carbocycle, C3-C10-substituted carbocycle, C3-C11-substituted carbocycle or C3 It may be a -C12 substituted carbocyclic group. The carbocyclic group can also be a C4-C7 carbocyclic group or a C4-C7 substituted carbocyclic group. Examples of the carbon ring group include one in which one phenyl group hydrogen atom is deleted. Here, the hydrogen deletion position may be any position that is chemically possible, whether on an aromatic ring or on a non-aromatic ring.
[0067] 本明細書にぉ 、て「置換されて 、てもよ 、炭素環基」とは、上で定義した「炭素環基 」または「置換された炭素環基」の 、ずれであってもよ ヽことを意味する。 [0067] As used herein, the term "substituted or optionally a carbocyclic group" refers to a deviation from the above-defined "carbocyclic group" or "substituted carbocyclic group". It also means.
[0068] 本明細書にぉ 、て「ヘテロ環基」とは、炭素およびへテロ原子をも含む環状構造を 有する基をいう。ここで,ヘテロ原子は、 0、 Sおよび N力もなる群より選択され、同一 であっても異なっていてもよく、 1つ含まれていても 2以上含まれていてもよい。ヘテロ 環基は、芳香族系または非芳香族系であり得、そして単環式または多環式であり得 る。「置換されたへテロ環基」とは、以下に規定する置換基によってへテロ環基の Hが 置換されたへテロ環基をいう。具体例としては、 C3〜C4炭素環基、 C3〜C5炭素環 基、 C3〜C6炭素環基、 C3〜C7炭素環基、 C3〜C8炭素環基、 C3〜C9炭素環基 、 C3〜C10炭素環基、 C3〜C11炭素環基、 C3〜C12炭素環基、 C3〜C4置換さ れた炭素環基、 C3〜C5置換された炭素環基、 C3〜C6置換された炭素環基、 C3 〜C7置換された炭素環基、 C3〜C8置換された炭素環基、 C3〜C9置換された炭 素環基、 C3〜C10置換された炭素環基、じ3〜じ11置換された炭素環基またはじ3 〜C 12置換された炭素環基の 1つ以上の炭素原子をへテロ原子で置換したものであ り得る。ヘテロ環基はまた、 C4〜C7炭素環基または C4〜C7置換された炭素環基 の炭素原子を 1つ以上へテロ原子で置換したものであり得る。ヘテロ環基としては、 チェニル基、ピロリル基、フリル基、イミダゾリル基、ピリジル基などが例示される。水 素の欠失位置は、化学的に可能な任意の位置であり得、芳香環上であってもよぐ非 芳香環上であってもよい。 [0068] In the present specification, the term "heterocyclic group" refers to a group having a cyclic structure including carbon and hetero atoms. Here, the heteroatom is selected from the group consisting of 0, S, and N forces, and may be the same or different, and may include one or two or more. Heterocyclic groups can be aromatic or non-aromatic, and can be monocyclic or polycyclic. “Substituted heterocyclic group” refers to a heterocyclic group in which H of the heterocyclic group is substituted by a substituent defined below. Specific examples include C3-C4 carbocyclic group, C3-C5 carbocyclic group, C3-C6 carbocyclic group, C3-C7 carbocyclic group, C3-C8 carbocyclic group, C3-C9 carbocyclic group, C3-C10 Carbocyclic group, C3-C11 carbocyclic group, C3-C12 carbocyclic group, C3-C4-substituted carbocyclic group, C3-C5-substituted carbocyclic group, C3-C6-substituted carbocyclic group, C3 -C7 substituted carbocyclic group, C3-C8 substituted carbocyclic group, C3-C9 substituted carbocyclic group, C3-C10 substituted carbocyclic group, J3-J11 substituted carbocycle It may be a group or a 3- to C12-substituted carbocyclic group in which one or more carbon atoms have been substituted with a heteroatom. The heterocyclic group may also be a C4-C7 carbocyclic group or a C4-C7 substituted carbocyclic group in which one or more carbon atoms have been substituted with one or more heteroatoms. As a heterocyclic group, Examples thereof include a phenyl group, a pyrrolyl group, a furyl group, an imidazolyl group, and a pyridyl group. The position of deletion of hydrogen may be any position that is chemically possible, and may be on an aromatic ring or on a non-aromatic ring.
[0069] 本明細書において、炭素環基またはへテロ環基は、下記に定義されるように 1価の 置換基で置換され得ることに加えて、 2価の置換基で置換され得る。そのような二価 の置換は、ォキソ置換 ( = O)またはチォキソ置換( = S)であり得る。 [0069] In the present specification, a carbocyclic group or a heterocyclic group may be substituted with a divalent substituent in addition to being substituted with a monovalent substituent as defined below. Such a divalent substitution can be an oxo substitution (= O) or a thioxo substitution (= S).
[0070] 本明細書にぉ 、て「ハロゲン」とは、周期表 7B族に属するフッ素 (F)、塩素(C1)、 臭素(Br)、ヨウ素(I)などの元素の 1価の基をいう。 [0070] In this specification, "halogen" refers to a monovalent group of elements such as fluorine (F), chlorine (C1), bromine (Br), and iodine (I) belonging to Group 7B of the periodic table. Say.
[0071] 本明細書において「ヒドロキシ」とは、 OHで表される基をいう。「置換されたヒドロ キシ」とは、ヒドロキシの Hが下記で定義される置換基で置換されて 、るものを 、う。 [0071] In the present specification, "hydroxy" refers to a group represented by OH. The term “substituted hydroxy” refers to a compound in which H of hydroxy is substituted by a substituent defined below.
[0072] 本明細書にぉ 、て「チオール」とは、ヒドロキシ基の酸素原子を硫黄原子で置換し た基 (メルカプト基)であり、 SHで表される。「置換されたチオール」とは、メルカプト の Hが下記で定義される置換基で置換されて 、る基を 、う。 [0072] In the present specification, "thiol" is a group in which an oxygen atom of a hydroxy group is substituted with a sulfur atom (mercapto group), and is represented by SH. The term “substituted thiol” refers to a group in which H of mercapto is substituted with a substituent defined below.
[0073] 本明細書において「シァノ」とは、—CNで表される基をいう。「ニトロ」とは、 -NO [0073] In the present specification, "cyano" refers to a group represented by -CN. "Nitro" means -NO
2 で表される基をいう。「ァミノ」とは、 -NH Refers to the group represented by 2. "Amino" means -NH
2で表される基をいう。「置換されたァミノ」と は、ァミノの Hが以下で定義される置換基で置換されたものを 、う。 Refers to the group represented by 2. The term "substituted amino" refers to an amino in which H of the amino is substituted with a substituent as defined below.
[0074] 本明細書において「カルボキシ」とは、—COOHで表される基をいう。「置換された カルボキシ」とは、カルボキシの Hが以下に定義される置換基で置換されたものをいう [0074] In the present specification, "carboxy" refers to a group represented by -COOH. "Substituted carboxy" refers to carboxy in which H is substituted with a substituent as defined below.
[0075] 本明細書にぉ 、て「チォカルボキシ」とは、カルボキシ基の酸素原子を硫黄原子で 置換した基をいい、 C ( = S) OH、— C ( = 0) SHまたは— CSSHで表され得る。「 置換されたチォカルボキシ」とは、チォカルボキシの Hが以下に定義される置換基で 置換されたものをいう。 [0075] In the present specification, "thiocarboxy" refers to a group in which an oxygen atom of a carboxy group is substituted with a sulfur atom, and is represented by C (= S) OH, —C (= 0) SH or —CSSH. Can be represented. “Substituted thiocarboxy” refers to thiocarboxy in which H is substituted with a substituent as defined below.
[0076] 本明細書にぉ 、て「ァシル」とは、カルボン酸から OHを除 、てできる 1価の基を!、う 。ァシル基の代表例としては、ァセチル(CH CO )、ベンゾィル(C H CO )など [0076] As used herein, the term "acyl" refers to a monovalent group formed by removing OH from a carboxylic acid. Representative examples of acetyl groups include acetyl (CH 2 CO 3) and benzoyl (CH 2 CO 3)
3 6 5 3 6 5
が挙げられる。「置換されたァシル」とは、ァシルの水素を以下に定義される置換基で 置換したものをいう。 Is mentioned. “Substituted acyl” refers to the hydrogen of an acyl substituted with a substituent as defined below.
[0077] 本明細書にぉ 、て「アミド」とは、アンモニアの水素を酸基 (ァシル基)で置換した基 であり、好ましくは、 -CONHで表される。「置換されたアミド」とは、アミドが置換され [0077] As used herein, the term "amide" refers to a group in which hydrogen of ammonia is substituted with an acid group (acyl group). And preferably represented by -CONH. "Substituted amide" refers to an amide substituted
2 2
たものをいう。 Means
[0078] 本明細書にぉ 、て「カルボ-ル」とは、アルデヒドおよびケトンの特性基である一(C [0078] In the present specification, the term "carbon" refers to one (C) which is a characteristic group of aldehyde and ketone.
= o) を含むものを総称したものをいう。「置換されたカルボ-ル」は、下記におい て選択される置換基で置換されているカルボ二ル基を意味する。 = o). "Substituted carbonyl" refers to a carbonyl group substituted with a substituent selected as described below.
[0079] 本明細書にぉ 、て「チォカルボ-ル」とは、カルボニルにおける酸素原子を硫黄原 子に置換した基であり、特性基—(C = S)—を含む。チォカルボ-ルには、チオケト ンおよびチォアルデヒドが含まれる。「置換されたチォカルボ-ル」とは、下記におい て選択される置換基で置換されたチォカルボニルを意味する。 [0079] In the present specification, "thiocarbol" is a group in which an oxygen atom in carbonyl is substituted by a sulfur atom, and includes a characteristic group-(C = S)-. Thiocarbol includes thioketone and thioaldehyde. "Substituted thiocarbol" means thiocarbonyl substituted with a substituent selected as described below.
[0080] 本明細書において「スルホ -ル」とは、特性基である SO を含むものを総称し [0080] In this specification, "sulfol" is a generic term for a substance containing SO 2 as a characteristic group.
2 2
たものをいう。「置換されたスルホ -ル」とは、下記において選択される置換基で置換 されたスルホ -ルを意味する。 Means “Substituted sulfol” means a sulfol substituted with a substituent selected below.
[0081] 本明細書において「スルフィエル」とは、特性基である SO—を含むものを総称し たものをいう。「置換されたスルフィエル」とは、下記において選択される置換基で置 換されて!/、るスルフィエルを意味する。 [0081] In the present specification, "sulfiel" is a generic term for a substance containing SO- which is a characteristic group. "Substituted sulfiel" means sulfiel which has been replaced by a substituent selected below.
[0082] 本明細書において「ァリール」とは、芳香族炭化水素の環に結合する水素原子が 1 個離脱して生ずる基をいい、本明細書において、炭素環基に包含される。 [0082] In the present specification, "aryl" refers to a group formed by the removal of one hydrogen atom bonded to the ring of an aromatic hydrocarbon, and is included in the present specification as a carbocyclic group.
[0083] 本明細書においては、特に言及がない限り、置換は、ある有機化合物または置換 基中の 1または 2以上の水素原子を他の原子または原子団で置き換えることをいう。 水素原子を 1つ除去して 1価の置換基に置換することも可能であり、そして水素原子 を 2つ除去して 2価の置換基に置換することも可能である。 [0083] In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the term "substitution" refers to replacement of one or more hydrogen atoms in an organic compound or a substituent with another atom or atomic group. It is also possible to remove one hydrogen atom and substitute with a monovalent substituent, and it is also possible to remove two hydrogen atoms and substitute with a divalent substituent.
[0084] 本明細書においては、特に言及がない限り、置換は、ある有機化合物または置換 基中の 1または 2以上の水素原子を他の原子または原子団で置き換えることをいう。 水素原子を 1つ除去して 1価の置換基に置換することも可能であり、そして水素原子 を 2つ除去して 2価の置換基に置換することも可能である。 [0084] In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the term "substitution" refers to replacing one or more hydrogen atoms in an organic compound or a substituent with another atom or atomic group. It is also possible to remove one hydrogen atom and substitute with a monovalent substituent, and it is also possible to remove two hydrogen atoms and substitute with a divalent substituent.
[0085] 本発明における置換基としては、アルキル、シクロアルキル、ァルケ-ル、シクロア ルケ-ル、アルキ -ル、アルコキシ、炭素環基、ヘテロ環基、ハロゲン、ヒドロキシ、チ オール、シァ入ニトロ、アミ入カルボキシ、力ルバモイル、ァシル、ァシルァミノ、チォ カルボキシ、アミド、置換されたカルボ-ル、置換されたチォカルボ-ル、置換された スルホニルまたは置換されたスルフィニル、あるいは任意の無機置換基 (例えば、ケ ィ素含有置換基)が挙げられるがそれらに限定されない。このような置換基は、本発 明において、リンカ一、生体分子の改変の設計のときに、適宜利用することができる。 [0085] Examples of the substituent in the present invention include alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkyl, alkoxy, carbocyclic group, heterocyclic group, halogen, hydroxy, thiol, nitro nitro, Carboxy with ami, rubamoyl, asil, asilamino, chio Examples include, but are not limited to, carboxy, amide, substituted carboyl, substituted thiocarbol, substituted sulfonyl or substituted sulfinyl, or any inorganic substituent (e.g., a silicon-containing substituent). Not limited. In the present invention, such substituents can be appropriately used in designing linkers and biomolecules.
[0086] 好ましくは、置換基は、複数存在する場合それぞれ独立して、水素原子またはアル キルあるいは任意の無機置換基 (例えば、ケィ素含有置換基)であり得るが、複数の 置換基全てが水素原子であることはない。より好ましくは、独立して、置換基は、複数 存在する場合それぞれ独立して、水素および C1〜C6アルキル力もなる群あるいは 任意の無機置換基 (例えば、ケィ素含有置換基)より選択され得る。置換基は、すべ てが水素以外の置換基を有していても良いが、好ましくは、少なくとも 1つの水素、よ り好ましくは、 2〜n (ここで nは置換基の個数)の水素を有し得る。置換基のうち水素 の数が多!ヽことが好ましくあり得る。大きな置換基または極性のある置換基は本発明 の効果 (結合特性)に障害を有し得るからである。従って、水素以外の置換基として は、好ましくは、 C1〜C6アルキル、 C1〜C5アルキル、 C1〜C4アルキル、 C1〜C3 アルキル、 C1〜C2アルキル、メチルあるいは任意の無機置換基 (例えば、ケィ素含 有置換基)などであり得る。ただし、本発明の効果を増強し得ることもあることから、大 きな置換基を有することもまた好ましくあり得る。 [0086] Preferably, when a plurality of substituents are present, each may independently be a hydrogen atom or an alkyl or any inorganic substituent (for example, a silicon-containing substituent). It cannot be a hydrogen atom. More preferably, independently, when there are a plurality of substituents, each may be independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and a C1-C6 alkyl group or any inorganic substituent (eg, a silicon-containing substituent). The substituents may all have a substituent other than hydrogen, but preferably have at least one hydrogen, more preferably 2 to n (where n is the number of substituents) hydrogen. Can have. It may be preferable that the number of hydrogen atoms in the substituent is large. This is because a large substituent or a polar substituent may impair the effect (binding property) of the present invention. Accordingly, the substituents other than hydrogen are preferably C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C5 alkyl, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C2 alkyl, methyl or any inorganic substituent (e.g., (Containing substituent). However, it may be preferable to have a large substituent since the effect of the present invention may be enhanced.
[0087] 本明細書において、 Cl、 C2、、、 Cnは、炭素数を表す。従って、 C1は炭素数 1個 の置換基を表すために使用される。 [0087] In the present specification, Cl, C2, ..., Cn represent the number of carbon atoms. Accordingly, C1 is used to represent a substituent having one carbon atom.
[0088] 本明細書において、「光学異性体」とは、結晶または分子の構造が鏡像関係にあつ て、重ねあわせることのできない一対の化合物の一方またはその組をいう。立体異性 体の一形態であり、他の性質は同じであるにもかかわらず、旋光性のみが異なる。本 発明では、好ましくは、光学異性体の純度が高いものが使用され得る。 [0088] As used herein, the term "optical isomer" refers to one or a pair of non-superimposable compounds in which the structure of the crystal or molecule is a mirror image. It is a form of stereoisomer that differs only in optical rotation, despite other properties being the same. In the present invention, those having high optical isomer purity can be preferably used.
[0089] 本明細書にぉ 、て「保護反応」とは、 Bocのような保護基を、保護が所望される官能 基に付加する反応をいう。保護基により官能基を保護することによって、より反応性の 高い官能基の反応を抑制し、より反応性の低い官能基のみを反応させることができる 。保護反応は、例えば、脱水反応により行うことができる。 [0089] As used herein, the term "protection reaction" refers to a reaction in which a protecting group such as Boc is added to a functional group for which protection is desired. By protecting the functional group with the protecting group, the reaction of the functional group having higher reactivity can be suppressed, and only the functional group having lower reactivity can be reacted. The protection reaction can be performed, for example, by a dehydration reaction.
[0090] 本明細書にぉ ヽて「脱保護反応」とは、 Bocのような保護基を脱離させる反応を ヽぅ 。脱保護反応としては、 PdZCを用いる還元反応のような反応が挙げられる。脱保護 反応は、例えば、加水分解により行うことができる。 [0090] As used herein, the term "deprotection reaction" refers to a reaction for eliminating a protecting group such as Boc. . Examples of the deprotection reaction include a reaction such as a reduction reaction using PdZC. The deprotection reaction can be performed, for example, by hydrolysis.
[0091] 本明細書にぉ 、て「保護基」としては、例えば、フルォレニルメトキシカルボ-ル(F moc)基、ァセチル基、ベンジル基、ベンゾィル基、 t—ブトキシカルボ-ル基、 tーブ チルジメチル基、シリル基、トリメチルシリルェチル基、 N—フタルイミジル基、トリメチ ルシリルェチルォキシカルボ-ル基、 2 -トロー 4, 5 ジメトキシベンジル基、 2— ニトロ—4, 5—ジメトキシベンジルォキシカルボ-ル基、力ルバメート基などが代表的 な保護基として挙げられる。保護基は、生体分子において結合に関与しない部分を 保護するために用いることができる。保護基は、例えば、アミノ基、カルボキシル基な どの反応性の官能基を保護するために用いることができる。反応の条件や目的に応 じ、種々の保護基を使い分けることができる。ヒドロキシ基の保護基にはァセチル基、 ベンジル基、シリル基またはそれらの誘導体などが、ァミノ基の保護基にはァセチル 基のほかべンジルォキシカルボ-ル基、 t ブトキシカルボ-ル基またはそれらの誘 導体などを使用することができる。アミノォキシ基および N—アルキルアミノォキシ基 の保護基として、トリメチルシリルェチルォキシカルボ-ル基、 2 -トロ— 4, 5 ジメ トキシベンジルォキシカルボ-ル基またはそれらの誘導体が好ましい。 [0091] In the present specification, "protecting group" includes, for example, a fluorenylmethoxycarbol (Fmoc) group, an acetyl group, a benzyl group, a benzoyl group, a t-butoxycarbol group, t-butyldimethyl group, silyl group, trimethylsilylethyl group, N-phthalimidyl group, trimethylsilylethyloxycarbonyl group, 2-tro-5,5-dimethoxybenzyl group, 2-nitro-4,5-dimethoxy Typical protective groups include a benzyloxycarbol group and a sulfamate group. Protecting groups can be used to protect moieties that are not involved in binding in biomolecules. The protecting group can be used, for example, to protect a reactive functional group such as an amino group and a carboxyl group. Various protecting groups can be used depending on the reaction conditions and purpose. The protecting group for the hydroxy group includes acetyl, benzyl, silyl and derivatives thereof, and the protecting group for the amino group includes acetyl, benzyloxycarbyl, t-butoxycarbol and the like. Inductors and the like can be used. As the protecting group for the aminooxy group and the N-alkylaminooxy group, a trimethylsilylethyloxycarboxy group, a 2-toro-4,5 dimethoxybenzyloxycarboxy group or a derivative thereof is preferable.
[0092] 本発明の各方法において、 目的とする生成物は、反応液から夾雑物 (未反応減量 、副生成物、溶媒など)を、当該分野で慣用される方法 (例えば、抽出、蒸留、洗浄、 濃縮、沈澱、濾過、乾燥など)によって除去した後に、当該分野で慣用される後処理 方法 (例えば、吸着、溶離、蒸留、沈澱、析出、クロマトグラフィーなど)を組み合わせ て処理して単離し得る。 [0092] In each method of the present invention, the target product is obtained by removing contaminants (unreacted weight loss, by-products, solvent, etc.) from the reaction solution by a method commonly used in the art (for example, extraction, distillation, After removal by washing, concentration, precipitation, filtration, drying, etc.), isolation by a combination of post-treatment methods commonly used in the art (eg, adsorption, elution, distillation, precipitation, precipitation, chromatography, etc.). obtain.
[0093] (血管新生活性) [0093] (Angiogenic activity)
本明細書にぉ 、て「血管新生」とは、血管が新たに形成されることおよびそのように 形成する活性をいう。 As used herein, the term "angiogenesis" refers to the formation of new blood vessels and the activity of such formation.
[0094] 本明細書にぉ 、て「血管ネットワーク形成」とは、新生された血管または既存の血管 力 網状になることおよびそのように形成する活性を!、う。 [0094] As used herein, the term "vascular network formation" refers to the formation of new blood vessels or existing vascular forces and the activity of forming such networks! , U.
[0095] 本明細書において、血管ネットワーク形成能力は、血管新生インデックスと新生され た血管の長さ、または血管ネットワーク形成能または血管ネットワーク形成インデック スで示される。血管新生は、網状が形成された力どうか (例えば、分岐した血管がさら に別の血管と結合すること、およびその連接点の数の増カロ)を観察することによって 判定することができるが、簡便には、血管ネットワーク形成インデックスは、本明細書 にお 、て以下のようにして算出される。 [0095] As used herein, the vascular network forming ability is determined by the angiogenesis index and the length of the newly formed blood vessel, or the vascular network forming ability or the vascular network forming index. Indicated by Angiogenesis can be determined by observing whether the reticulated force has formed (e.g., the bifurcation of a blood vessel joining more blood vessels and increasing the number of its junctions). For simplicity, the vascular network formation index is calculated as follows in this specification.
[0096] まず、新生血管数を、計数する。計数は、 0. 79cmあたりの血管本数で決める。血 [0096] First, the number of new blood vessels is counted. The count is determined by the number of blood vessels per 0.79 cm. Blood
2 2
管数が、以下の本数のとき、右のスコアであると換算する。 When the number of tubes is the following number, it is converted to the right score.
0 : 0 0: 0
1〜: LO : l 1 to: LO: l
11〜20 : 2 11-20: 2
21〜30 : 3 21-30: 3
31〜40 : 4 31-40: 4
41以上: 5 41 or more: 5
次に、新生した血管の長さを決定する。長さは、以下のようにして測定する。実体顕 微鏡 (ォリンパス、 SZX12、 Japan)にて観察した。得られた画像を Photoshop (登録 商標)(Adobe、 Japan)にて読み取り。ピクセルで計数する。 Next, the length of the new blood vessel is determined. The length is measured as follows. Observation was made with a stereomicroscope (Olympus, SZX12, Japan). The obtained image was read by Photoshop (registered trademark) (Adobe, Japan). Count in pixels.
100未満: 1 Less than 100: 1
100〜125未満: 2 100 to less than 125: 2
125〜150未満: 3 125 to less than 150: 3
150〜175未満: 4 150 to less than 175: 4
175〜200未満: 5 175 to less than 200: 5
200以上: 6。 More than 200: 6.
[0097] これらのうち双方ともスコアがよ!、ものが血管ネットワーク形成能が高 、こととみなす ことができることから、本明細書では、それらを積を血管ネットワーク形成能を評価す ることがでさる。 [0097] Since both of these can be regarded as having a good score! And those having a high vascular network forming ability, it can be considered that the product thereof is used to evaluate the vascular network forming ability. Monkey
[0098] ネットワーク形成能にっ 、ては、組織での血管新生の状態を実体顕微鏡 (ォリンパ ス、 SZX12、Japan)にて観察することができる。得られた画像を Photoshop (登録商 標)(Adobe、 Japan)にて読み取りネットワーク能を以下のようにスコア化する。以下 のスコアを本明細書にぉ 、て「血管ネットワーク形成能」または「血管ネットワーク形成 インデックス」あるいは単に「ネットワークインデックス」とも!/、う。 [0098] Regarding the ability to form a network, the state of angiogenesis in a tissue can be observed with a stereoscopic microscope (Olympus, SZX12, Japan). The obtained image is read by Photoshop (registered trademark) (Adobe, Japan) and the network ability is scored as follows. The following scores are referred to herein as “vascular network forming ability” or “vascular network forming ability”. Also called "index" or simply "network index!"
[0099] Nwl:ネットワーク形成前記で血管新生は認められるが、各新生血管は単独の状 fe。 [0099] Nwl: Network formation Although angiogenesis is observed as described above, each new blood vessel is a single fe.
[0100] Nw2 :ネットワーク形成中期であり、各新生血管同士は、はしご上の側枝が係った 状態。 [0100] Nw2: In the middle stage of network formation, each new blood vessel is in a state in which a side branch on a ladder is engaged.
[0101] Nw3 :ネットワーク完成期であり、はしご上側枝がさらに側枝を出した状態。 [0101] Nw3: The network is in the final stage, and the ladder upper branch has more side branches.
[0102] Nw4 :ネットワーク成熟期であり、広範囲に新生血管叢を示す状態。 [0102] Nw4: Network maturation stage, showing a wide range of neovascular plexus.
[0103] 本発明にお 、て実証されるように、血管ネットワーク形成能があるとは、通常、その ような血管ネットワーク形成インデックス力 少なくとも 2であり、好ましくは、 2. 5以上 であり、より好ましくは、 3以上であり、さらに好ましくは 3. 5以上であることを意味する ことが理解される。 [0103] As demonstrated in the present invention, the ability to form a vascular network usually means such a vascular network formation index force of at least 2, preferably 2.5 or more, and more preferably 2.5 or more. It is understood that it is preferably 3 or more, more preferably 3.5 or more.
[0104] 本明細書における「血管」は、当該分野において通常使用される意味で用いられ、 通常の動脈、静脈などのほか、毛細管を含む。 [0104] The term "blood vessel" in the present specification is used in a sense commonly used in the art, and includes not only ordinary arteries and veins, but also capillaries.
[0105] 本明細書において「細胞接着分子」(Cell adhesion molecule)または「接着分 子」とは、互換可能に使用され、 2つ以上の細胞の互いの接近 (細胞接着)または基 質と細胞との間の接着を媒介する分子をいう。一般には、細胞と細胞の接着 (細胞間 接着)に関する分子(cell— cell adhesion molecule)と,細胞と細胞外マトリックス との接着(細胞一基質接着)に関与する分子(cell— substrate adhesion molec ule)に分けられる。本発明では、いずれの分子も有用であり、有効に使用することが できる。従って、本明細書において細胞接着分子は、細胞-基質接着の際の基質側 のタンパク質を包含するが、本明細書では、細胞側のタンパク質 (例えば、インテグリ ンなど)も包含され、タンパク質以外の分子であっても、細胞接着を媒介する限り、本 明細書における細胞接着分子または細胞接着分子の概念に入る。 [0105] As used herein, the term "cell adhesion molecule" or "adhesion molecule" is used interchangeably and refers to the approach of two or more cells to each other (cell adhesion) or the relationship between a substrate and a cell. Refers to molecules that mediate adhesion between Generally, a molecule involved in cell-cell adhesion (cell-cell adhesion) (cell-cell adhesion molecule) and a molecule involved in cell-extracellular matrix adhesion (cell-substrate adhesion) (cell-substrate adhesion molecule) Divided into In the present invention, any molecule is useful and can be used effectively. Therefore, in the present specification, the cell adhesion molecule includes a protein on the substrate side during cell-substrate adhesion, but in the present specification, a protein on the cell side (for example, integrin) is also included, and other than the protein, Even a molecule, as long as it mediates cell adhesion, falls within the concept of a cell adhesion molecule or cell adhesion molecule herein.
[0106] 細胞間接着に関しては、カドヘリン、免疫グロブリンスーパーファミリーに属する多く の分子(NCAM、 Ll、 ICAM、ファシクリン Π、 ΙΠなど)、セレクチンなどが知られてお り、それぞれ独特な分子反応により細胞膜を結合させることも知られている。 [0106] Regarding cell-cell adhesion, cadherin, many molecules belonging to the immunoglobulin superfamily (NCAM, Ll, ICAM, facyclin Π, ΙΠ, etc.), selectins, and the like are known, and cell membranes are formed by unique molecular reactions. It is also known to combine
[0107] 他方、細胞一基質接着のために働く主要な細胞接着分子はインテグリンで,細胞 外マトリックスに含まれる種々のタンパク質を認識し結合する。これらの細胞接着分子 はすべて細胞膜表面にあり,一種のレセプター(細胞接着受容体)とみなすこともで きる。従って、細胞膜にあるこのようなレセプターもまた本発明の組織片において使 用することができる。そのようなレセプターとしては、例えば、 αインテグリン、 j8インテ ダリン、 CD44,シンデカンおよびァグリカンなどが挙げられるがそれに限定されない [0107] On the other hand, the major cell adhesion molecule that works for cell-substrate adhesion is integrin, which recognizes and binds to various proteins contained in the extracellular matrix. These cell adhesion molecules Are all located on the cell membrane surface and can be regarded as a type of receptor (cell adhesion receptor). Accordingly, such receptors located on the cell membrane can also be used in the tissue pieces of the present invention. Such receptors include, but are not limited to, for example, α integrin, j8 intedarin, CD44, syndecan, and aggrecan.
[0108] なお、本明細書では、インテグリンなどの結合の相手となる細胞外マトリックス分子( フイブロネクチン,ラミニンなどの細胞接着性タンパク質)も細胞接着分子の範疇に入 る。それぞれの接着受容体の,細胞間接着,細胞一基質接着における機能分担は 厳密なものではなく,相手となる分子(リガンド)の分布によって変動する。例えば、ィ ンテグリンのあるものは血球間の接着など細胞間接着にも関与する。また、増殖因子 、サイト力インなどが細胞膜タンパク質として存在する場合、他の細胞に分布するそ れらのレセプターとの反応力 結果として細胞を接着させることが知られて 、ること力 ら、そのような増殖因子、サイト力インもまた、本発明の組織片に含まれる生体分子と して使用することができる。 [0108] In the present specification, extracellular matrix molecules (cell adhesion proteins such as fibronectin and laminin), which are binding partners such as integrins, are also included in the category of cell adhesion molecules. The function of each adhesion receptor in cell-cell adhesion and cell-substrate adhesion is not strict, and varies depending on the distribution of partner molecules (ligands). For example, some integrins are also involved in cell-cell adhesion, such as adhesion between blood cells. It is also known that when growth factors, cytokins, and the like are present as cell membrane proteins, they react with their receptors distributed on other cells and consequently adhere the cells. Such growth factors and cytokins can also be used as biomolecules contained in the tissue piece of the present invention.
[0109] このように多種多様な分子が細胞接着に関与しており、それぞれの機能は異なって いることから、当業者は、 目的に応じて、適宜本発明の組織片に含まれるべき分子を 選択することができる。細胞接着に関する技術は、上述のもののほかの知見も周知で あり、例えば、細胞外マトリックス 臨床への応用ーメディカルレビュー社に記載され ている。 [0109] Since a wide variety of molecules are involved in cell adhesion as described above and their functions are different, those skilled in the art may appropriately determine the molecules to be included in the tissue piece of the present invention according to the purpose. You can choose. Techniques relating to cell adhesion are well known in addition to those described above, and are described, for example, in Extracellular Matrix Clinical Application-Medical Review.
[0110] ある分子が細胞接着分子であるかどうかは、生化学的定量 (SDS— PAG法、標識 コラーゲン法)、免疫学的定量 (酵素抗体法、蛍光抗体法、免疫組織学的検討) PD R法、ハイブリダィゼーシヨン法などのようなアツセィにお 、て陽性となることを決定す ることにより判定することができる。このような細胞接着分子としては、コラーゲン、イン テグリン、フイブロネクチン、ラミニン、ビトロネクチン、フイブリノゲン、免疫グロブリンス 一パーファミリー(例えば、 CD2、 CD4、 CD8、 ICM1、 ICAM2、 VCAM1)、セレク チン、カドヘリンなどが挙げられるがそれに限定されない。このような細胞接着分子の 多くは、細胞への接着と同時に細胞間相互作用による細胞活性化の補助シグナルを 細胞内に伝達する。従って、本発明の組織片において用いられる接着因子としては 、そのような細胞活性ィ匕の補助シグナルを細胞内に伝達するものが好ましい。細胞 活性ィ匕により、組織片としてある組織または臓器における損傷部位に適用された後 に、そこに集合した細胞および/または組織もしくは臓器にある細胞の増殖を促すこ とができるからである。そのような補助シグナルを細胞内に伝達することができるかど うかは、生化学的定量 (SDS— PAGE法、標識コラーゲン法)、免疫学的定量 (酵素 抗体法、蛍光抗体法、免疫組織学的検討) PDR法、ハイブリダィゼーシヨン法という アツセィにおいて陽性となることを決定することにより判定することができる。 [0110] Whether a molecule is a cell adhesion molecule can be determined by biochemical quantification (SDS-PAG method, labeled collagen method), immunological quantification (enzyme antibody method, fluorescent antibody method, immunohistological examination) PD The determination can be made by determining a positive result in an assay such as the R method or the hybridization method. Such cell adhesion molecules include collagen, integrin, fibronectin, laminin, vitronectin, fibrinogen, the immunoglobulin parfamily (e.g., CD2, CD4, CD8, ICM1, ICAM2, VCAM1), selectin, cadherin, and the like. But not limited thereto. Many of these cell adhesion molecules transmit auxiliary signals for cell activation by cell-cell interaction simultaneously with cell adhesion. Therefore, the adhesion factors used in the tissue piece of the present invention include Those that transmit such an auxiliary signal for cell activation into a cell are preferred. This is because, after being applied to an injured site in a certain tissue or organ as a tissue piece, cell activation can promote the proliferation of cells aggregated therein and / or cells in the tissue or organ. Whether such an auxiliary signal can be transmitted into cells is determined by biochemical quantification (SDS-PAGE, labeled collagen method), immunological quantification (enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay, immunofluorescent assay, immunohistochemical assay). Investigation) It can be determined by determining positive in the PDR method and the hybridization method.
[0111] 細胞接着分子としては、例えば、組織固着性の細胞系に広く知られる細胞接着分 子としてカドヘリンがあり、カドヘリンは、本発明の好ましい実施形態において使用す ることができる。一方,非固着性の血液'免疫系の細胞では,細胞接着分子としては 、例えば、免疫グロブリンスーパーファミリー分子(CD2、 LFA—3、 ICAM—1、 CD 2、 CD4、 CD8、 ICM1、 ICAM2、 VCAM1など);インテグリンファミリー分子(LFA —1、 Mac— 1、 gpllbllla, pl50、 95、 VLA1、 VLA2、 VLA3、 VLA4、 VLA5、 V LA6など);セレクチンファミリー分子(L—セレクチン, E—セレクチン, P—セレクチン など)などが挙げられるがそれらに限定されない。従って、そのような分子は、血液- 免疫系の組織または臓器を処置するための特に有用であり得る。 [0111] Examples of the cell adhesion molecule include cadherin, which is widely known as a cell adhesion molecule in tissue-fixing cell lines, and cadherin can be used in a preferred embodiment of the present invention. On the other hand, in cells of the non-fixed blood 'immune system, examples of cell adhesion molecules include immunoglobulin superfamily molecules (CD2, LFA-3, ICAM-1, CD2, CD4, CD8, ICM1, ICAM2, VCAM1). Integrin family molecules (LFA-1, Mac-1, gpllbllla, pl50, 95, VLA1, VLA2, VLA3, VLA4, VLA5, VLA6, etc.); selectin family molecules (L-selectin, E-selectin, P— Selectin) and the like, but are not limited thereto. Thus, such molecules may be particularly useful for treating tissues or organs of the blood-immune system.
[0112] 細胞接着分子は、非固着性の細胞が特定の組織で働くためにはその組織への接 着が必要となる。その場合,恒常的に発現するセレクチン分子などによる一次接着、 それに続いて活性ィ匕されるインテグリン分子などの二次接着によって細胞間の接着 は段階的に強くなると考えられている。従って、本発明において用いられる細胞接着 分子としては、そのような一次接着を媒介する因子、二次接着を媒介する因子、また はその両方が一緒に使用され得る。 [0112] In order for non-fixed cells to work in a specific tissue, the cell adhesion molecule needs to adhere to that tissue. In this case, it is thought that the adhesion between cells is gradually strengthened by the primary adhesion by the constantly expressed selectin molecule and the like, followed by the secondary adhesion of the activated integrin molecule and the like. Therefore, as a cell adhesion molecule used in the present invention, such a factor that mediates primary adhesion, a factor that mediates secondary adhesion, or both may be used together.
[0113] 本明細書にぉ 、て「細胞接着性タンパク質」とは、上述のような細胞接着を媒介す る機能を有するタンパク質をいう。従って、本明細書において細胞接着性タンパク質 は、細胞-基質接着の際の基質側のタンパク質を包含するが、本明細書では、細胞 側のタンパク質 (例えば、インテグリンなど)をも包含する。例えば、基質側のタンパク 質を吸着した基質 (ガラスやプラスチック)の上に無血清条件下で培養細胞を播種す ると,レセプターであるインテグリンが細胞接着性タンパク質を認識し、細胞はその基 質に接着する。細胞接着性タンパク質の活性部位はアミノ酸レベルで解明されており 、 RGD, YIGSRなどが知られている(これらを、総合して RGD配列とも呼ぶ)。従つ て、 1つの好ましい実施形態において、本発明の組織片に含まれるタンパク質は、 R GD、 YIGSRなどの RGD配列を含むことが有利であり得る。通常、細胞接着性タン パク質は、細胞外マトリックス、培養細胞表面、血漿 '血清'各種体液に存在する。そ の生体内での機能としては,細胞の細胞外マトリックスへの接着だけでなく,細胞の 移動 ·増殖 ·形態調節 ·組織構築などが知られている。細胞作用とは別に,血液凝固 •補体作用の調節機能を示すタンパク質もあり、本発明では、そのような機能を有す るタンパク質もまた有用であり得る。そのような細胞接着性タンパク質としては、例え ば、フイブロネクチン,コラーゲン,ビトロネクチン,ラミニンなどが挙げられるがそれら に限定されない。 [0113] As used herein, "cell adhesive protein" refers to a protein having a function of mediating cell adhesion as described above. Therefore, in the present specification, the cell adhesive protein includes a protein on the substrate side during cell-substrate adhesion, but herein also includes a protein on the cell side (eg, integrin). For example, when cultured cells are seeded under serum-free conditions on a substrate (glass or plastic) to which the protein on the substrate side has been adsorbed, the integrin, a receptor, recognizes the cell adhesion protein and the cells Glue to the quality. The active site of the cell adhesion protein has been elucidated at the amino acid level, and RGD, YIGSR and the like are known (these are also collectively referred to as the RGD sequence). Thus, in one preferred embodiment, the protein contained in the tissue piece of the present invention may advantageously include an RGD sequence such as RGD, YIGSR. Normally, cell adhesion proteins are present in extracellular matrices, cultured cell surfaces, and in plasma 'serum' various body fluids. Its functions in vivo include not only the adhesion of cells to the extracellular matrix, but also the movement, proliferation, morphology, and tissue construction of cells. Apart from cellular actions, some proteins exhibit a function of regulating blood coagulation and complement action. In the present invention, proteins having such functions may also be useful. Examples of such cell adhesion proteins include, but are not limited to, fibronectin, collagen, vitronectin, laminin, and the like.
[0114] 本明細書において「RGD分子」とは、アミノ酸配列 RGD (Arg— Gly— Asp)または その機能的に同一な配列を含むタンパク質分子をいう。 RGD分子は、細胞接着性タ ンパク質の細胞接着活性部位のアミノ酸配列として有用なアミノ酸配列である RGDま たは機能的に等価な別のアミノ酸配列を含むことを特徴とする。 RGD配列は、フイブ ロネクチンの細胞接着部位として発見され、その後, I型コラーゲン、ラミニン,ビトロネ クチン,フイブリノゲン,フォンヴィルブランド因子,ェンタクチンなど多くの細胞接着性 の活性を示す分子に見出された。化学合成した RGDペプチドを固相化すると細胞 接着活性を示すことから、本発明における生体分子は、化学合成した RGD分子であ つてもよい。そのような RGD分子としては、上述の天然に存在する分子のほかに、例 えば、 GRGDSPペプチドが挙げられるがそれに限定されない。 RGD配列は細胞接 着分子(かつ、レセプターでもある)であるインテグリン (例えば、フイブロネクチンのレ セプター)によって認識されることから、 RGDの機能的に等価な分子は、そのようなィ ンテグリンを用いて相互作用を調べることによって同定することができる。 [0114] As used herein, the term "RGD molecule" refers to a protein molecule containing the amino acid sequence RGD (Arg-Gly-Asp) or a functionally identical sequence thereof. The RGD molecule is characterized by containing RGD, which is an amino acid sequence useful as an amino acid sequence of a cell adhesion active site of a cell adhesion protein, or another amino acid sequence which is functionally equivalent. The RGD sequence was discovered as a cell adhesion site of fibronectin, and was later found on a number of molecules exhibiting cell adhesion activities, such as type I collagen, laminin, vitronectin, fibrinogen, von Willebrand factor, and entactin. Since the chemically synthesized RGD peptide exhibits cell adhesion activity when immobilized on a solid phase, the biomolecule in the present invention may be a chemically synthesized RGD molecule. Such RGD molecules include, but are not limited to, for example, the GRGDSP peptide, in addition to the naturally occurring molecules described above. Since the RGD sequence is recognized by integrin (eg, the receptor for fibronectin), which is a cell-adhesive molecule (and also a receptor), a functionally equivalent molecule of RGD may use such an integrin. It can be identified by examining the interaction.
[0115] 本明細書において、「インテグリン」とは、細胞接着に関与するレセプターである膜 貫通糖タンパク質をいう。インテグリンは、細胞表面に存在し、細胞が細胞外マトリック スに接着するときに機能する。血球系などでは細胞どうしの接着にも関与することが 知られている。そのようなインテグリンとしては、例えば、フイブロネクチン、ビトロネクチ ン、コラーゲンなどのレセプター、血小板の lib/Ilia,マクロファージの Mac— 1,リ ンパ球の LFA—l, VLA—1〜6,ショウジヨウバエの PSAなどが挙げられるがそれ に限定されない。通常、インテグリンは,分子量 130kDa〜210kDaの α鎖と分子量 95kDa〜130kDaの j8鎖と力 非共有結合で 1対 1に会合したヘテロ二量体の構造 をと 。 α鎖とし一しは、 f列? Jよ、 Q; 、 Q; 、 Q; 、 Q; 、 Q; 、 Q; 、 Q; '、 Q; 、 α 、 α 、 α v、 α Εなどがあるがそれに限定されない。 j8鎖としては、例えば j8 、 β 、 β 、 β 、 [0115] As used herein, "integrin" refers to a transmembrane glycoprotein that is a receptor involved in cell adhesion. Integrins are present on the cell surface and function when cells adhere to the extracellular matrix. It is known that it is involved in cell-cell adhesion in blood cell systems. Such integrins include, for example, fibronectin, vitronectin Receptor, such as protein and collagen, platelet lib / Ilia, macrophage Mac-1, lymphocyte LFA-1 and VLA-1-6, and Drosophila PSA, but are not limited thereto. Integrin usually has a heterodimer structure in which a α chain having a molecular weight of 130 to 210 kDa and a j8 chain having a molecular weight of 95 to 130 kDa are non-covalently and one-to-one associated with a j8 chain. Is it an α chain and f row? J, Q;, Q;, Q;, Q;, Q;, Q;, Q; ', Q;, α, α, αv , α α, and the like, but are not limited thereto. As the j8 chain, for example, j8, β, β, β,
1 2 3 4 β 、 β 、 β などがあるがそれに限定されない。 1234 β, β, β, and the like, but are not limited thereto.
5 6 7 5 6 7
[0116] このようなヘテロ二量体としては、例えば、 GpIIblllaのほかに、 VLA—1、 VLA— 2、 VLA— 3、 VLA— 4、 VLA— 5、 VLA— 6、 CD51/CD29, LFA— 1、 Mac— 1 、 pl50, 90、ビトロネクチンレセプター、 j8 4サブファミリー、 j8 5サブファミリー、 j8 6サ ブファミリー、 LPAM—1、 HML— 1などがあるがそれに限定されない。通常、 α鎖 の細胞外ドメインに二価カチオン結合部位があり、 β鎖の細胞外ドメインにシスティン リッチ領域があり、 β鎖の細胞内ドメインにチロシンリン酸ィ匕部位があることが多い。 結合リガンド中の認識部位は RGD配列であることが多い。従って、インテグリンは、 R GD分子であり得る。 [0116] Examples of such a heterodimer include, in addition to GpIIbllla, VLA-1, VLA-2, VLA-3, VLA-4, VLA-5, VLA-6, CD51 / CD29, LFA- 1, Mac- 1, pl50, 90 , vitronectin receptor, j8 4 subfamilies, j8 5 subfamily, j8 6 sub family, LPAM-1, HML- but are not limited to such 1. Usually, the extracellular domain of the α chain has a divalent cation binding site, the extracellular domain of the β chain has a cysteine-rich region, and the intracellular domain of the β chain has a tyrosine phosphorylation site in many cases. The recognition site in the binding ligand is often an RGD sequence. Thus, an integrin may be an RGD molecule.
[0117] (詳細な説明) [0117] (Detailed description)
以下に好ましい実施形態の説明を記載するが、この実施形態は本発明の例示であ り、本発明の範囲はそのような好ましい実施形態に限定されないことが理解されるべ きである。 The description of the preferred embodiments is set forth below, but it should be understood that these embodiments are exemplary of the present invention and that the scope of the present invention is not limited to such preferred embodiments.
[0118] 1つの局面において、本発明は、 VVXGL (配列番号 1)という配列を含み、 Xは芳 香族アミノ酸の改変体である、ペプチドを提供する。 [0118] In one aspect, the present invention provides a peptide comprising the sequence VVXGL (SEQ ID NO: 1), wherein X is a variant of an aromatic amino acid.
[0119] 別の局面において、本発明は、 VVXGLという配列を含み、ここで Xは芳香族ァミノ 酸の改変体である、ペプチドを含む、血管新生のための組成物を提供する。 [0119] In another aspect, the present invention provides a composition for angiogenesis, comprising a peptide comprising the sequence VVXGL, wherein X is a variant of an aromatic amino acid.
[0120] 別の局面において、本発明は、 VVXGLという配列を含み、ここで Xは芳香族ァミノ 酸の改変体である、ペプチドを含む、血管ネットワーク形成のための組成物を提供す る。 [0120] In another aspect, the present invention provides a composition for forming a vascular network, comprising a peptide comprising the sequence VVXGL, wherein X is a variant of an aromatic amino acid.
[0121] 本発明のペプチド、本発明の血管新生のための組成物および血管ネットワーク形 成のための組成物において、 Xは、側鎖に芳香環を有するアミノ酸またはその改変体 であることが有利である。このように、側鎖を改変することによって、血管新生能およ び血管ネットワークを形成する能力が亢進されたことは、本発明において初めて見出 された。従って、本発明は、上記ペプチドを含む、血管新生剤および血管ネットヮー クを形成するための組成物(血管ネットワーク形成剤とも ヽぅ)を提供する。この配列 は、配列番号 2に含まれるペンタペプチド WYGLに基づ!/、て設計されたものであり 、 WYGL以外の改変体であれば、本発明の範囲内にあり得ることは当業者には明 らかである。 [0121] In the peptide of the present invention, the composition for angiogenesis and the composition for forming a vascular network of the present invention, X represents an amino acid having an aromatic ring in a side chain or a variant thereof. Advantageously, Thus, it was found for the first time in the present invention that the angiogenesis ability and the ability to form a vascular network were enhanced by modifying the side chain. Accordingly, the present invention provides an angiogenic agent and a composition for forming a vascular network (also referred to as a vascular network forming agent), comprising the above-mentioned peptide. This sequence was designed based on the pentapeptide WYGL contained in SEQ ID NO: 2, and it is known to those skilled in the art that any variant other than WYGL may be within the scope of the present invention. it is obvious.
[0122] 好ましい実施形態では、上記 Xは、フエ二ルァラニンまたはチロシンの改変体である 。この血管新生剤は、天然に存在するとき、 Xにおいてチロシンを有する。従って、天 然のアミノ酸である、フエ-ルァラニンまたはチロシンの改変体であることが有利であ る。チロシンの側鎖フエ-ル基において改変を加えることは、 Xにチロシン、およびそ の改変体とも見ることができるフエ二ルァラニンを有するペプチドの血管新生活性が 強力つたことが本発明において実証されたことに基づく。本発明においては、 Xにチ 口シン、およびその改変体とも見ることができるフエ-ルァラニンを有するペプチドの 血管ネットワーク形成活性もまた、強力つたことが本発明において実証された。従って 、同様の改変を本発明のペプチドに加えることによって、血管新生活性および血管 ネットワーク形成活性の両方が亢進され得ることが理解される。 [0122] In a preferred embodiment, X is a modified form of phenylalanine or tyrosine. This angiogenic agent, when naturally occurring, has a tyrosine at X. Therefore, it is advantageous to be a variant of the natural amino acids phenalanine or tyrosine. In the present invention, it was demonstrated that the modification of tyrosine in the side chain fuel group has a strong angiogenic activity of a peptide having tyrosine in X and feniralanine which can also be seen as a variant thereof. Based on that. In the present invention, it has been demonstrated in the present invention that the vascular network-forming activity of the peptide having phenalanine, which can also be regarded as a cysteine in X and a variant thereof, was also strong. Therefore, it is understood that by making similar modifications to the peptide of the present invention, both the angiogenic activity and the vascular network forming activity can be enhanced.
[0123] ここで、血管新生能は、血管新生数によって示すことができる。本明細書にお!、て 定義されるように、血管新生能は、スコア付けによって評価することができ、本発明の ペプチドまたはその改変体は、少なくともスコア 3を有し、好ましくは、スコア 3. 5を有 し、より好ましくは、スコア 4を有し、さらに好ましくは、スコア 4. 5を有する。 [0123] Here, the angiogenesis ability can be indicated by the number of angiogenesis. In this specification! As defined, the angiogenic potential can be assessed by scoring, wherein the peptide of the invention or a variant thereof has a score of at least 3, preferably a score of 3.5, More preferably, it has a score of 4, and even more preferably has a score of 4.5.
[0124] ここで、血管ネットワーク形成能は、血管ネットワーク形成能インデックスによって示 すことができる。本発明のペプチドが有する血管ネットワーク形成能は、少なくとも 5で あり、好ましくは少なくとも 7であり、より好ましくは少なくとも 8であり、より好ましくは少 なくとも 9であり、より好ましくは少なくとも 10であり、より好ましくは少なくとも 11であり、 より好ましくは少なくとも 12であり、より好ましくは少なくとも 13であり、より好ましくは少 なくとも 14であり、より好ましくは少なくとも 15であり得る。このような数値は、血管ネッ トワーク形成能インデックスは、実際に例えば、 8以上程度ある場合に、すでに顕著 に網状の血管が形成されている様子が実質的に常に観察されることからも明らかで あるといえる。 [0124] Here, the vascular network forming ability can be indicated by a vascular network forming ability index. The ability of the peptide of the invention to form a vascular network is at least 5, preferably at least 7, more preferably at least 8, more preferably at least 9, more preferably at least 10, More preferably at least 11, more preferably at least 12, more preferably at least 13, more preferably at least 14, more preferably at least 15. Such a value is already remarkable when the vascular network forming ability index is actually, for example, about 8 or more. It is clear from the fact that the appearance of a reticulated blood vessel is observed almost always.
[0125] 1つの実施形態において、本発明のペプチドは、上記特定の配列を含み、血管新 生能および Z血管ネットワーク形成能を有する限り、外来配列を含んでいてもよいこ とが理解される。 [0125] In one embodiment, it is understood that the peptide of the present invention may contain an exogenous sequence as long as it contains the above specific sequence and has a vascular potential and a Z vascular network forming ability.
[0126] 好ましい実施形態では、本発明のペプチドは、該芳香族アミノ酸の側鎖のパラ位、 オルト位またはメタ位が電子吸引性の置換基で置換されるペプチドであり得る。 [0126] In a preferred embodiment, the peptide of the present invention may be a peptide in which the para, ortho, or meta position of the side chain of the aromatic amino acid is substituted with an electron-withdrawing substituent.
[0127] 別の好ましい実施形態では、本発明のペプチドにおける Xは、芳香族アミノ酸の芳 族基が疎水性基で置換される置換基であり得る。チロシンの水酸基に代えて、疎水 性基 (例えば、メチル基のようなアルキル基)を有することによって、血管新生能およ び血管ネットワーク形成能が亢進される。従って、本発明は、任意の疎水性基が、特 に、チロシンの水酸基に代えてパラ位に置換されていることが有利であり得る。ここで 、疎水性基は、疎水性指数を上昇させることが好ましぐより好ましくは、 0. 5上昇さ せ、さらに好ましくは、 1. 0上昇させ、皿により好ましくは 1. 5または 2. 0上昇させるも のであることが有利である。このような疎水性基としては、例えば、アルキル基などが あり得るがそれらに限定されないことが理解される。 1つの好ましいそのような疎水性 基としては、例えば、アルキル基または置換されたアルキル基などを挙げることができ るがそれらに限定されない。さらに好ましくは、このような疎水性基は、 C1〜C6アル キル基であり、さらにより好ましくは C1〜C3アルキル基であり、 1つの好ましい実施形 態では、メチル基であり得る。 [0127] In another preferred embodiment, X in the peptide of the present invention may be a substituent in which an aromatic group of an aromatic amino acid is substituted with a hydrophobic group. By having a hydrophobic group (for example, an alkyl group such as a methyl group) instead of the hydroxyl group of tyrosine, the angiogenesis ability and the vascular network formation ability are enhanced. Thus, the present invention may advantageously have any hydrophobic group substituted, especially in the para position, instead of the hydroxyl group of tyrosine. Here, the hydrophobic group preferably increases the hydrophobicity index more preferably by 0.5, more preferably by 1.0, and more preferably by 1.5 or 2. Advantageously, it should be raised by zero. It is understood that such a hydrophobic group can be, for example, an alkyl group, but is not limited thereto. One preferred such hydrophobic group can include, but is not limited to, for example, an alkyl group or a substituted alkyl group. Even more preferably, such hydrophobic groups are C1-C6 alkyl groups, even more preferably C1-C3 alkyl groups, and in one preferred embodiment may be methyl groups.
[0128] 好ま 、実施形態にぉ 、て、上記疎水性基 (例えば、アルキル基)は、芳香族基の ノ ラ基で置換され得る。 [0128] Preferably, in the embodiment, the hydrophobic group (eg, an alkyl group) can be substituted with a nora group of an aromatic group.
[0129] 好ま 、実施形態にぉ 、て、芳香族側鎖は、フエニル基であることが好ま 、がそ れに限定されず、トリブトファンの側鎖なども好ま 、別の例として挙げることが理解さ れる。 [0129] Preferably, in the embodiment, the aromatic side chain is preferably a phenyl group, but is not limited thereto. It is understood that another example is also preferable, such as a side chain of tributophan. Is done.
[0130] 本発明のペプチドのアミノ酸配列は、さらに、アミノ酸配列 X -X -X -X -X [0130] The amino acid sequence of the peptide of the present invention further comprises an amino acid sequence X -X -X -X -X
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
X -X (ここで、 X =セリン(S)、スレオニン (T)またはその改変体であるか存在しなX -X (where X = serine (S), threonine (T) or a variant thereof or not present
6 7 1 6 7 1
V、か、 X =バリン (V)、ァラニン (A)、グリシン(G)、ロイシン (L)、イソロイシン (I)また はその改変体であり、 X =バリン (V)、ァラニン (A)、グリシン (G)、ロイシン (L)、イソ V, or X = valine (V), alanine (A), glycine (G), leucine (L), isoleucine (I) or Are variants thereof, where X = valine (V), alanine (A), glycine (G), leucine (L),
3 Three
ロイシン (I)またはその改変体であり、 X =側鎖に芳香環を有するアミノ酸またはその X is an amino acid having an aromatic ring in the side chain or a leucine (I) or a variant thereof,
4 Four
改変体であり、 X =グリシン (G)またはその改変体であり、 X =口イシン (L)、ァラ二 X = glycine (G) or a variant thereof, X = oral isin (L), arani
5 6 5 6
ン (A)、グリシン (G)、 ノ リン (V)、イソロイシン (I)またはその改変体であり、 X =アル ギニン (R)、リジン (K)またはその改変体であるであるか存在しな 、か)で示されるァ ミノ酸配列を含むペプチドまたはその改変体であってもよい。 (A), glycine (G), norin (V), isoleucine (I) or a variant thereof, and X = arginine (R), lysine (K) or a variant thereof. However, the peptide may be a peptide containing the amino acid sequence represented by the above or a variant thereof.
[0131] 1つの好ましい実施形態において、 Xは、セリンまたはその改変体であり、さらに好 ましくは、 Xは、セリンである。 [0131] In one preferred embodiment, X is serine or a variant thereof, and more preferably, X is serine.
[0132] 別の好ましい実施形態において、 Xは、パリンまたはその改変体であり、さらに好ま [0132] In another preferred embodiment, X is palin or a variant thereof, more preferably
2 2
しくは、 Xは、ノ リンである。 Or, X is Norin.
2 2
[0133] 別の好ましい実施形態において、 Xは、パリンまたはその改変体であり、さらに好ま [0133] In another preferred embodiment, X is palin or a variant thereof, more preferably
3 Three
しくは、 Xは、ノ リンである。 Or, X is Norin.
3 Three
[0134] 別の好ましい実施形態において、前記 Xについては、上記 Xと同様に側鎖に特定 の改変を有すべきことが理解される。 [0134] In another preferred embodiment, it is understood that the above X should have a specific modification in the side chain similarly to the above X.
[0135] 別の好ましい実施形態において、 Xは、グリシンまたはその改変体であり、さらに好 [0135] In another preferred embodiment, X is glycine or a variant thereof, more preferably
5 Five
ましい実施形態では、 Xは、グリシンである。 In a preferred embodiment, X is glycine.
5 Five
[0136] 別の好ましい実施形態において、 Xは、ロイシンまたはその改変体であり、さらに好 [0136] In another preferred embodiment, X is leucine or a variant thereof, more preferably
6 6
ましい実施形態では、 Xは、ロイシンである。 In a preferred embodiment, X is leucine.
6 6
[0137] 別の好ま 、実施形態にぉ 、て、 Xは、アルギニンまたはその改変体であり、さら に好ましい実施形態では、 Xは、アルギニンである。 [0137] In another preferred embodiment, X is arginine or a variant thereof, and in a more preferred embodiment, X is arginine.
[0138] 従って、本発明のペプチドは、上記 X 〜Xの好ま 、実施形態の組み合わせの配 列を有してもょ ヽことが理解される。 [0138] Therefore, it is understood that the peptide of the present invention may have a sequence of the combination of the above X to X, preferably of the embodiment.
[0139] 一般に、生理活性を有するペプチドにおいて、そのアミノ酸配列のうち、 1もしくは 複数のアミノ酸が置換しもしくは欠失し、もしくは該ァミノ配列に 1もしくは複数のァミノ 酸が挿入されもしくは付加された場合であっても、該生理活性が維持されることがあ ることは周知である。従って、配列番号 1に示されるアミノ酸配列において、 1個〜 3個 のアミノ酸が置換し、もしくは一方もしくは両方の端部に位置する 1個もしくは 2個のァ ミノ酸が欠失し、もしくは前記アミノ酸配列の一方もしくは両方の端部に他のアミノ酸 配列が付加されたアミノ酸配列を有するペプチド (以下、便宜的に「ペプチド改変体」 と呼ぶことがある)であって血管新生作用および Zまたは血管ネットワーク形成作用 を有するペプチドも本発明の範囲に含まれる。本発明のペプチド改変体は、上記芳 香族アミノ酸の側鎖における改変にカ卩えて、他のアミノ酸配列において天然のァミノ 酸をィ匕学修飾 (例えば、アミノ酸の側鎖にアルキル基、ニトロ基、ハロゲンを導入する 等)して得られるアミノ酸を含むペプチドも包含される。また、このようなアミノ酸は、 D 型アミノ酸であってもよい。 WXGLのアミノ酸配列の N末端または C末端の 1アミノ酸 を欠失したアミノ酸配列を有するペプチドは、 VVXGLで示されるアミノ酸配列を有す るペプチドと同程度の血管新生効果および Zまたは血管ネットワーク形成効果を発 揮し得るものであり、本発明の範囲内に入り得ることが理解される。従来、 WXGL〖こ お!、て、 Xが天然型であるチロシンをァラニンに置換したペプチドでは血管新生作用 が失われたので、このチロシン残基は変更しない方がよいと考えられていた力 予想 外に、特に、疎水性基を用いて改変した方が強い効果が見出された。従って、このよ うな効果は、本発明によって初めて達成された効果であると 、える。 In general, in a peptide having a physiological activity, when one or more amino acids in the amino acid sequence are substituted or deleted, or one or more amino acids are inserted or added to the amino sequence. Even so, it is well known that the physiological activity may be maintained. Therefore, in the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1, one to three amino acids are substituted, or one or two amino acids located at one or both ends are deleted, or the amino acid Other amino acids at one or both ends of the sequence Peptides having an amino acid sequence to which a sequence is added (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “peptide variants” for convenience) and having an angiogenic action and a Z or vascular network forming action are also included in the scope of the present invention. It is. The modified peptide of the present invention can be modified by modifying the side chain of the aromatic amino acid with a natural amino acid in another amino acid sequence (for example, an alkyl group or a nitro group on the side chain of the amino acid). , Introduction of halogen, etc.). Further, such an amino acid may be a D-type amino acid. A peptide having an amino acid sequence in which one amino acid at the N-terminus or C-terminus of the amino acid sequence of WXGL has been deleted has an angiogenesis effect and a Z- or vascular network-forming effect comparable to those of the peptide having the amino acid sequence represented by VVXGL. It is understood that they can be activated and fall within the scope of the present invention. In the past, WXGL Pico !, a peptide in which X was substituted for natural tyrosine by alanine lost the angiogenic effect, so it was thought that it would be better not to change this tyrosine residue. In addition, a stronger effect was found, especially when modified with a hydrophobic group. Therefore, such an effect is considered to be an effect achieved for the first time by the present invention.
[0140] 別の好ま 、実施形態では、本発明のペプチド改変体のうち、好ま 、ものとして、 VVXGLに示すアミノ酸配列において、 X以外の配列において、 1個もしくは 2個のァ ミノ酸が置換し、もしくは一方もしくは両方の端部に位置する 1個のアミノ酸が欠失し、 もしくは前記アミノ酸配列の一方もしくは両方の端部に他のアミノ酸配列が付加され たアミノ酸配列を有するペプチドであって、血管新生作用および Zまたは血管ネット ワーク形成作用を有するペプチドが提供され得る。なお、「側鎖に芳香環を有するァ ミノ酸」においては、芳香環、好ましくはフエ-ル基上に置換する置換基の数は、 1〜 5個であり、 1〜3個が好ましい。本発明のペプチドにおいて、芳香環は好ましくはべ ンゼン環またはベンゼン環を含むナフタレン環のような縮合環(トリブトファン側鎖のよ うな複素環でもよ 、)であり、特に好ましくはフ -ル基である。 [0140] In another preferred embodiment, among the peptide variants of the present invention, in the amino acid sequence shown in VVXGL, one or two amino acids are substituted in the sequence other than X in the amino acid sequence shown in VVXGL. Or a peptide having an amino acid sequence in which one amino acid located at one or both ends is deleted, or another amino acid sequence is added at one or both ends of the amino acid sequence, Peptides having a neoplastic and Z or vascular network forming effect may be provided. In the “amino acid having an aromatic ring in the side chain”, the number of substituents on the aromatic ring, preferably on the phenol group, is 1 to 5, and preferably 1 to 3. In the peptide of the present invention, the aromatic ring is preferably a condensed ring such as a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring containing a benzene ring (may be a heterocyclic ring such as a tributophan side chain), and particularly preferably a fluor group. is there.
[0141] 従って、本発明に用いられるペプチドのサイズの上限は何ら限定されるものではな いが、あまりに大きいと製造が困難となり、取り扱いが不便であり、また、単位重量当 たりの血管新生活性が減少すると考えられるので、ペプチドの総アミノ酸数は、通常 、 4〜350、好ましくは 4〜50、さらに好ましくは 5〜20、さらに好ましくは 5〜10であり 、さらに好ましくは 6〜 10である。また X—X—X—X—X—X—Xに示すアミノ [0141] Accordingly, the upper limit of the size of the peptide used in the present invention is not limited at all. However, if it is too large, production becomes difficult, handling is inconvenient, and vascular new life per unit weight is required. Therefore, the total number of amino acids of the peptide is usually 4 to 350, preferably 4 to 50, more preferably 5 to 20, and more preferably 5 to 10 And more preferably 6 to 10. Amino shown in X—X—X—X—X—X—X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
酸配列または該アミノ酸配列の一方もしくは両方の端部にそれぞれ 10個以下のアミ ノ酸が付加されたペプチドも好まし ヽ。 Preference is also given to peptides in which not more than 10 amino acids have been added to the acid sequence or to one or both ends of the amino acid sequence, respectively.
[0142] なお、本発明のペプチドが血管新生作用および Zまたは血管ネットワーク形成作 用を有するか否かは、下記実施例に具体的に示すように、ペプチド溶液を充填した マイクロセルをマウスの背部に埋め込み、埋め込んだ周囲の組織内の毛細血管の形 成状況を観察することにより調べることができる。 [0142] Whether the peptide of the present invention has an angiogenic action and an action of forming a Z or vascular network was determined by specifically ascertaining whether or not a microcell filled with a peptide solution was placed on the back of a mouse as shown in the Examples below. It can be examined by observing the state of formation of capillaries in the tissue surrounding the implanted tissue.
[0143] 本発明のペプチドまたは改変体は、手動あるいは市販のペプチド合成機を用いる 常法により容易に合成することができる。また、サイズの大きなペプチドは、常法によ り、遺伝子工学的に製造した後、側鎖を改変するか、遺伝子工学手法を改変して、 改変 tRNAを用いる方法(Taki M. et al. , FEBS Lett. 507, 35— 38、 2001 ; Hohsaka T. et al. , J. Am. Chem. Soc, 121, 34— 40, 1999 ;および Hohsa ka T. et al. , J. Am. Chem. Soc, 118, 9778— 9779, 1996)を利用して合成 することができる。 [0143] The peptide or variant of the present invention can be easily synthesized manually or by a conventional method using a commercially available peptide synthesizer. In addition, a large-sized peptide is produced by a conventional method using genetic engineering, then modifying the side chain or modifying the genetic engineering technique to use a modified tRNA (Taki M. et al., FEBS Lett. 507, 35-38, 2001; Hohsaka T. et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc, 121, 34-40, 1999; and Hohsa ka T. et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. , 118, 9778—9779, 1996).
[0144] 本発明に用いられるペプチドは、天然のタンパク質を構成するアミノ酸を元に設計 されているものであり、生体内ではぺプチダーゼの作用を受けてやがてはアミノ酸に 分解されるものであるので、安全性が高い。実際、下記実施例で行った、マウスを用 いた in vivoの実験において、毒性は全く観察されなかた。このことは、薬効を発揮 する使用量にぉ 、て、毒性が認められな力つたことを示して!/、る。 [0144] The peptide used in the present invention is designed based on amino acids that constitute a natural protein, and is degraded to amino acids by the action of peptidase in vivo. High safety. In fact, no toxicity was observed in in vivo experiments using mice performed in the following examples. This indicates that the amount of use that exerts its medicinal effect is not so toxic, and that it has been used! /
[0145] 好ましい実施形態では、本発明の血管新生剤および血管ネットワーク形成剤が対 象とするのは、毛細管であり得る。毛細管は網状にネットワーク化されることによって、 天然に有する正常な生理活性を有することができるからである。本発明は、血管新生 作用および Zまたは血管ネットワーク形成能が亢進されたィ匕合物を初めて提供する ことによって、従来のよう血管新生剤では成し遂げられな力つた治療効果、安定化効 果、予防効果を発揮することができるようになった。 [0145] In a preferred embodiment, the angiogenic agent and the vascular network forming agent of the present invention may be targeted to capillaries. This is because the capillaries can have the normal physiological activity that they have naturally by being networked in a network. The present invention provides, for the first time, a conjugate having enhanced angiogenic activity and Z or vascular network forming ability, thereby achieving a powerful therapeutic effect, stabilizing effect, and prevention that could not be achieved by conventional angiogenic agents. The effect can be demonstrated.
[0146] また、ペプチドをキャリアに結合し、ペプチドが結合されたキャリアを生体に埋め込 むことにより血管新生を促進することもできる。これはキャリアに固定ィ匕している為に 必要な部位に選択的に作用させることができ、新たな DDS (ドラッグデリバリーシステ ム)としての可能性に富んでいる。生体材料移植部に本発明の血管新生剤を、塗布 、噴霧等の方法により局所投与することにより、血管新生が促進され、術後の治癒が 促進される。ここで、キャリアとしては、特に限定されるものではなぐ代用骨、代用歯 、人工臓器等に用いられる榭脂、タンパク質等の生体高分子を挙げることができる。 榭脂に上記ペプチドを結合することにより、該榭脂を生体に埋め込んだ際に、榭脂と 接する周辺組織中での血管新生が促進され、榭脂の生体との親和性がより向上する 。また、より好ましい態様として、タンパク質 (本明細書において、キャリアとして使用さ れる場合、特に断りがない限り「タンパク質」という語は、糖タンパク質およびリンタン パク質等のタンパク質含有複合体を包含する)をキャリアとして用いるができる。 [0146] Angiogenesis can also be promoted by binding the peptide to a carrier and implanting the carrier with the peptide bound into a living body. This can selectively act on the necessary parts because it is fixed to the carrier, and a new DDS (drug delivery system) M) as a potential. Local administration of the angiogenesis agent of the present invention to a biomaterial implanted portion by application, spraying or the like promotes angiogenesis and promotes postoperative healing. Here, examples of the carrier include, but are not particularly limited to, biomacromolecules such as fats and proteins used for bone substitutes, tooth substitutes, and artificial organs. By bonding the peptide to the resin, when the resin is implanted in a living body, angiogenesis in peripheral tissues in contact with the resin is promoted, and the affinity of the resin with the living body is further improved. In a more preferred embodiment, a protein (in the present specification, when used as a carrier, unless otherwise specified, the term "protein" includes a protein-containing complex such as a glycoprotein and a phosphoprotein). Can be used as a carrier.
[0147] ここで、キャリアとして用いるタンパク質は、生体適合性を有する 、ずれのタンパク 質であってもよぐとりわけ、生体組織との接合を良好にするために、細胞接着性タン ノ ク質であることが好ましい。細胞接着性タンパク質の好ましい例として、コラーゲン( ゼラチン)、フイブロネクチン、ビトロネクチンおよびラミニン等ならびにこれらの部分カロ 水分解物を挙げることができるがこれらに限定されるものではない。なお、これらのタ ンパク質は、アレルゲンを除去した精製タンパク質であること力 アレルギー反応の防 止の観点力も好ましい。例えば、コラーゲンとしては、動物由来のコラーゲンが種々 市販されているが、これらは純度が低ぐアレルゲンが含まれており、品質の再現性も 劣るので臨床用途に適用することは好ましくない。動物由来のコラーゲンを部分加水 分解し、アレルゲンを除去したゼラチンが臨床用途のために市販されているので、こ のような精製されたコラーゲンまたはその部分加水分解物を用いることが好ましい。 [0147] Here, the protein used as a carrier may be a biocompatible, non-uniform protein, and in particular, a cell-adhesive protein in order to improve bonding with a biological tissue. Preferably, there is. Preferred examples of the cell adhesion protein include, but are not limited to, collagen (gelatin), fibronectin, vitronectin, laminin, and the like, and partial hydrolyzate thereof. In addition, these proteins are preferably purified proteins from which allergens have been removed, and are also preferable in terms of preventing allergic reactions. For example, various collagens derived from animals are commercially available as collagen. However, these contain allergens with low purity and are poor in reproducibility of quality, so that it is not preferable to apply them to clinical use. Since gelatin obtained by partially hydrolyzing animal-derived collagen and removing allergens is commercially available for clinical use, it is preferable to use such purified collagen or a partially hydrolyzed product thereof.
[0148] キャリアに結合されるペプチドの量は、特に限定されず、適宜選択することができる 力 通常、キャリアとペプチドとの重量比率 (キャリア:ペプチド)が 100 : 1〜1 : 1程度 であり、好ましくは20 : 1〜5 : 1程度でぁる。 [0148] The amount of the peptide bound to the carrier is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected. Usually, the weight ratio of the carrier to the peptide (carrier: peptide) is about 100: 1 to 1: 1. And preferably about 20: 1 to 5: 1.
[0149] キャリアとペプチドとの結合は、共有結合によることが好ましい。結合は、例えばべ プチドの N末端のァミノ基と、キャリア中の任意のアミノ基をダルタルアルデヒド等の結 合架橋剤を用いて結合することにより容易に行うことができ、下記実施例に詳細な結 合方法の一例が記載されている。また、人工臓器等の樹脂に結合する場合には、こ の榭脂中に、アミノ基等の、ペプチドとの結合に用いることができる基を含むモノマー を共重合させておき、当該アミノ基等とペプチドの N末端のアミノ基を結合することが できる。また、配列番号 1に示されるアミノ酸配列を有するペプチドまたはその一部の アミノ酸が置換もしくは欠失した、血管新生作用を有するペプチド改変体の一端また は両端に、任意のアミノ酸配列を有する他のペプチドを結合したものを採用し、この 任意のペプチドをキャリアとの結合に供することも好ましい。 [0149] The bond between the carrier and the peptide is preferably a covalent bond. Bonding can be easily carried out, for example, by bonding the amino group at the N-terminus of the peptide to any amino group in the carrier using a bonding cross-linking agent such as dartalaldehyde. An example of a suitable bonding method is described. In the case of binding to a resin such as an artificial organ, a monomer containing a group that can be used for binding to a peptide, such as an amino group, is contained in the resin. Can be previously copolymerized, and the amino group or the like can be bonded to the N-terminal amino group of the peptide. Another peptide having an arbitrary amino acid sequence at one or both ends of a peptide having the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1 or a peptide variant having an angiogenic action, in which a part of the amino acids is substituted or deleted. It is also preferable to employ a compound in which this arbitrary peptide is bound to a carrier.
[0150] ペプチドを結合したキャリアは、塗布文は噴霧する他にそのままで生体内に埋め込 むことができる。キャリアとして、細胞接着性タンパク質を採用した場合には、ペプチド 結合キャリアは、縫合糸、各種整形手術材料、傷口の癒着促進剤等として単独または 他の薬効成分とともに用いることができる。また、ペプチドを結合したキャリアタンパク 質を、炭酸アパタイトや、本発明のペプチドを結合していない細胞接着性タンパク質 等の他の材料と混合したものを代用骨等として用いることができる。この場合、代用骨 等の最終の生体材料中に含まれるペプチドの量は、特に限定されないが、通常、生 体材料 lOOg当たり、 0. 1〜: LOmg程度である。 [0150] The carrier to which the peptide is bound can be embedded in a living body as it is, in addition to spraying the coated text. When a cell-adhesive protein is employed as the carrier, the peptide-bound carrier can be used alone or in combination with other medicinal ingredients as a suture, various orthopedic materials, a wound adhesion promoter, and the like. Further, a mixture of the carrier protein bound with the peptide and other materials such as carbonate apatite or the cell adhesive protein not bound with the peptide of the present invention can be used as a bone substitute or the like. In this case, although the amount of the peptide contained in the final biomaterial such as bone substitute is not particularly limited, it is usually about 0.1 to: LOmg per 100 g of biomaterial.
[0151] 本明細書において使用されるキャリアは、薬学的に受容可能であることが好ましぐ そのようなキャリアとしては、抗酸化剤、保存剤、着色料、風味料、および希釈剤、乳 ィ匕剤、懸濁化剤、溶媒、フィラー、増量剤、緩衝剤、送達ビヒクル、希釈剤、賦形剤お よび Zまたは薬学的アジュバントが挙げられるがそれらに限定されない。代表的には 、本発明の医薬は、本発明のペプチド、またはその改変体もしくは誘導体を、 1っ以 上の生理的に受容可能なキャリア、賦形剤または希釈剤とともに含む組成物の形態 で投与される。例えば、適切なビヒクルは、注射用水、生理的溶液、または人工脳脊 髄液であり得、これらには、非経口送達のための組成物に一般的な他の物質を補充 することが可能である。 [0151] The carriers used herein are preferably pharmaceutically acceptable, such as antioxidants, preservatives, coloring agents, flavorings, and diluents, milk匕 includes, but is not limited to, narcotics, suspending agents, solvents, fillers, bulking agents, buffers, delivery vehicles, diluents, excipients and Z or pharmaceutical adjuvants. Typically, the medicament of the invention will be in the form of a composition comprising a peptide of the invention, or a variant or derivative thereof, together with one or more physiologically acceptable carriers, excipients or diluents. Is administered. For example, suitable vehicles may be water for injection, physiological solutions, or artificial cerebrospinal fluid, which may be supplemented with other materials common in compositions for parenteral delivery. is there.
[0152] 本明細書で使用される受容可能なキャリア、賦形剤または安定化剤は、レシピエン トに対して非毒性であり、そして好ましくは、使用される投薬量および濃度において不 活性であり、例えば、リン酸塩、クェン酸塩、または他の有機酸;ァスコルビン酸、 a —トコフエロール;低分子量ポリペプチド;タンパク質 (例えば、血清アルブミン、ゼラ チンまたは免疫グロブリン);親水性ポリマー(例えば、ポリビュルピロリドン);アミノ酸( 例えば、グリシン、グルタミン、ァスパラギン、アルギニンまたはリジン);モノサッカリド、 ジサッカリドおよび他の炭水化物(グルコース、マンノース、またはデキストリンを含む) ;キレート剤(例えば、 EDTA);糖アルコール(例えば、マン-トールまたはソルビトー ル);塩形成対イオン (例えば、ナトリウム);ならびに Zあるいは非イオン性表面活性 化剤(例えば、 Tween、プル口ニック(pluronic)またはポリエチレングリコール(PEG ) )などが挙げられるがそれらに限定されな 、。 [0152] As used herein, an acceptable carrier, excipient or stabilizer is non-toxic to the recipient, and preferably inert at the dosages and concentrations employed. E.g., phosphates, citrates or other organic acids; ascorbic acid, a-tocopherol; low molecular weight polypeptides; proteins (e.g., serum albumin, gelatin or immunoglobulins); hydrophilic polymers (e.g. Amino acids (eg, glycine, glutamine, asparagine, arginine or lysine); monosaccharides; Disaccharides and other carbohydrates (including glucose, mannose or dextrin); chelating agents (eg, EDTA); sugar alcohols (eg, mannitol or sorbitol); salt-forming counterions (eg, sodium); Non-ionic surface activators (eg, Tween, pluronic or polyethylene glycol (PEG)) and the like, but are not limited thereto.
[0153] さらなる例示の適切なキャリアとしては、中性緩衝化生理食塩水、または血清アル ブミンと混合された生理食塩水が挙げられる。好ましくは、その生成物は、適切な賦 形剤(例えば、スクロース)を用いて凍結乾燥剤として処方される。他の標準的なキヤ リア、希釈剤および賦形剤は所望に応じて含まれ得る。他の例示的な組成物は、 pH 7. 0— 8. 5の Tris緩衝剤または pH4. 0— 5. 5の酢酸緩衝剤を含み、これらは、さら に、ソルビトールまたはその適切な代替物を含み得る。 [0153] Further exemplary suitable carriers include neutral buffered saline or saline mixed with serum albumin. Preferably, the product is formulated as a lyophilizate using a suitable excipient (eg, sucrose). Other standard carriers, diluents and excipients may be included as desired. Other exemplary compositions include Tris buffer at pH 7.0-8.5 or acetate buffer at pH 4.0-5.5, which further comprises sorbitol or a suitable alternative thereof. May be included.
[0154] 本明細書では、キャリアは、タンパク質であることが好ましぐさらに好ましくは、細胞 接着性タンパク質であることが有利である。好ましくは、本発明において用いられる細 胞接着性タンパク質は、コラーゲンであり得る。 [0154] In the present specification, the carrier is preferably a protein, more preferably a cell adhesion protein. Preferably, the cell adhesion protein used in the present invention may be collagen.
[0155] 本発明のペプチドは、単独で、または生理緩衝液中に溶解した注射液等の形態で 、血管新生が望まれる組織に局所投与することができる。手術や外傷により生じた創 傷等の近傍に本発明の血管新生剤を、注射や塗布、噴霧等の方法により局所投与 することにより、血管新生が促進され、創傷の治癒が促進される。ここで、注射または 塗布もしくは噴霧等に用 ヽるペプチド溶液中のペプチド濃度は、特に限定されな ヽ 力 通常、 lng (ナノグラム)〜 ΙΟ /z g (マイクログラム) ZmL程度である。また、投与 量は、傷などの大きさや深さにより適宜選択できるが、傷全体がペプチド溶液で被覆 される程度でよい。また、傷が治癒するまで、 1日〜数日毎に 1回〜数回投与すること ができる。また、注射液には、他の消毒剤や消炎鎮痛剤など、通常、傷の治療薬に 含まれる種々の成分を含んで 、てもよ 、。 [0155] The peptide of the present invention can be locally administered to a tissue in which angiogenesis is desired, alone or in the form of an injection solution dissolved in a physiological buffer. Local administration of the angiogenic agent of the present invention to a wound or the like caused by surgery or trauma by injection, application, spraying, etc. promotes angiogenesis and promotes wound healing. Here, the peptide concentration in the peptide solution used for injection or application or spraying is not particularly limited. Usually, the concentration is about 1 ng (nanogram) to (/ zg (microgram) ZmL. The dose can be appropriately selected depending on the size and depth of the wound or the like, but it is sufficient that the whole wound is covered with the peptide solution. It can be administered once to several times every day to several days until the wound heals. Further, the injection solution may contain various components usually contained in a remedy for wounds, such as other disinfectants and anti-inflammatory analgesics.
[0156] 本発明の医薬は、経口的または非経口的に投与され得る。あるいは、本発明の医 薬は、静脈内または皮下で投与され得る。全身投与されるとき、本発明において使用 される医薬は、発熱物質を含まない、薬学的に受容可能な水溶液の形態であり得る 。そのような薬学的に受容可能な組成物の調製は、 pH、等張性、安定性などを考慮 することにより、当業者は、容易に行うことができる。本明細書において、投与方法は 、経口投与、非経口投与 (例えば、静脈内投与、筋肉内投与、皮下投与、皮内投与 、粘膜投与、直腸内投与、膣内投与、患部への局所投与、皮膚投与など)であり得る 。そのような投与のための処方物は、任意の製剤形態で提供され得る。そのような製 剤形態としては、例えば、液剤、注射剤、徐放剤が挙げられる。 [0156] The medicament of the present invention can be administered orally or parenterally. Alternatively, the medicament of the present invention can be administered intravenously or subcutaneously. When administered systemically, the medicament used in the present invention may be in the form of a pyrogen-free, pharmaceutically acceptable aqueous solution. The preparation of such pharmaceutically acceptable compositions takes into account pH, isotonicity, stability, etc. By doing so, those skilled in the art can easily carry out. In the present specification, the administration method includes oral administration, parenteral administration (for example, intravenous administration, intramuscular administration, subcutaneous administration, intradermal administration, mucosal administration, rectal administration, vaginal administration, local administration to the affected area, Skin administration). Formulations for such administration may be provided in any formulation. Such preparations include, for example, solutions, injections, and sustained-release preparations.
[0157] 本発明の医薬は、必要に応じて生理学的に受容可能なキャリア、賦型剤または安 定化剤 (日本薬局方第 14版、その追補またはその最新版、 Remington' s Pharm aceutical Sciences, 18th Edition, A. R. Lrennaro, ed. , Mack Publisnm g Company, 1990などを参照)と、所望の程度の純度を有する糖鎖組成物とを混 合することによって、凍結乾燥されたケーキまたは水溶液の形態で調製され保存され 得る。 [0157] The medicament of the present invention may contain a physiologically acceptable carrier, excipient or stabilizing agent (Japanese Pharmacopoeia, 14th edition, its supplement or its latest edition, Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, if necessary). , 18th Edition, AR Lrennaro, ed., Mack Publisnmg Company, 1990, etc.) and a glycan composition having the desired degree of purity to form a lyophilized cake or aqueous solution. Can be prepared and stored.
[0158] 本発明の組成物の投与すべき量は、使用目的、対象疾患 (種類、重篤度など)、患 者の年齢、体重、性別、既往歴、細胞の形態または種類などを考慮して、当業者が 容易に決定することができる。本発明の処置方法を被検体 (または患者)に対して施 す頻度もまた、使用目的、対象疾患 (種類、重篤度など)、患者の年齢、体重、性別、 既往歴、および治療経過などを考慮して、当業者が容易に決定することができる。頻 度としては、例えば、毎日 数ケ月に 1回(例えば、 1週間に 1回ー1ヶ月に 1回)の投 与が挙げられる。 1週間ー1ヶ月に 1回の投与を、経過を見ながら施すことが好ましい [0158] The amount of the composition of the present invention to be administered depends on the purpose of use, target disease (type, severity, etc.), age, weight, sex, medical history, cell morphology or type of the patient, and the like. Thus, those skilled in the art can easily determine. The frequency of applying the treatment method of the present invention to the subject (or patient) also depends on the purpose of use, target disease (type, severity, etc.), patient age, weight, sex, medical history, and course of treatment. In consideration of the above, a person skilled in the art can easily determine. Frequently, for example, once every few months (eg, once a week – once a month). It is preferable to administer once a week to once a month while monitoring the progress
[0159] 別の局面において、本発明は、血管新生が所望される患者の部位に、本発明の血 管新生のための組成物を投与することを含む、血管を新生させるための方法を提供 する。 [0159] In another aspect, the present invention provides a method for generating a blood vessel, which comprises administering the composition for angiogenesis of the present invention to a site of a patient in which angiogenesis is desired. I do.
[0160] 他の局面において、本発明は、血管のネットワークの形成が所望される患者の部位 に、本発明の血管ネットワーク形成のための組成物を投与することを含む、血管ネッ トワークを形成させるための方法を提供する。 [0160] In another aspect, the present invention forms a vascular network, which comprises administering the composition for forming a vascular network of the present invention to a site of a patient where formation of a vascular network is desired. To provide a way to:
[0161] 上記方法において使用される組成物は、本明細書において詳述される任意の形態 を採り得ることが理解される。ここで使用される投与方法もまた、任意の形態を用いる ことができることが理解される。 [0162] 好ましい実施形態では、本発明は、血管新生および Zまたは血管ネットワークの形 成が所望される患者の部位に、本発明の血管新生および Zまたは血管のネットヮー クを形成するための組成物を投与することを含む、血管新生および Zまたは血管ネ ットワークを形成するための方法を提供する。 [0161] It is understood that the compositions used in the above methods can take any of the forms detailed herein. It is understood that the administration method used herein can also use any form. [0162] In a preferred embodiment, the present invention provides a composition for forming an angiogenesis and Z or vascular network of the invention at a site in a patient where angiogenesis and Z or vascular network formation is desired. Provided for angiogenesis and forming a Z or vascular network.
[0163] 本明細書において「患者」とは、本発明の処置が適用される生物をいい、「被検体」 または「被験体」ともいわれる。患者は好ましくは、ヒトであり得る。 [0163] As used herein, "patient" refers to an organism to which the treatment of the present invention is applied, and is also referred to as "subject" or "subject". The patient can preferably be a human.
[0164] 本発明は、患者への有効量の本発明の組成物の投与による処置、阻害および予 防の方法を提供する。好ましい局面において、本発明の組成物は実質的に精製され たものであり得る(例えば、その効果を制限する力または望ましくない副作用を生じる 物質が実質的に存在しな 、状態が挙げられる)。 [0164] The present invention provides methods of treatment, inhibition and prevention by administering to a patient an effective amount of a composition of the present invention. In a preferred aspect, the compositions of the present invention can be substantially purified (including, for example, conditions in which there is substantially no ability to limit its effects or substances that produce undesirable side effects).
[0165] 本発明が対象とする動物は、免疫系または類似の系を有するものであれば、どの 生物 (例えば、動物 (たとえば、脊椎動物、無脊椎動物))でもよい。好ましくは、脊椎 動物 (たとえば、メタラウナギ類、ャッメゥナギ類、軟骨魚類、硬骨魚類、両生類、爬 虫類、鳥類、哺乳動物など)であり、より好ましくは、哺乳動物 (例えば、単孔類、有袋 類、貧歯類、皮翼類、翼手類、食肉類、食虫類、長鼻類、奇蹄類、偶蹄類、管歯類、 有鱗類、海牛類、クジラ目、霊長類、齧歯類、ゥサギ目など)であり得る。例示的な患 者としては、例えば、ゥシ、ブタ、ゥマ、 -ヮトリ、ネコ、ィヌなどの動物が挙げられるが それらに限定されない。さらに好ましくは、霊長類 (たとえば、チンパンジー、二ホンザ ル、ヒト)が対象とされる。最も好ましくはヒトが対象とされる。 [0165] The animal targeted by the present invention may be any organism (eg, an animal (eg, a vertebrate, an invertebrate)) as long as it has an immune system or a similar system. Preferably, it is a vertebrate animal (e.g., a metal eel, alfalfa, chondrichthyes, teleosts, amphibians, reptiles, birds, mammals, etc.), and more preferably, a mammal (e.g., a monotreme, marsupial) , Rodents, dermis, skin wings, carnivores, carnivores, carnivores, longnoses, ungulates, artiodactyla, tubulars, squamata, squids, cetaceans, primates, rodents Teeth, egrets). Illustrative patients include, but are not limited to, animals such as, for example, horses, pigs, horses, birds, cats, dogs, and the like. More preferably, primates (eg, chimpanzees, diphones, humans) are targeted. Most preferably, humans are targeted.
[0166] 予防および治療に関して様々な送達系が公知であり、本発明では任意の投与経路 が企図される。本発明の組成物などを投与するために用いられ得る技術としては、例 えば、水溶液、リボソーム、微粒子、マイクロカプセルなどが挙げられる。従って、本 発明の組成物は、経口的または非経口的に投与され得る。そのような投与方法とし ては、経口投与、非経口投与 (例えば、静脈内投与、筋肉内投与、皮下投与、皮内 投与、粘膜投与 (鼻腔内、膣内、気道下、 P腔内、直腸粘膜および腸粘膜など)、患 部への局所投与、皮膚投与など)が挙げられる。全身投与されるとき、本発明におい て使用される組成物は、発熱物質を含まないことが好ましい。そのような薬学的に受 容可能な組成物の調製は、 pH、等張性、安定性などを考慮することにより、当業者 は、容易に行うことができる。そのような投与のための処方物は、任意の製剤形態で 提供され得る。そのような製剤形態としては、例えば、液剤、注射剤、徐放剤が挙げ られる。導入方法としては、経口剤としての投与、吸入 (例えば、肺)、シリンジ、カテ 一テル、チューブを用いた注入、針無し注射、遺伝子銃などが挙げられるがそれらに 限定されない。この場合、他の生物学的に活性な薬剤と一緒に投与され得る。 [0166] Various delivery systems are known for prophylaxis and therapy, and the present invention contemplates any route of administration. Techniques that can be used to administer the compositions and the like of the present invention include, for example, aqueous solutions, ribosomes, microparticles, and microcapsules. Thus, the compositions of the present invention can be administered orally or parenterally. Such administration methods include oral administration, parenteral administration (e.g., intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous, intradermal, mucosal (intranasal, intravaginal, sub-airway, intrathecal, rectal) Mucosal and intestinal mucosa), topical administration to the affected area, dermal administration, etc.). When administered systemically, the compositions used in the present invention are preferably pyrogen-free. The preparation of such pharmaceutically acceptable compositions depends on the skill of the art in considering pH, isotonicity, stability and the like. Can be easily performed. Formulations for such administration may be provided in any formulation. Such preparation forms include, for example, liquid preparations, injections, and sustained release preparations. Methods of introduction include, but are not limited to, administration as an oral agent, inhalation (eg, lungs), syringe, catheter, injection using a tube, needleless injection, gene gun, and the like. In this case, it can be administered together with other biologically active agents.
[0167] 本発明の予防方法において使用される医薬の量は、使用目的、対象疾患 (種類な ど)、患者の年齢、体重、既往歴などを考慮して、当業者が容易に決定することがで きる。本発明の処置方法を患者 (または患者)に対して施す頻度もまた、使用目的、 対象疾患 (種類、重篤度など)、患者の年齢、体重、既往歴、および経過などを考慮 して、当業者が容易に決定することができる。頻度としては、例えば、毎日—数ケ月に 1回(例えば、 1週間に 1回 1ヶ月に 1回)の投与、あるいは毎年流行前に 1回の頻 度などが挙げられる。 1週間ー1ヶ月に 1回の投与を、経過を見ながら施すことが好ま しぐ少なくとも約 1週間の間隔をあけて追加免疫をすることが有利である。より好まし くは、追加免疫の間隔は少なくとも約 3週間であり得る。本発明の組成物などの投与 量は、患者の年齢、体重、症状または投与方法などにより異なり、特に限定されない [0167] The amount of the medicament used in the prophylactic method of the present invention can be easily determined by those skilled in the art in consideration of the purpose of use, target disease (eg, type), age, weight, and medical history of the patient. I can do it. The frequency of applying the treatment method of the present invention to a patient (or patient) also depends on the purpose of use, target disease (type, severity, etc.), age, weight, medical history, and course of the patient, and the like. Those skilled in the art can easily determine. The frequency may include, for example, daily-once-monthly administration (eg, once a week, once a month), or once every year before the epidemic. It is advantageous to boost at least about a week at intervals of at least about one week, which is preferably administered once a week-monthly while monitoring the progress. More preferably, the interval between boosts can be at least about 3 weeks. The dose of the composition or the like of the present invention varies depending on the age, body weight, symptoms, administration method, and the like of the patient, and is not particularly limited.
[0168] 本明細書中、「投与する」とは、本発明の医薬などまたはそれを含む医薬組成物を 、単独で、または他の治療剤と組み合わせて処置が意図される宿主に与えることを意 味する。組み合わせは、例えば、混合物として同時に、別々であるが同時にもしくは 並行して;または逐次的にかのいずれかで投与され得る。これは、組み合わされた薬 剤が、治療混合物としてともに投与される提示を含み、そして組み合わせた薬剤が、 別々であるが同時に (例えば、同じ個体へ別々の粘膜を通じての場合)投与される手 順もまた含む。「組み合わせ」投与は、第 1に与えられ、続いて第 2に与えられる化合 物または薬剤のうちの 1つを別々に投与することをさらに含む。 [0168] As used herein, "administering" refers to giving the medicament or the like of the present invention or a pharmaceutical composition containing the same, alone or in combination with another therapeutic agent, to a host to be treated. means. The combination may be administered, for example, either as a mixture, simultaneously, separately but simultaneously or concurrently; or sequentially. This includes the indication that the combined agents are administered together as a therapeutic mixture, and the procedure in which the combined agents are administered separately but simultaneously (e.g., through separate mucous membranes to the same individual). Also included. "Combination" administration further includes separately administering one of the compounds or agents given first, followed by the second.
[0169] 本発明における医薬の投与は、どのような手法を用いて行ってもよいが、好ましくは 、針無し注射を用いることが有利である。患者に過度の負担を与えることなく投与を 行免るカゝらである。 [0169] The administration of the medicament of the present invention may be performed by any method, but it is advantageous to use needleless injection. This is a drug that exempts the patient from administration without undue burden.
[0170] ここで本発明における針無注射器とは、注射針を用いずに、ガス圧または弾性部 材の弹力によりピストンを移動させて薬液を皮膚に噴射し、薬剤成分を皮下、より好 ましくは皮下の細胞内に投与する医療機器を意味する。 [0170] Here, the needleless syringe in the present invention refers to a gas pressure or an elastic part without using a needle. It refers to a medical device that moves a piston by the force of a material to inject a drug solution onto the skin and administers a drug component subcutaneously, more preferably, into cells under the skin.
[0171] 具体的には例えば、シマジェット™ (島津製作所製)、メディ 'ジェクタ一ビジョン (M edi— Jector Vision) 、 (Elite medical社^)、ヘンンェット (Pe jet) (Penje t社製)などが市販されて ヽる。 [0171] Specifically, for example, ShimaJet ™ (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation), Medi-Jector Vision, (Elite medical Inc. ^), Henget (Pejet) (manufactured by Penjet) Is commercially available.
[0172] 別の局面において、本発明は、 VVXGLという配列を含み、ここで Xは芳香族ァミノ 酸の改変体である、ペプチドもしくはその改変体あるいはその塩の、、血管新生のた めの医薬組成物の製造のための使用を提供する。 [0172] In another aspect, the present invention relates to a medicament for angiogenesis, comprising a peptide called VVXGL, wherein X is a modified aromatic amino acid, a peptide or a modified variant thereof, or a salt thereof. There is provided a use for the manufacture of a composition.
[0173] 別の局面において、 WXGLという配列を含み、ここで Xは芳香族アミノ酸の改変体 である、ペプチドもしくはその改変体あるいはその塩の、、血管ネットワークを形成さ せるための医薬組成物の製造のための使用を提供する。 [0173] In another aspect, the present invention comprises a pharmaceutical composition for forming a vascular network, comprising a sequence of WXGL, wherein X is a variant of an aromatic amino acid, a peptide or a variant thereof, or a salt thereof. Provide use for manufacturing.
[0174] 上記使用において使用される組成物は、本明細書において詳述される任意の形態 を採り得ることが理解される。また、医薬組成物の製造のための技術は、当該分野に お!、て耕地の任意の手法を用いることができることが理解される。 [0174] It is understood that the compositions used in the above uses may take any of the forms detailed herein. In addition, it is understood that any technique of cultivated land can be used as a technique for producing a pharmaceutical composition in the art.
[0175] (化合物設計) [0175] (Compound design)
血管新生作用および Zまたは血管ネットワーク形成活性を有する領域は、 WXG Lに示されるアミノ酸配列中に含まれるので、 VVXGLに示されるアミノ酸配列を有す るペプチドまたはその一部のアミノ酸が置換もしくはその端部領域が欠失した、血管 新生作用および Zまたは血管ネットワーク形成活性を有する改変ペプチドの一端ま たは両端に他の任意のアミノ酸配列が付加されていてもそのペプチドは血管新生作 用および Zまたは血管ネットワーク形成活性を発揮し得る。このことは、フイブロネク チン、ラミニン等の細胞接着性ペプチドの細胞接着作用が RGDと 、う僅か 3つのアミ ノ酸から成る領域や、 YIGSRと 、う僅か 5つのアミノ酸力も成る領域等により発揮され るものであることからも類推できる。従って、血管新生活性を有する領域は、 VVXGL に示されるアミノ酸配列中に含まれるので、 WXGLに示されるアミノ酸配列を有する ペプチドまたはその一部のアミノ酸が置換もしくはその端部領域が欠失した、血管新 生作用を有するペプチド改変体の一端または両端に、長いアミノ酸配列が付加され て 、る場合であっても、上記ペプチドまたはペプチド改変体領域が相互作用のため に露出している限りは血管新生作用を発揮するものと考えられる。なお、現在では、 人工ペプチドの立体構造は、その一次配列から、市販のコンピューターソフトを用い て容易に予測することができるので、サイズの大きなペプチドであっても、上記べプチ ドまたはペプチド改変体領域が露出するペプチドは容易にデザインできる。 Since the region having an angiogenic activity and Z or vascular network forming activity is included in the amino acid sequence shown in WXL, the peptide having the amino acid sequence shown in VVXGL or a partial amino acid thereof is substituted or its terminal. The modified peptide having an angiogenic effect and Z or a vascular network-forming activity in which a partial region has been deleted, even if one or both ends of the modified peptide have an angiogenic effect and Z or a vascular network forming activity, the peptide still has an angiogenic effect and Z or It can exert a vascular network forming activity. This indicates that the cell-adhesive action of cell-adhesive peptides such as fibronectin and laminin is exerted by RGD, a region consisting of only three amino acids, YIGSR, and a region consisting of only five amino acids. It can be inferred from the fact that they are things. Therefore, since the region having an angiogenic activity is included in the amino acid sequence shown in VVXGL, the peptide having the amino acid sequence shown in WXGL or a partial amino acid thereof has been substituted or the terminal region has been deleted. Even if a long amino acid sequence is added to one or both ends of a peptide variant having an angiogenesis effect, the above-mentioned peptide or peptide variant region may have an interaction. Is considered to exert an angiogenic effect as long as it is exposed. At present, the three-dimensional structure of an artificial peptide can be easily predicted from its primary sequence using commercially available computer software. The peptides whose regions are exposed can be easily designed.
[0176] コンピュータモデリングを行うためのコンピュータープログラムもまた、フラグメントま たは化学物質を選択するプロセスにおいて使用され得る。 [0176] Computer programs for performing computer modeling can also be used in the process of selecting fragments or chemicals.
[0177] 一旦、適切な化合物質またはフラグメント (化合物種)が選択されると、それらは、単 一化合物または複合体にアセンブリすることができる。構築に先だって、本発明の血 管新生ペプチドの構造座標に関連してコンピューター画面上に表示される 3次元ィメ ージ上で、互いのフラグメントの関連性の視覚的検査が行われ得る。これに続き、 Qu antaまたは Sybyl [Tripos Associates, St. Louis, MO]のようなソフトウェアを用 V、るマニュアルでのモデル構築が行われる。 [0177] Once the appropriate compounds or fragments (compound species) are selected, they can be assembled into a single compound or complex. Prior to construction, a visual inspection of the relevance of the fragments to one another can be performed on a three-dimensional image displayed on a computer screen in relation to the structural coordinates of the angiogenic peptides of the invention. This is followed by manual model building using software such as Quanta or Sybyl [Tripos Associates, St. Louis, MO].
[0178] 個々の化学物質またはフラグメントを連結させる際に使用され得る有用なプログラム は、以下を含む。 [0178] Useful programs that can be used in linking individual chemicals or fragments include:
[0179] 1. CAVEAT (P. A. Bartlettら、「CAVEAT:A Program to Facilitate th e Structure― Derived Design of Biologically Active MoleculesJ (Mol ecular Recognition in Chemical and Biological Problems, Special Pu b. , Royal Chem. Soc. , 78, 182— 196頁(1989) ); G, Lauriおよび P. A. Ba rtlett, 「CAVEAT: a Program to Facilitate the Design of Organic M oleculesj , J. Comput. Aided Mol. Des. , 8, 51— 66頁(1994) )。 CAVEAT は、 University of California, Berkeley, CAから入手可能である。 [0179] 1. CAVEAT (PA Bartlett et al., "CAVEAT: A Program to Facilitate the Structure-Derived Design of Biologically Active MoleculesJ (Molecular Recognition in Chemical and Biological Problems, Special Pu b., Royal Chem. Soc., 78 G, Lauri and PA Barlett, "CAVEAT: a Program to Facilitate the Design of Organic Moleculesj, J. Comput. Aided Mol. Des., 8, 51-66 (1994). CAVEAT is available from the University of California, Berkeley, CA.
[0180] 2. ISIS (MDL Information Systems, San Leandro, CA)のような 3Dデー タベースシステム。この分野は、 Y. C. Martin, 「3D Database Searching in Drug Designj , J. Med. Chem. , 35, 2145— 2154頁(1992)【こお!/、て概説さ れる。 [0180] 2. A 3D database system such as ISIS (MDL Information Systems, San Leandro, CA). This field is reviewed by Y. C. Martin, "3D Database Searching in Drug Designj, J. Med. Chem., 35, 2145-2154 (1992).
[0181] 3. HOOK (M. B. Eisenら, 「HOOK:A Program for Finding Novel Mo lecular Architectures that Satisfy the Chemical and Steric Require ments of a Macromolecule Binding Site」, Proteins : Struct. , Funct. , Genet. , 19, 199— 221頁(1994) )。 HOOKは、 Molecular Simulations, Sa n Diego, CAから入手可能である。 [0181] 3. HOOK (MB Eisen et al., "HOOK: A Program for Finding Novel Molecular Architectures that Satisfy the Chemical and Steric Requirements of a Macromolecule Binding Site", Proteins: Struct., Funct., Genet., 19, 199-221 (1994)). HOOK is available from Molecular Simulations, San Diego, CA.
[0182] 上記のように一度に 1つのフラグメントまたは化学物質を段階的様式で血管新生の ァクチべ一ターまたはインヒビターなどとして構築することを進める代わりに、グローバ ルにまたはデノボで設計され得る。以下を含む、多くの新規リガンド設計方法が存在 する。 [0182] Instead of proceeding to build one fragment or chemical at a time, such as an angiogenic activator or inhibitor, in a stepwise manner, as described above, it can be designed globally or de novo. There are many new ligand design methods, including:
[0183] 1. LUDI (H. — J. Bohm, 「The Computer Program LUDI :A New Met hod for the De Novo Design of Enzyme InhibitorsJ , J. Comp. Aid. [0183] 1. LUDI (H. — J. Bohm, “The Computer Program LUDI: A New Met hod for the De Novo Design of Enzyme InhibitorsJ, J. Comp. Aid.
Molec. Design, 6 61— 78頁(1992) )。 LUDIは、 Molecular Simulations I ncorporated, San Diego, CA力ら入手可會である。 Molec. Design, 661-78 (1992)). LUDI is available from Molecular Simulations Incorporated, San Diego, CA.
[0184] 2. LEGEND (Y. Nishibataら, Tetrahedron, 47, 8985頁(1991) )。 LEGEN[0184] 2. LEGEND (Y. Nishibata et al., Tetrahedron, 47, p. 8985 (1991)). LEGEN
Dは、 Molecular Simulations Incorporated, San Diego, CA力ら入手可會 である。 D is available from Molecular Simulations Incorporated, San Diego, CA.
[0185] 3. LeapFrog (Tripos Associates, St. Louis, MOから入手可能である)。 [0185] 3. LeapFrog (available from Tripos Associates, St. Louis, MO).
[0186] 4. SPROUT (V. Gilletら, 「SPROUT:A Program for Structure Genera tion」, J. Comput. Aided Mol. Design, 7, 127— 153頁(1993) )。 SPROUT は、 University of Leeds, UKから入手可能である。 [0186] 4. SPROUT (V. Gillet et al., "SPROUT: A Program for Structure Generation", J. Comput. Aided Mol. Design, 7, 127-153 (1993)). SPROUT is available from the University of Leeds, UK.
[0187] 他の分子モデリング技術もまた、本発明に従って使用され得る [例えば、 N. C. Co henら, 「Molecular Modeling Software and Metnods for Medicinal C hemistryj , J. Med. Chem. , 33, 883— 894頁(1990)を参照のこと; M. A. Na viaおよび M. A. Murcko, 「The Use of Structural Information in Drug DesignJ , Current Opinions in Structural Biology, 2, 202— 210頁 (19 92)もまた参照のこと; L. M. Balbesら, 「A Perspective of Modern Method s in Computer― Aided Drug DesignJ , (Reviews in Computational C hemistry, vol. 5, K. B. Lipkowitzおよび D. B. Boyd編, VCH, New York, 3 37— 380頁(1994) ) ;W. C. Guida, 「Software For Structure -Based Dm g DesignJ , Curr. Opin. Struct. Biology. , 4, 777— 781頁(1994) ]。 [0187] Other molecular modeling techniques may also be used in accordance with the present invention [eg, NC Cohen et al., "Molecular Modeling Software and Metnods for Medicinal Chemistryj, J. Med. Chem., 33, 883—894 ( 1990); see also MA Na via and MA Murcko, "The Use of Structural Information in Drug Design J, Current Opinions in Structural Biology, 2, 202-210 (1992); LM Balbes et al., `` A Perspective of Modern Method s in Computer-Aided Drug Design J, (Reviews in Computational Chemistry, vol. 5, KB Lipkowitz and DB Boyd, eds., VCH, New York, pp. 337-380 (1994)); WC Guida, "Software For Structure -Based Dmg DesignJ, Curr. Opin. Struct. Biology., 4, 777-781 (1994)].
[0188] 一旦上記の方法によりィ匕合物が設計される力または選択されると、その物質が最適 な血管新生能を有する力否かが、計算による評価により試験され、そして最適化され 得る。 [0188] Once the strength or design of the conjugate is determined by the above method, the material is optimized Competitive angiogenic potential can be tested and optimized by computational evaluation.
[0189] 本発明の物質は、例えば、周囲の水分子との静電的斥力相互作用がないように、 計算によりさらに最適化され得る。このような非相補的静電的相互作用は、電荷—電 荷斥力相互作用、双極子一双極子斥力相互作用および電荷一双極子斥力相互作 用を含む。 [0189] The substance of the present invention can be further optimized by calculation, for example, so that there is no electrostatic repulsion interaction with surrounding water molecules. Such non-complementary electrostatic interactions include charge-charge repulsion interactions, dipole-dipole repulsion interactions, and charge-dipole repulsion interactions.
[0190] 特定のコンピューターソフトウェアは、化合物変形エネルギーおよび静電的相互作 用を評価する分野において入手可能である。このような使用のために設計されたプロ グラムの例として、以下が挙げられる: Gaussian 94, revision C (M. J. Frisch, Gaussian, Inc. , Pittsburgh, PA 1995); AMBER, version 4. 1 (P. A. Kol lman, University of California at San Francisco, 1995); QUANTA/ CHARMM (Molecular Simulations, Inc. , San Diego, C A 1995) ;Insigh t Il/Discover, (Molecular Simulations, Inc. , San Diego, CA 1995); DelPhi (Molecular Simulations, Inc. , San Diego, CA 1995) ;および AM SOL (Quantum Chemistry Program Exchange, Indiana University)。こ れらのプログラムは、例えば、 Silicon Graphicsワークステーション(例えば、「IMP ACT」グラフィクスを備える Indigo2)を用いて実行され得る。他のハードウェアシステ ムおよびソフトウェアパッケージもまた、当業者に公知である。 [0190] Certain computer software is available in the field of evaluating compound deformation energy and electrostatic interactions. Examples of programs designed for such use include: Gaussian 94, revision C (MJ Frisch, Gaussian, Inc., Pittsburgh, PA 1995); AMBER, version 4.1 (PA Kol lman, University of California at San Francisco, 1995); QUANTA / CHARMM (Molecular Simulations, Inc., San Diego, CA 1995); Insert Il / Discover, (Molecular Simulations, Inc., San Diego, CA 1995); (Molecular Simulations, Inc., San Diego, CA 1995); and AM SOL (Quantum Chemistry Program Exchange, Indiana University). These programs can be executed using, for example, a Silicon Graphics workstation (eg, Indigo 2 with “IMP ACT” graphics). Other hardware systems and software packages are also known to those skilled in the art.
[0191] 本発明により可能な別のアプローチは、 LOX—1に全体または部分的に結合し得 る化学物質または化合物についての低分子データベースの計算的なスクリーニング である。このスクリーニングにおいて、結合部位へのこのような物質の適合の質は、形 状的相補性または見積もられた相互作用エネルギーのいずれか〖こより判定され得る [E. C. Mengら, J. Comp. Chem. , 16, 505— 524頁(1992) ]。 [0191] Another approach possible with the present invention is the computational screening of small molecule databases for chemicals or compounds that can bind, in whole or in part, to LOX-1. In this screen, the quality of the fit of such a material to the binding site can be determined from either shape complementarity or the estimated interaction energy [EC Meng et al., J. Comp. Chem. , 16, 505-524 (1992)].
[0192] (コンビナトリアルケミストリ) [0192] (Combinatorial chemistry)
本発明で使用する化合物ライブラリは、例えば、コンビナトリアルケミストリー技術、 醱酵方法、植物および細胞抽出手順などが挙げられるがこれらに限定されない、い ずれかの手段により、作製することができる力または入手することができる。コンビナト リアルライブラリを作成する方法は、当該技術分野で周知である。例えば、 E. R. Fel der, Chimia 1994, 48, 512— 541 ;Gallopら、 Med. Chem. 1994, 37, 12 33 - 1251 ;R. A. Houghten, Trends Genet. 1993, 9, 235- 239 ;Houghte nら、 Nature 1991, 354, 84— 86 ; Lamら、 Nature 1991, 354, 82-84 ;Car ellら、 Chem. Biol. 1995, 3, 171— 183 ;Maddenら、 Perspectives in Drug Discovery and Design2, 269— 282 ; Cwirlaら、 Biochemistry 1990, 87, 6 378— 6382 ; Brennerら、 Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 1992, 89, 5381— 53 83 ;Gordonら、 Med. Chem. 1994, 37, 1385— 1401 ;Leblら、 BiopolymersThe compound library used in the present invention can be prepared or obtained by any means including, but not limited to, combinatorial chemistry technology, fermentation methods, plant and cell extraction procedures, and the like. be able to. Methods for creating combinatorial libraries are well known in the art. For example, ER Fel der, Chimia 1994, 48, 512-541; Gallop et al., Med. Chem. 1994, 37, 1233-1251; RA Houghten, Trends Genet. 1993, 9, 235-239; Houghten et al., Nature 1991, 354, 84-86; Lam et al., Nature 1991, 354, 82-84; Carell et al., Chem. Biol. 1995, 3, 171-183; Madden et al., Perspectives in Drug Discovery and Design 2, 269-282; Cwirla et al., Biochemistry. 1990, 87, 6 378-6382; Brenner et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 1992, 89, 5381-5383; Gordon et al., Med. Chem. 1994, 37, 1385-1401; Lebl et al., Biopolymers.
1995, 37 177— 198 ;およびそれらで引用された参考文献を参照のこと。これら の参考文献は、その全体を、本明細書中で参考として援用する。 1995, 37 177—198; and the references cited therein. These references are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.
[0193] 使用されるコンピュータも、プログラムが実行され得る限り、どのようなものでもよく、 例えば、 Windows (登録商標)ベース、 UNIX (登録商標)ベース、 Mac (登録商標) OSベース、 LINUXベースなどが挙げられるがそれらに限定されない。 [0193] The computer used may be any computer as long as the program can be executed, for example, Windows (registered trademark) -based, UNIX (registered trademark) -based, Mac (registered trademark) OS-based, LINUX-based, and the like. But not limited to them.
[0194] 以上、本発明を、理解の容易のために好まし!/ヽ実施形態を示して説明してきた。以 下に、実施例に基づいて本発明を説明するが、上述の説明および以下の実施例は 、例示の目的のみに提供され、本発明を限定する目的で提供したのではない。従つ て、本発明の範囲は、本明細書に具体的に記載された実施形態にも実施例にも限 定されず、特許請求の範囲によってのみ限定されることが理解されるべきである。 実施例 The present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments for easy understanding. Hereinafter, the present invention will be described based on examples. However, the above description and the following examples are provided for illustrative purposes only, and are not provided for limiting the present invention. Therefore, it should be understood that the scope of the present invention is not limited to the embodiments or examples specifically described herein, but only by the appended claims. . Example
[0195] 以下、本発明を実施例に基づきより具体的に説明する。 [0195] Hereinafter, the present invention will be described more specifically based on examples.
[0196] (実施例 1 ペプチドの合成) (Example 1 Synthesis of Peptide)
Fmocィ匕学による高効率固相法(K. Nokihara, et al. , Innovation and Pers pectives in Solid— Phase Synthesis 1992, ed. , R. Epton, Intercept Li mited, Andover, UK, 445—448, 1992, Design and Applications of a Novel simultaneous Multiple Solid— Phase Peptide Synthesizer;平干原 清史、有機合成哲学協会誌、 52, 347- 358, 1994,高効率ペプチド合成:多種品 目同時自動合成とペプチドライブラリー)に基づき、ペプチド自動合成機を用いて配 列番号 1に示されるアミノ酸配列を有するペプチドの代表例を合成した。 High-efficiency solid-phase method by Fmoc-Danigaku (K. Nokihara, et al., Innovation and Perspectives in Solid—Phase Synthesis 1992, ed., R. Epton, Intercept Limited, Andover, UK, 445—448, 1992 , Design and Applications of a Novel simultaneous Multiple Solid-Phase Peptide Synthesizer; Based on the above, a representative example of a peptide having the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1 was synthesized using an automatic peptide synthesizer.
[0197] 芳香族アミノ酸の芳香族側鎖に対する改変は、以下のように行ったか、または市販 の改変体を用いた。 [0197] The modification of the aromatic side chain of the aromatic amino acid was performed as follows, or Was used.
[0198] F(pMe)GL: (商品名) B— 3335:Fmoc— p— Me— Phe— OH [0198] F (pMe) GL: (product name) B— 3335: Fmoc— p— Me— Phe— OH
F(pF)GL: (商品名) B— 2835:Fmoc— p— fluoro— Phe— OH F (pF) GL: (product name) B— 2835: Fmoc— p— fluoro— Phe— OH
F(pNO ): (商品名) B— 1395:Fmoc— p— nitro— Phe— OH F (pNO): (brand name) B— 1395: Fmoc— p— nitro— Phe— OH
2 2
以上全て入手先: Bachem AG (スイス)。 All sources: Bachem AG (Switzerland).
[0199] ペプチドの合成はメリフィールド (Merrifield)によって開発された固相合成法を利 用し (Merrifield, R. B. (1963) Solid phase peptide synthesis. I. the syn thesis of a tetrapeptide. J. Am. Chem. Soc.85, 2149— 2154)、 CK—アミ ノ基の保護基として 9—フルォレ-ノレメトキシカルボ-ル(9一 Fluorenylmethycarb onyl, Fmoc)基を用いる Fmoc法によって行った。 [0199] The peptide was synthesized using a solid phase synthesis method developed by Merrifield (Merrifield, RB (1963) Solid phase peptide synthesis. I. the synthesis of a tetrapeptide. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 85, 2149-2154), and the Fmoc method using a 9-fluorenylmethycarboxyl (Fmoc) group as a protecting group for the CK-amino group.
[0200] 合成したペプチドは、以下のとおりであり、原則として WXGL (配列番号 1)を有す るものおよびコントロールとして、天然型である SWYGLR (配列番号 2)を含む。 配列番号 2: SWYGLR [0200] The synthesized peptides are as follows, and include, in principle, those having WXGL (SEQ ID NO: 1) and SWYGLR (SEQ ID NO: 2) which is a natural type as a control. SEQ ID NO: 2: SWYGLR
配列番号 3: SWFGLR SEQ ID NO: 3: SWFGLR
配列番号4:SVVF(pMe)GLR(ここで、 F(pMe)は、フエ-ルァラニンのフエ-ル基 のパラ位にメチル基が置換されたものである) SEQ ID NO: 4: SVVF (pMe) GLR (where F (pMe) is obtained by substituting a methyl group at the para-position of the phenyl group of phenylalanine)
配列番号 5: SWF (pF) GLR (ここで、 F (pF)は、フエ二ルァラニンのフエニル基の パラ位にフルォロ基が置換されたものである) SEQ ID NO: 5: SWF (pF) GLR (where F (pF) is a phenyl group of phenylalanine with a fluoro group substituted at the para-position)
配列番号 6:SWF(pNO ) GLR (ここで、 F(pNO )は、フエ-ルァラニンのフエニル SEQ ID NO: 6: SWF (pNO) GLR (where F (pNO) is phenyl of phenylalanine)
2 2 twenty two
基のパラ位に-トロ基が置換されたものである) With-toro group substituted at the para position of the group)
配列番号 7:SWF(D)GLR (ここで、 F(D)は、フエ-ルァラニンの D体である) 配列番号 8: SWF (pEt) GLR (ここで、 F (pEt)は、フエ二ルァラニンのフエニル基 のパラ位にェチル基が置換されたものである) SEQ ID NO: 7: SWF (D) GLR (where F (D) is the D-form of phenylalanine) SEQ ID NO: 8: SWF (pEt) GLR (where F (pEt) is fenilalanine With a phenyl group substituted with an ethyl group at the para-position)
配列番号 9: SWF (pPr) GLR (ここで、 F (pPr)は、フエ-/レアラニンのフエ-ル基の パラ位にプロピル基が置換されたものである) SEQ ID NO: 9: SWF (pPr) GLR (where F (pPr) is a phenyl group in which the propyl group is substituted at the para-position of the phenyl group of hua- / realanine)
配列番号 10:SWF(pHex)GLR (ここで、 F(pHex)は、フエ二ルァラニンのフエュ ル基のパラ位にへキシル基が置換されたものである) SEQ ID NO: 10: SWF (pHex) GLR (where F (pHex) is a phenyl group substituted with a hexyl group at the para-position of the phenyl group)
配列番号 11:SWYGL 配列番号 12:SWFGL SEQ ID NO: 11: SWYGL SEQ ID NO: 12: SWFGL
配列番号 13: WYGLR SEQ ID NO: 13: WYGLR
配列番号 14: WFGLR SEQ ID NO: 14: WFGLR
配列番号 15:WYGL SEQ ID NO: 15: WYGL
配列番号 16:WFGL SEQ ID NO: 16: WFGL
配列番号17:VVF(pMe)GLR(ここで、 F(pMe)は、フエ-ルァラニンのフエ-ル基 のパラ位にメチル基が置換されたものである) SEQ ID NO: 17: VVF (pMe) GLR (where F (pMe) is a phenylalanine in which a methyl group is substituted at the para-position of the phenyl group)
配列番号 18: SWF (pMe) GL (ここで、 F (pMe)は、フエ-ルァラニンのフエ-ル基 のパラ位にメチル基が置換されたものである) SEQ ID NO: 18: SWF (pMe) GL (where F (pMe) is phenylalanine in which a methyl group is substituted at the para-position of the phenyl group)
配列番号19: ^^ 1^^)0し(ここで、? 1^6)は、フエ-ルァラニンのフエ-ル基 のパラ位にメチル基が置換されたものである) SEQ ID NO: 19: ^^ 1 ^^) 0 (where? 1 ^ 6) is the substitution of a methyl group at the para-position of the phenyl group of phenylalanine
配列番号 21 :SWF(pMe)GLR (ここで、 F(pMe)は、フエ-ルァラニンのフエ-ル 基のオルト位にメチル基が置換されたものである) SEQ ID NO: 21: SWF (pMe) GLR (where, F (pMe) is a compound obtained by substituting a methyl group at the ortho-position of the phenyl group of phenylalanine)
配列番号 22: SWF (pF) GLR (ここで、 F (pF)は、フエ-ルァラ -ンのフエ-ル基の オルト位にフルォロ基が置換されたものである) SEQ ID NO: 22: SWF (pF) GLR (where, F (pF) is a ferrule having a fluoro group substituted at the ortho position of the ferule group)
配列番号 23:SWF(pNO )GLR (ここで、 F(pNO )は、フエ-ルァラニンのフエ-SEQ ID NO: 23: SWF (pNO) GLR (where F (pNO) is
2 2 twenty two
ル基のオルト位に-トロ基が置換されたものである) In which the -toro group is substituted at the ortho position of the
配列番号 24:SWF(pMe)GLR (ここで、 F(pMe)は、フエ-ルァラニンのフエ-ル 基のメタ位にメチル基が置換されたものである) SEQ ID NO: 24: SWF (pMe) GLR (where F (pMe) is a phenylalanine in which a methyl group is substituted at the meta position of the phenyl group)
配列番号 25: SWF (pF) GLR (ここで、 F (pF)は、フエ-ルァラ -ンのフエ-ル基の メタ位にフルォロ基が置換されたものである) SEQ ID NO: 25: SWF (pF) GLR (where F (pF) is a ferrule having a fluoro group substituted at the meta-position of the ferule group)
配列番号 26:SWF(pNO ) GLR (ここで、 F(pNO )は、フエ二/レアラニンのフエ二 SEQ ID NO: 26: SWF (pNO) GLR (where F (pNO) is
2 2 twenty two
ル基のメタ位に-トロ基が置換されたものである) In which the -toro group is substituted at the meta position of the
さらに、配列番号 8〜10に加え、 SVVFGLRにおけるフエ-ルァラニンについて、 側鎖のオルト位、メタ位またはパラ位にぉ 、て以下の改変体を作製する。 Furthermore, in addition to SEQ ID NOS: 8 to 10, the following variants are prepared for feralanine in SVVFGLR at the ortho, meta or para position of the side chain.
ェチル基 Ethyl group
1 プロピル基 1 propyl group
2 -プロピル基 (iso -プロピル基) 1—ブチル基 2-propyl group (iso-propyl group) 1-butyl group
2 ブチノレ基 (iso ブチノレ基) 2 Butynole group (iso Butynole group)
2—メチルプロピル基(sec ブチル基) 2-Methylpropyl group (sec butyl group)
1, 1—ジメチルェチル基(tert ブチル基) 1, 1-dimethylethyl group (tert-butyl group)
1 ペンチル基 1 Pentyl group
2—ペンチル基 2—pentyl group
3—ペンチル基 3—pentyl group
1 メチルブチル基(iso ペンチル基) 1 Methylbutyl group (iso pentyl group)
2—メチルブチル基 2-methylbutyl group
3—メチルブチル基 3-methylbutyl group
2, 2—ジメチルプロピル基(neo ペンチル基) 2, 2-dimethylpropyl group (neo pentyl group)
クロ口基 Black mouth group
ブロモ基 Bromo group
ョード基。 Edo group.
[0202] 得られたペプチドを、液体クロマトグラフィー結合質量スペクトル (LCMS)システム で検定し、高純度であることを確認した (単一成分、質量理論値と一致)。 [0202] The obtained peptide was assayed with a liquid chromatography-coupled mass spectrum (LCMS) system to confirm that the peptide was highly pure (single component, consistent with the theoretical mass value).
[0203] このような手順に従って、以下の実施例において使用されるペプチドを作製した。 [0203] According to such a procedure, peptides used in the following Examples were produced.
[0204] (実施例 2 合成ペプチドの血管新生作用の確認) [0204] (Example 2 Confirmation of angiogenic action of synthetic peptide)
実施例 1で合成した本発明のペプチドの存在下でラットの血管内皮細胞を三次元 口 しプ 。 Rat vascular endothelial cells are three-dimensionally implanted in the presence of the peptide of the present invention synthesized in Example 1.
[0205] この操作は具体的には次のようにして行った。細胞は transformed rat lung e ndothelial cells (TRLEC細胞)を用いた。 lOngZmlの濃度のペプチド溶液混和 コラーゲン I層中に TRLEC細胞を播種し、 14日間の炭酸ガスインキュベータ一中で 培養した。コントロールは因子なし(一)および従来より血管新生因子として知られて Vヽるタンパク質 VEGF ( + )で行った。 [0205] This operation was specifically performed as follows. The cells used were transformed rat lung endothelial cells (TRLEC cells). TRLEC cells were seeded in the collagen I layer mixed with a peptide solution having a concentration of lOngZml, and cultured in a carbon dioxide incubator for 14 days. Controls were performed with no factor (1) and with VEGF (+), a protein known conventionally as an angiogenic factor.
[0206] 14日後に培養細胞を顕微鏡で観察したところ、コントロールはまったく管腔を形成 しな力つた。本発明のペプチドおよび VEGFは管腔を形成し、この管腔を囲包する 細胞同士が接着されていた。さらに、倍率 7000倍で電子顕微鏡で管腔部分を観察 したところ、管腔の内壁にマイクロピライ (微細細胞突起)が複数個形成されているこ とが認められた。さらに、倍率 15000倍で、管腔を取り囲む血管内皮細胞同士の接 合部分を観察したところ、内皮細胞同士が堅固に結合されている領域、すなわち、タ イトジャンクション (密着結合)が認められた。これらの所見は内皮細胞が極性を獲得 して、管腔を形成したことを示す。なお、極性というのは細胞が頭と尻尾のような機能 分担する部分をもつ性質で、内皮細胞を通常培養していても極性はなぐしたがって 管腔も作らないので、このペプチドで誘導されたことを示している。管腔形成長さは有 意に本発明のペプチドの方が VEGFより優れていた。これらの結果から、本発明の ペプチドには血管内皮培養細胞力 構成される組織中に、細胞同士を接着させてそ れらの間に管腔を形成する作用(生体内では、この管腔が血管になる)があることが 確認された。その模式図は、図 1に示す。図 2には、 VEGFおよびペプチド SVVYG LR (配列番号 2)を比較した様子を示す。 [0206] After 14 days, the cultured cells were observed under a microscope. As a result, the control showed no luminal formation. The peptide of the present invention and VEGF formed a lumen, and cells surrounding the lumen were adhered to each other. Observation of the lumen with an electron microscope at 7000x magnification As a result, it was confirmed that a plurality of micropirai (fine cell projections) were formed on the inner wall of the lumen. Further, at a magnification of 15,000, the junction of the vascular endothelial cells surrounding the lumen was observed. As a result, a region where the endothelial cells were tightly bonded, that is, a tight junction was observed. These findings indicate that the endothelial cells acquired polarity and formed a lumen. Polarity is a property of cells having a part that shares functions such as head and tail.Even if endothelial cells are normally cultured, they lose polarity and do not form a lumen, so it was induced by this peptide. Is shown. The peptide of the present invention was significantly superior in tube formation length to VEGF. From these results, the peptide of the present invention has the effect of adhering cells to each other in a tissue composed of vascular endothelial cultured cells to form a lumen between them (in vivo, this lumen is Blood vessels). The schematic diagram is shown in FIG. FIG. 2 shows a comparison between VEGF and the peptide SVVYG LR (SEQ ID NO: 2).
[0207] (実施例 3 DASアツセィによる in vivoでの血管新生作用確認) (Example 3 Confirmation of In Vivo Angiogenic Action by DAS Atssay)
細胞培養液として用いられる DMEM (ダルベッコ修飾イーグル培地)中に 10 gZ mlの濃度のプチドを溶解した溶液を得た。直径 0. 45mmの円筒の上下を Millipore フィルター(MILLIPORE、 USA, DAS Assay)で塞いで構成されるマイクロセル をマウスの背部に埋め込んだ後、マイクロセル内に上記本発明のペプチド等のぺプ チド溶液や VEGF溶液を注入した。また、対照として、ペプチドを含まないリン酸緩衝 液 (PBS)単独も注入した(コントロール)。 5日後に、マイクロセル周辺の組織の様子 を顕微鏡で観察した。その模式図は、図 3に示す。 A solution obtained by dissolving a peptide at a concentration of 10 gZ ml in DMEM (Dulbecco's modified Eagle medium) used as a cell culture solution was obtained. After filling the upper and lower cylinder diameter 0. 45 mm Millipore filter (MILLIPORE, USA, DAS Assay) microcells the back of the mouse consists blocking, the pair of peptides or the like of the present invention in a microcell flop A tide solution and VEGF solution were injected. As a control, a phosphate buffer (PBS) containing no peptide alone was also injected (control). Five days later, the state of the tissue around the microcell was observed with a microscope. The schematic diagram is shown in FIG.
[0208] ペプチド SWYGLR (配列番号 2)を用いた場合の血管新生の様子を図 4および 図 5に示す。図 4および図 5に示されるように、血管が新生され、新生された血管が新 生し、網状となり始めている様子が明らかになった。従って、本発明のペプチドは、血 管新生剤および Zまたは血管ネットワーク形成剤として有用であることが明らかにな つた。これを、 VEGFおよびコントロールと比較した場合、ペプチド SVVYGLR (配列 番号 2)は、血管新生および網状の形成が見られたのに対して、 VEGFは血管新生 は見られたが、網状形成はな力つた。また、コントロールでは、血管新生も、網状形成 は見られなかった。従って、本発明のペプチドは、血管新生作用および血管ネットヮ ーク形成能が亢進される可能性があることが示された。 [0208] FIGS. 4 and 5 show the state of angiogenesis when peptide SWYGLR (SEQ ID NO: 2) was used. As shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5, it was clarified that the blood vessels were newly formed, and the newly formed blood vessels were renewed and began to be reticulated. Therefore, it was revealed that the peptide of the present invention is useful as an angiogenic agent and a Z or vascular network forming agent. When this was compared with VEGF and the control, peptide SVVYGLR (SEQ ID NO: 2) showed angiogenesis and reticulation, whereas VEGF showed angiogenesis but no reticulation. I got it. In the control, neither neovascularization nor reticulation was observed. Therefore, the peptide of the present invention has an angiogenic action and a vascular network. It has been shown that the ability to form stalk may be enhanced.
[0209] 実施例 1にお!/、て合成したペプチドの血管新生長につ!、て測定した結果を以下に 示す。 [0209] The results obtained by measuring the angiogenesis length of the peptide synthesized in Example 1 are shown below.
[0210] コントロール: 0.00±0 [0210] Control: 0.00 ± 0
VEGF:0.00±0 VEGF: 0.00 ± 0
ペプチド SWYGLR (配列番号 2) (野生型): 3.7 Peptide SWYGLR (SEQ ID NO: 2) (wild type): 3.7
ペプチド SWFGLR (配列番号 3) :4.4 Peptide SWFGLR (SEQ ID NO: 3): 4.4
ペプチド SWF(pMe)GLR (配列番号 4) :4.6 Peptide SWF (pMe) GLR (SEQ ID NO: 4): 4.6
ペプチド S WF (pF) GLR (配列番号 5) :4.1 Peptide S WF (pF) GLR (SEQ ID NO: 5): 4.1
ペプチド SWF(pNO ) GLR (配列番号 6) :4. 1。 Peptide SWF (pNO) GLR (SEQ ID NO: 6): 4.1.
2 2
[0211] 実施例 1にお!/、て合成したペプチドの血管新生数にっ 、て計数した結果を以下に 示す。新生血管 1本あたりの平均ピクセル数を、実体顕微鏡 (ォリンパス、 SZX12、 Ja pan)にて観察した。得られた画像を Photoshop (登録商標)(Adobe、 Japan)にて 読み取り。ピクセルで計数した。スコアは、以下のとおりとした。 [0211] The results of counting the number of angiogenesis of the peptide synthesized in Example 1 are shown below. The average number of pixels per new blood vessel was observed with a stereoscopic microscope (Olympus, SZX12, Japan). The obtained image was read by Photoshop (registered trademark) (Adobe, Japan). Counted in pixels. The scores were as follows.
[0212] スコア 1:100未満 [0212] Score less than 1: 100
スコア 2: 100以上 125未満 Score 2: 100 or more and less than 125
スコア 3: 125以上 150未満 Score 3: 125 or more and less than 150
スコア 4: 150以上 175未満 Score 4: 150 or more and less than 175
スコア 5: 175以上 200未満 Score 5: 175 or more and less than 200
スコア 6 :200以上 Score 6: 200 or more
コントローノレ:0.00±0 Controller: 0.00 ± 0
VEGF:2.75±1.03 VEGF: 2.75 ± 1.03
ペプチド SWYGLR (配列番号 2) (野生型): 4.1 Peptide SWYGLR (SEQ ID NO: 2) (wild type): 4.1
ペプチド SWYGLR (配列番号 2) (50°C) :3.0 Peptide SWYGLR (SEQ ID NO: 2) (50 ° C): 3.0
ペプチド SWYGLR (配列番号 2) (60°C) :3.5 Peptide SWYGLR (SEQ ID NO: 2) (60 ° C): 3.5
ペプチド SWYGLR (配列番号 2) (90°C) :2.1 Peptide SWYGLR (SEQ ID NO: 2) (90 ° C): 2.1
ペプチド SWFGLR (配列番号 3) :3.8 Peptide SWFGLR (SEQ ID NO: 3): 3.8
ペプチド SWF(pMe)GLR (配列番号 4) :4.5 ペプチド SWF (pF) GLR (配列番号 5) :4. 1 Peptide SWF (pMe) GLR (SEQ ID NO: 4): 4.5 Peptide SWF (pF) GLR (SEQ ID NO: 5): 4.1
ペプチド SWF (pNO ) GLR (配列番号 6) :4. 1 Peptide SWF (pNO) GLR (SEQ ID NO: 6): 4.1
2 2
これに対して、フエ二ルァラニンに置換した場合は、血管新生および血管新生長さ が上昇していた。 On the other hand, in the case of substitution with fenilalanine, angiogenesis and angiogenesis length were increased.
[0213] 次に、組織での血管新生の状態を実体顕微鏡 (ォリンパス、 SZX12、 Japan)にて 観察した。得られた画像を Photoshop (登録商標)(Adobe、 Japan)にて読み取りネ ットワーク能を以下のようにスコア化した。 [0213] Next, the state of angiogenesis in the tissue was observed with a stereoscopic microscope (Olympus, SZX12, Japan). The obtained image was read by Photoshop (registered trademark) (Adobe, Japan) and the network ability was scored as follows.
[0214] Nwl:ネットワーク形成前記で血管新生は認められるが、各新生血管は単独の状 fe。 [0214] Nwl: Network formation Although neovascularization was observed in the above, each new blood vessel was a single fe.
[0215] Nw2 :ネットワーク形成中期であり、各新生血管同士は、はしご上の側枝が係った 状態。 [0215] Nw2: In the middle stage of network formation, each new blood vessel is in a state in which a side branch on a ladder is engaged.
[0216] Nw3 :ネットワーク完成期であり、はしご上側枝がさらに側枝を出した状態。 [0216] Nw3: The network is in the final stage, and the upper branch of the ladder has more side branches.
[0217] Nw4 :ネットワーク成熟期であり、広範囲に新生血管叢を示す状態。 [0217] Nw4: Network maturation stage, showing a wide range of neovascular plexus.
[0218] ネットワークインデックス測定結果を以下に示す。ペプチド SVVYGLRの 5日目の ネットワークインデックスは、 1. 6と低く、「ネットワーク未完成」であった力 10日目に は 3. 0となりネットワーク形成が観察された。ペプチド SVVF (pF) GLRおよび SWF (pNO ) GLRにおいても、 5日目および 10日目において、 SVVYGLRとほぼ同等の[0218] Network index measurement results are shown below. The network index of peptide SVVYGLR on day 5 was as low as 1.6, and it was 3.0 on the 10th day, when the network was incomplete, indicating that network formation was observed. Peptides SVVF (pF) GLR and SWF (pNO) GLR were also almost equivalent to SVVYGLR on days 5 and 10.
2 2
インデックスを示すことが観察された。これに対して、 SWF (pMe) GLRおよび SW FGLRにおいて、 5日目および 10日目とも、 SVVYGLRよりも高いネットワークインデ ックス能を示した。 It was observed to show an index. In contrast, SWF (pMe) GLR and SW FGLR showed higher network index capacity than SVVYGLR on both days 5 and 10.
[0219] 温度が高くなるにつれて、血管新生能は低下した。 50°C、 60°Cでは平均値が 3、 3 . 5であり、両者ともスコア 3以上であった。 90°Cは平均値が 2. 1であり、野生型(配列 番号 1) (平均値 4. 1)を大きく下回る結果となった。 [0219] As the temperature increased, the angiogenic potential decreased. At 50 ° C and 60 ° C, the average was 3, 3.5, and both had a score of 3 or more. At 90 ° C, the average value was 2.1, which was much lower than the wild type (SEQ ID NO: 1) (average value 4.1).
[0220] これに対して、フエ二ルァラニンに置換した場合は、血管新生および血管新生長さ が上昇していた。また、フエ-ルァラニンのフエ-ル基のパラ位をメチル基で置換した ものは、さらに、血管ネットワーク形成能(20. 7)が上昇していた。従って、疎水性基 での置換が血管新生および血管ネットワーク形成能を亢進させるに適切であることが 理解される。 [0221] 本発明のペプチドの様々な生体材料への応用が考えられる力 ペプチドを生体材 料に結合させる場合、その処理温度は 60°Cまでならその血管新生能が維持されるこ とがわかった。 SWYGLR (配列番号 2)のうち、 VVYGLR (配列番号 13)もしくは S VVYGL (配列番号 12)の血管新生能および血管ネットワーク形成能が確認された。 これらのチロシン残基の改変体もまた、同様に血管新生能および血管ネットワーク形 成能が亢進されることが理解される。従って、本発明では、 7アミノ酸のうち、真ん中の 5アミノ酸が含まれ、さらに、そのなかのフエ-ルァラニンの置換基が疎水性基に置換 されて 、ることが好まし 、ことが示される。 [0220] On the other hand, when phenylalanine was substituted, angiogenesis and angiogenesis length were increased. In addition, when the para-position of the phenyl group of phenylalanine was substituted with a methyl group, the ability to form a vascular network (20.7) was further increased. Therefore, it is understood that substitution with a hydrophobic group is appropriate for enhancing the ability to form angiogenesis and vascular networks. [0221] Potential of the peptide of the present invention to be applied to various biomaterials It was found that when a peptide is bound to a biomaterial, its angiogenesis ability is maintained if the treatment temperature is up to 60 ° C. Was. Among SWYGLR (SEQ ID NO: 2), VVYGLR (SEQ ID NO: 13) or SVVYGL (SEQ ID NO: 12) was confirmed to have an angiogenic ability and a vascular network-forming ability. It is understood that variants of these tyrosine residues also have enhanced angiogenesis and vascular network formation capabilities. Therefore, in the present invention, it is shown that it is preferable that the middle 5 amino acids of the 7 amino acids are included, and further that the substituent of ferulalanine therein is replaced by a hydrophobic group.
[0222] これらの結果を総合した図を図 6に示す。これを本明細書においてバランスシートと 呼ぶことがある。 FIG. 6 shows a diagram summarizing these results. This is sometimes called a balance sheet in this specification.
[0223] (実施例 4 インビボでの血管新生作用) Example 4 In Vivo Angiogenesis Action
キャリアタンパク質として、動物由来コラーゲンを部分加水分解し、アレルゲンの部 分を除去したゼラチンである FreAlagin ADタイプ (宮城ィ匕学工業株式会社製、分 子量 2000〜20000)を用いた。 FreAlagin ADタイプは、臨床での使用が認めら れているものである。 As a carrier protein, FreAlagin AD type (manufactured by Miyagi-Danigaku Kogyo Co., Ltd., molecular weight 2000 to 20000), which is a gelatin obtained by partially hydrolyzing animal-derived collagen and removing allergens, was used. The FreAlagin AD type has been approved for clinical use.
[0224] FreAlagin AD (キャリアタンパク質) lOOmgを 2. 5mLの MilliQ水に溶解した。 [0224] 100 mg of FreAlagin AD (carrier protein) was dissolved in 2.5 mL of MilliQ water.
本発明のペプチド 1. 20- 1. 32mgを 0. 1M リン酸緩衝液 (pH 7. 0) lmLに溶 解し,キャリアタンパク質に氷冷下でカ卩えた。ダルタルアルデヒド(25%溶液を 0. 1M リン酸緩衝液 (pH 7. 0)で 10倍に希釈し、 0. 15mLを得られた混合物に滴下 (4 °C)、反応混合物を 4°Cで 3〜4時間撹絆した。これにより、実施例 1において作製し たペプチドの N末端のァミノ基と、キャリアタンパク質のァミノ基が共有結合された。 1.20-1.32 mg of the peptide of the present invention was dissolved in 1 mL of 0.1 M phosphate buffer (pH 7.0), and the solution was added to the carrier protein under ice-cooling. Daltaraldehyde (25% solution diluted 10-fold with 0.1 M phosphate buffer (pH 7.0), 0.15 mL is added dropwise to the resulting mixture (4 ° C), and the reaction mixture is cooled to 4 ° C. Thus, the N-terminal amino group of the peptide prepared in Example 1 and the amino group of the carrier protein were covalently bonded.
[0225] 完全な結合の確認は薄層クロマトグラフィー (TLC)で原料消失にて行った。 [0225] Confirmation of complete binding was performed by thin layer chromatography (TLC) when the raw materials disappeared.
[0226] 反応混合物は 5%酢酸を溶出液とし G10カラム (フアルマシア社製)で脱塩した。主 ピークを凍結乾燥しほぼ定量的に結合物を得た。 [0226] The reaction mixture was desalted with a G10 column (Pharmacia) using 5% acetic acid as an eluent. The main peak was lyophilized to give a bound compound almost quantitatively.
[0227] このようにして作製したゼラチン結合ペプチドの存在下でラットの血管内皮細胞を 三次元培養した。この操作は具体的には次のようにして行った。細胞は transform ed rat lung endothelial cells (TRLEC細胞)を用いた。ゼラチン結合ペプチド (コンジュゲート)とコラーゲンタイプ Iを 1: 10の割合で混和し、 10ng (ナノグラム) /m 1の濃度にしたコンジュゲート 'コラーゲン混和溶液混和層中に TRLEG細胞を播種し 、 14日間の炭酸ガスインキュベータ一中で培養した。コントロールは因子なし(一)で あり、ポジティブコントロールとして従来より血管新生因子として知られているタンパク 質 VEGF ( + )を用いた。 14日後に顕微鏡で観察したところ、コントロールはまったく 管腔を形成しな力つた。本発明のペプチドコンジュゲートと VEGFとは管腔を形成し 、この管腔を囲包する細胞同士が接着されていた。特に、配列番号 4に示されるよう な、側鎖のフエニル基が疎水性基で置換されたものの接着活性は、天然型 (配列番 号 2)よりも亢進されていた。 [0227] Rat vascular endothelial cells were three-dimensionally cultured in the presence of the gelatin-binding peptide thus prepared. This operation was specifically performed as follows. Transformed rat lung endothelial cells (TRLEC cells) were used. Gelatin-binding peptide (conjugate) and collagen type I are mixed at a ratio of 1:10, and 10 ng (nanogram) / m TRLEG cells were seeded in the conjugate 'collagen mixed solution mixed layer at a concentration of 1 and cultured in a carbon dioxide incubator for 14 days. The control was no factor (1), and the protein VEGF (+) conventionally known as an angiogenic factor was used as a positive control. After 14 days, when observed under a microscope, the control was vigorous, forming no lumen at all. The peptide conjugate of the present invention and VEGF formed a lumen, and cells surrounding the lumen were adhered to each other. In particular, as shown in SEQ ID NO: 4, the adhesive activity of the side chain phenyl group substituted with a hydrophobic group was enhanced as compared with the natural type (SEQ ID NO: 2).
[0228] さらに、倍率 7000倍で電子顕微鏡で管腔部分を観察したところ、管腔の内壁にマ イクロビラィ (微細細胞突起)が複数個形成されていることが認められた。さらに、倍率 15000倍で、管腔を取り囲む血管内皮細胞同士の接合部分を観察したところ、内皮 細胞同士が堅固に結合されている領域、すなわち、タイトジャンクションが認められた 。管腔形成長さは有意にゼラチン結合ペプチドの方が VEGFより優れていた。特に、 配列番号 4に示されるような、側鎖のフ ニル基が疎水性基で置換されたものの管腔 形成活性は、天然型 (配列番号 2)よりも亢進されていた。これらの結果から、ゼラチ ン結合ペプチドには血管内皮培養細胞カゝら構成される組織中に、細胞同士を接着さ せてそれらの間に管腔を形成する作用(生体内では、この管腔が血管になる)があり 、インビトロで見られたペプチドの改変による効果が、インビボでも保持されることが確 f*i¾ れ 。 [0228] Further, upon observing the lumen portion with an electron microscope at a magnification of 7000 times, it was confirmed that a plurality of microvillages (fine cell projections) were formed on the inner wall of the lumen. Furthermore, when the junction of vascular endothelial cells surrounding the lumen was observed at a magnification of 15,000, a region where the endothelial cells were firmly connected, that is, a tight junction was observed. The tube formation length was significantly better with gelatin-binding peptide than with VEGF. In particular, as shown in SEQ ID NO: 4, although the phenyl group of the side chain was substituted with a hydrophobic group, the tube forming activity was enhanced compared to the native type (SEQ ID NO: 2). Based on these results, gelatin-binding peptide has the effect of adhering cells to each other and forming a lumen between them in a tissue composed of cultured vascular endothelial cells (in vivo, this lumen It is evident that the effect of the peptide modification seen in vitro will be retained in vivo.
[0229] lOOngZmlの濃度のゼラチン結合ペプチドをコラーゲン Iに 1: 10の割合で溶解し 、 lOngZmlの濃度のプチド結合ゼラチンコラーゲン混和溶液を得た。直径 0. 45m mの円筒の上下を Milliporeフィルター(MILLIPORE、 USA, DAS Assay kit) で塞いで構成されるマイクロセルをマウスの背部に埋め込んだ後、マイクロセル内に 上記ゼラチン結合ペプチドと VEGF溶液とを注入した。また、対照として、ペプチドを 含まないリン酸緩衝液 (PBS)単独も注入した (コントロール)。 5日後に、マイクロセル 周辺の組織の様子を顕微鏡で観察した。 [0229] A gelatin-binding peptide having a concentration of 100ngZml was dissolved in collagen I at a ratio of 1:10 to obtain a peptide-binding gelatin-collagen mixed solution having a concentration of 100ngZml. After embedding a microcell consisting of a 0.45 mm diameter cylinder up and down with a Millipore filter (MILLIPORE, USA, DAS Assay kit) in the back of the mouse, the gelatin-binding peptide and VEGF solution were placed in the microcell. Was injected. As a control, a phosphate buffer (PBS) containing no peptide alone was also injected (control). Five days later, the state of the tissue around the microcell was observed with a microscope.
[0230] 得られた血管ネットワーク形成能を示す。 [0230] The obtained vascular network forming ability is shown.
[0231] ゼラチン結合ペプチド (配列番号 2を使用):19. 0 ゼラチン結合ペプチド (配列番号 3を使用): 20. 0 [0231] Gelatin binding peptide (using SEQ ID NO: 2): 19.0 Gelatin binding peptide (using SEQ ID NO: 3): 20.0
VEGF: 5. 5 VEGF: 5.5
=ιン卜ロール: 0 = ι Control: 0
このように、本発明は、インビボでも、血管新生能を有することが実証された。このよ うな効果は、血管新生能を有することが顕著な VEGFでは、見られな力つたことであり 、従来得られな力つた顕著な効果を提供するといえる。 Thus, the present invention was demonstrated to have angiogenic ability even in vivo. Such an effect is a force that was not seen in VEGF, which has a remarkable angiogenesis ability, and it can be said that it provides a powerful effect that has not been obtained conventionally.
[0232] (実施例 5:生体代用材料との併用) [0232] (Example 5: Combination with biosubstitute material)
本発明のペプチドは、強い血管新生作用および Zまたは血管ネットワーク形成能を 有し、人工骨等の生体代用材料、人工臓器の体内埋め込みおよび臓器の修復に用 いることができるかどうか確認する。人工骨の代表であるヒドロキシアパタイトで代用骨 を作製し、それに、実施例 4で示されるようにゼラチン結合ペプチドを付着させる。こ れを、骨の代わりに移植することによって、その周囲に血管ネットワークを形成するこ とが可能となった。 It is confirmed whether the peptide of the present invention has a strong angiogenic action and a Z or vascular network forming ability, and can be used for a biological substitute material such as an artificial bone, an implant in an artificial organ, and a repair of the organ. A bone substitute is made of hydroxyapatite, a representative of artificial bone, to which a gelatin-binding peptide is attached as shown in Example 4. By implanting this in place of bone, it became possible to form a vascular network around it.
[0233] (実施例 6 :心臓の処置) (Example 6: Heart treatment)
本実施例では、ポリ乳酸グリコール酸 (PLGA)を支持体として用い、実施例 1で製 造したペプチド SWYGLR (配列番号 2)およびその改変体を生体分子として用いて 組織片を調製し、心臓における本発明のペプチドの血管新生能および血管ネットヮ ーク形成能を実証した。 In the present example, a piece of tissue was prepared using polylactic glycolic acid (PLGA) as a support, the peptide SWYGLR (SEQ ID NO: 2) produced in Example 1 and its variant as a biomolecule, The angiogenic ability and the vascular network forming ability of the peptide of the present invention were demonstrated.
[0234] (方法'結果) [0234] (Method 'Results')
<足場設計 > <Scaffold design>
生体分解性合成高分子である Vycrylのボリラクチン 910メッシュ(グリコール酸と乳 酸の比率が 90: 10の共重合体, PLGA)を内腔側にニットメッシュ(nitted mesh) 1 枚、外側にウーブンメッシュ(woven mesh) 2枚の計 3枚重ね(各 0. 2mm,計 0. 6 mm厚)とし、それにコラーゲンを架橋処理した PLGA—コラーゲン複合膜を足場とし た。コラーゲンを架橋剤としてはコラーゲン I型のみを架橋処理した群、コラーゲン I型 にさらにペプチド SWYGLR (配列番号 2)を架橋した群を作製した。架橋方法は、 以下のとおりである。肺動脈主幹部に径 20mmのパッチを縫着する。 Vycryl voriractin 910 mesh (copolymer of glycolic acid to lactate 90:10, PLGA), a biodegradable synthetic polymer, has a nitted mesh on the lumen side and a woven mesh on the outside (Woven mesh) A total of three sheets (0.2 mm each, 0.6 mm in total) were stacked, and a collagen-crosslinked PLGA-collagen composite membrane was used as a scaffold. A group in which only collagen type I was cross-linked using collagen as a cross-linking agent, and a group in which collagen SW was further cross-linked to peptide SWYGLR (SEQ ID NO: 2) were prepared. The crosslinking method is as follows. A 20 mm diameter patch is sewn to the main trunk of the pulmonary artery.
[0235] <架橋方法 > コラーゲン溶液に上記支持体を含浸させる。次に、凍結乾燥、 37°Cダルタルアル デヒド飽和蒸気により 4時間程度架橋処理する。最後に、 0. 1Mグリシン水溶液中で 15分間 3回振盪させ、蒸留水で 3回洗浄し、凍結乾燥を行った。これにより、コラーゲ ン含有支持体を作製する。この溶液にペプチド SVVYGLRを浸し、同様に架橋処理 する。 [0235] <Cross-linking method> The support is impregnated with a collagen solution. Next, freeze-dry and crosslink with dartal aldehyde saturated steam at 37 ° C for about 4 hours. Finally, the mixture was shaken three times in a 0.1 M glycine aqueous solution for 15 minutes, washed three times with distilled water, and freeze-dried. Thereby, a collagen-containing support is produced. The peptide SVVYGLR is immersed in this solution and crosslinked similarly.
[0236] <機械強度 > [0236] <Mechanical strength>
支持体を引張試験機で強度測定した。幅 5mm長さ 30mmの短冊状素材を短軸方 向に lOmmZ分の速度で荷重負荷し、破断点負荷及び弾性率を測定した。 (TENS ILLON ORIENTEC) 0コントロールとしてグルタルアルデヒド処理ゥマ心膜を用い て比較検討した。引っ張り強度は PLGA—コラーゲン複合膜が 75± 5N、ダルタルァ ルデヒド処理ゥマ心膜が 34± 11Nであった。血管新生ペプチドを結合した膜の場合 もまた、これらに匹敵する引っ張り強度を有した。 The strength of the support was measured with a tensile tester. A strip material having a width of 5 mm and a length of 30 mm was loaded in the short axis direction at a speed of 10 mmZ, and the load at break and the elastic modulus were measured. Were compared with (TENS ILLON ORIENTEC) 0 control as glutaraldehyde treatment © Ma pericardium. The tensile strength was 75 ± 5N for the PLGA-collagen composite membrane and 34 ± 11N for dataraldehyde-treated pericardium. Membranes to which the angiogenic peptide was bound also had comparable tensile strengths.
[0237] <細胞接着の効率 > [0237] <Efficiency of cell adhesion>
支持体における細胞生着性の確認のため、インビト口にお 、て蛍光抗体 (PKH— 2 6 (SIGMA) )で標識した血管内皮細胞 (VECs)および平滑筋細胞 (VSMCs)をコ ラーゲン I型のみを架橋処理した PLGA—コラーゲン複合膜とコラーゲン I型にさらに I V型架橋処理した PLGA—コラーゲン複合膜で細胞接着効率の比較検討をおこな つた。蛍光顕微鏡にて一視野あたりの蛍光色素の発色領域 (%)を比較すると血管内 皮細胞(VECs)および平滑筋細胞(VSMCs)の!、ずれの細胞にぉ 、てもコラーゲン I型、 IV型架橋処理した本発明の支持体が有意に蛍光色素の発色領域が多ぐ細胞 生着が認められた。 In order to confirm cell engraftment on the support, vascular endothelial cells (VECs) and smooth muscle cells (VSMCs) labeled with fluorescent antibodies (PKH-26 (SIGMA)) were injected into collagen at the in-vitro mouth. Cell adhesion efficiency was compared between a PLGA-collagen composite membrane with only cross-linking treatment and a PLGA-collagen composite membrane with collagen type I and cross-linked type IV. When comparing the coloring area (%) of the fluorescent dye per visual field with a fluorescence microscope, it was found that the type of vascular endothelial cells (VECs) and smooth muscle cells (VSMCs), and those of the slipped cells were also collagen type I and type IV. Cell engraftment was observed in the crosslinked-treated support of the present invention, in which the coloring region of the fluorescent dye was significantly large.
[0238] 以上の結果より、作製した支持体が細胞接着効率を保持または亢進していることが 明らかとなった。 [0238] From the above results, it was revealed that the prepared support maintained or enhanced the cell adhesion efficiency.
[0239] <第 VIII因子染色 > [0239] <Factor VIII staining>
血管数の計数は、第 VIII因子関連抗原等で免疫組織ィ匕学染色した後に計数する ことによって判定することができる。この計数方法では、検体を 10%の緩衝ィ匕ホルマ リンで固定し、パラフィン包埋し、各々の検体から数個の連続切片を調製し、凍結す る。次いで、凍結切片を PBS中の 2%パラホルムアルデヒド溶液で 5分間、室温にて 固定し、 3%過酸ィ匕水素を含むメタノール中に 15分間浸漬し、次いで PBSで洗浄す る。このサンプルをゥシ血清アルブミン溶液で約 10分間覆って、非特異的反応をプロ ックする。検体を、 HRPと結合する、第 VIII因子関連抗原に対する EPOS結合体ィ匕 抗体と共に一晩インキュベートする。サンプルを PBSで洗浄した後、これらを、ジアミ ノベンジジン溶液(例えば、 PBS中、 0. 3mgZmlジァミノべンジジン)中に浸漬して 、陽性染色を得る。染色された血管内皮細胞を、例えば、 200倍の倍率の光学顕微 鏡下で計数し、例えば、計数結果を、 1平方ミリメートルあたりの血管の数としてあらわ す。特定の処置後、血管数が統計学的に有意に増カロしている力否かを判定すること により、第 VIII因子の存在を確認し、これにより例えば、血管内皮細胞の確認および 血管新生活性を判定することができる。 The number of blood vessels can be determined by performing immunohistological staining with a factor VIII-related antigen or the like and then counting. In this counting method, a sample is fixed with 10% buffered formalin, embedded in paraffin, several serial sections are prepared from each sample, and frozen. The frozen sections were then treated with a 2% paraformaldehyde solution in PBS for 5 minutes at room temperature. Fix and immerse in methanol containing 3% hydrogen peroxide for 15 minutes, then wash with PBS. Cover the sample with a serum albumin solution for approximately 10 minutes to block nonspecific reactions. Specimens are incubated overnight with an EPOS conjugated antibody against factor VIII-related antigen, which binds to HRP. After washing the samples with PBS, they are immersed in a diaminobenzidine solution (eg, 0.3 mg Zml diaminobenzidine in PBS) to obtain positive staining. The stained vascular endothelial cells are counted, for example, under an optical microscope at a magnification of 200 times, and the counting result is expressed, for example, as the number of blood vessels per square millimeter. After a particular treatment, the presence of factor VIII is confirmed by determining whether the number of blood vessels is statistically significantly increased in calories, thereby confirming the presence of, for example, endothelial cells and vascular new life. Gender can be determined.
[0240] くエラスチカ 'ファン'ギーソン染色 > [0240] Elastica 'Fan' Gieson Stain>
弾性線維を染色するために、エラスチカ 'ファン'ギーソン染色を行った。その手順 は以下のとおりである。必要に応じて脱パラフィン (例えば、純エタノールにて)、水洗 を行 、、武藤化学などから入手可能なレゾルシンフクシン液に 40〜60分間サンプル を浸す。その後 70% アルコールでサンプルを洗浄し、ォムニのへマトキシリンに 15 分間浸す。その後、流水水洗を 5分行い、ファン (ワン) 'ギーソン液に 2分浸す。水洗 しすばやく脱水し、透徹し、封入して、染色を確認することができる。 Elastica 'Van' Giesson staining was performed to stain the elastic fibers. The procedure is as follows. If necessary, deparaffinize (for example, with pure ethanol), wash with water, and immerse the sample in a resorcin fuchsin solution available from Mutoh Chemical for 40-60 minutes. The sample is then washed with 70% alcohol and soaked in omni hematoxylin for 15 minutes. After that, rinse with running water for 5 minutes, and soak in Fan (1) 'Gison's solution for 2 minutes. Wash, quickly dehydrate, clear, enclose and confirm staining.
[0241] くへマトキシリン'ェォジン(HE)染色 > [0241] Hematoxylin and eosin (HE) staining>
細胞における支持体の定着 ·消長を観察するために、 HE染色を行った。その手順 は以下のとおりである。必要に応じて脱パラフィン (例えば、純エタノールにて)、水洗 を行い、ォムニのへマトキシリンでサンプルを 10分浸した。その後流水水洗し、アン モ-ァ水で色出しを 30秒間行った。その後、流水水洗を 5分行い、塩酸ェォジン 10 倍希釈液で 2分間染色し、脱水し、透徹し、封入して、染色を確認することができる。 HE staining was performed to observe the fixation of the support in the cells. The procedure is as follows. If necessary, the sample was deparaffinized (for example, with pure ethanol), washed with water, and immersed in omni hematoxylin for 10 minutes. After that, the sample was washed with running water, and colored with ammonia water for 30 seconds. After that, it is washed with running water for 5 minutes, stained with a 10-fold diluted solution of eosin hydrochloride for 2 minutes, dehydrated, cleared, sealed, and the staining can be confirmed.
[0242] <von Kossa染色 > [0242] <von Kossa staining>
細胞における石灰化を観察するために、フォン'コッサ法によって染色した。その手 順は以下のとおりである。必要に応じて脱パラフィン (例えば、純エタノールにて)、水 洗 (蒸留水)を行い、 25% 硝酸銀液 (間接光下)に 2時間浸す。その後、蒸留水水 洗し、 42% 2% チォ硫酸ナトリウム (ハイポ)に 5分浸す。その後、流水水洗を 5分 行い、次いでケルンェヒテロートに 5分浸す。その後、流水水洗を 5分行い、脱水し、 透徹し、封入して、染色を確認することができる。 The cells were stained by the von Kossa method to observe calcification. The procedure is as follows. If necessary, remove paraffin (for example, with pure ethanol), wash with water (distilled water), and immerse in a 25% silver nitrate solution (under indirect light) for 2 hours. Then, wash with distilled water and soak in 42% 2% sodium thiosulfate (hypo) for 5 minutes. Then, wash with running water for 5 minutes Then soak for 5 minutes in Kärnechteroth. After that, it is washed with running water for 5 minutes, dehydrated, transparent, sealed, and stained.
[0243] <移植> [0243] <Porting>
作製した支持体と、この複合膜に自己の血管内皮細胞 (VECs)および平滑筋細胞 (VSMCs)を播種した支持体を作製し、ビーグル成犬(8〜: LOkg)の肺動脈主幹部 に部分遮断 (partial clamp)下に移植した。 The prepared support and the support in which autologous vascular endothelial cells (VECs) and smooth muscle cells (VSMCs) were seeded on the composite membrane were prepared, and partially blocked in the main trunk of the pulmonary artery of adult beagle dogs (8 to: LOkg) (partial clamp).
[0244] 細胞は同種のビーグル成犬の下肢表在静脈を摘出し、血管内皮細胞、および平 滑筋細胞 (VSMCs)を単離培養. PLGA コラーゲン複合膜に血管内皮細胞、平 滑筋細胞をそれぞれ 1. 3 X 106cellZcm2の密度で播種した。移植後、 2週、 2力月、 6ヶ月後に摘出し組織学的に検討を行う。 [0244] Cells were isolated from the lower limb superficial veins of adult beagle dogs and isolated and cultured for vascular endothelial cells and squamous muscle cells (VSMCs). Each was seeded at a density of 1.3 × 10 6 cellZcm 2 . Two weeks, two months, and six months after transplantation, extirpation and histological examination are performed.
[0245] (インビボ:移植 2週後) [0245] (In vivo: 2 weeks after transplantation)
作製した支持体および自己細胞を播種した支持体の両群とも肉眼的に明らかな血 栓形成は認めな力つた。 HE染色では PLGAの残存を認め、その間は結合織が介在 していた。自己の血管内皮細胞および平滑筋細胞を播種した PLGA コラーゲン複 合膜では蛍光抗体標識した播種した血管内皮細胞は内腔側に散在しているのみで あり、多くの細胞は PLGA—コラーゲン複合膜より脱落していることが示唆された。 Both the prepared support and the support seeded with autologous cells showed no apparent thrombus formation. HE staining showed PLGA remaining, with intervening connective tissue. In the PLGA collagen composite membrane seeded with autologous vascular endothelial cells and smooth muscle cells, the seeded vascular endothelial cells labeled with the fluorescent antibody are only scattered on the luminal side, and most of the cells are from the PLGA-collagen composite membrane. It was suggested that they had dropped out.
[0246] (インビボ:移植 2ヶ月後) [0246] (In vivo: 2 months after transplantation)
作製した支持体および自己細胞を播種した PLGA コラーゲン複合膜の両群とも 肉眼的に内腔側表面は平滑で、 HE染色で PLGAは完全に吸収されており正常の 血管と比較しても遜色のな 、組織構造であった。 In both groups, the prepared support and the PLGA collagen composite membrane seeded with autologous cells, the luminal surface was macroscopically smooth, and PLGA was completely absorbed by HE staining, which is inferior to that of normal blood vessels. It was an organizational structure.
[0247] 血管内皮細胞を第 VIII因子染色にて、平滑筋細胞 ex SMA免疫染色にて検討 した。両群とも第 VIII因子免疫染色で単層の連続する血管内皮細胞を認め、 α— S ΜΑ免疫染色で内腔側に配向性を有した平滑筋細胞を認めた。 [0247] Vascular endothelial cells were examined by factor VIII staining and smooth muscle cell ex SMA immunostaining. In both groups, a continuous monolayer of vascular endothelial cells was observed by factor VIII immunostaining, and oriented smooth muscle cells were observed in the lumen by α-SΜΑ immunostaining.
[0248] さらにエラスチカ 'ファン'ギーソン(elastica— van Gieson)染色にて血管の弾性 繊維を検討した。両群とも血管内層に弾性繊維の発現が認められた。 [0248] Further, the elastic fibers of the blood vessels were examined by elastica-van Gieson staining. In both groups, the expression of elastic fibers in the vascular lining was observed.
[0249] 血管新生能および血管ネットワーク形成能について観察すると、心臓の肺動脈に おいても、血管ネットワークの形成が亢進されていることが明らかになる。 [0249] Observation of the angiogenesis ability and the ability to form a vascular network reveals that the formation of the vascular network is enhanced even in the pulmonary artery of the heart.
[0250] 以上のように、本発明の好ましい実施形態を用いて本発明を例示してきた力 本発 明は、この実施形態に限定して解釈されるべきものではない。本発明は、特許請求 の範囲によってのみその範囲が解釈されるべきであることが理解される。当業者は、 本発明の具体的な好ましい実施形態の記載から、本発明の記載および技術常識に 基づいて等価な範囲を実施することができることが理解される。本明細書において引 用した特許、特許出願および文献は、その内容自体が具体的に本明細書に記載さ れているのと同様にその内容が本明細書に対する参考として援用されるべきであるこ とが理解される。 [0250] As described above, the present invention has been exemplified using the preferred embodiment of the present invention. The description should not be construed as being limited to this embodiment. It is understood that the scope of the present invention should be construed only by the appended claims. It is understood that those skilled in the art can implement equivalent ranges based on the description of the present invention and common general knowledge from the description of the specific preferred embodiments of the present invention. Patents, patent applications, and references cited herein should be incorporated by reference in their entirety, as if the content itself were specifically described herein. Is understood.
産業上の利用可能性 Industrial applicability
本発明は、血管新生能および血管ネットワークを形成することが所望される任意の 局面 (医薬、医療、歯学など)において有用である。特に、本発明は、生活習慣病 (例 えば、心筋梗塞、脳梗塞、閉塞性大動脈硬化症などの虚血性疾患など)の治療にも 有用である。 The present invention is useful in any aspect where it is desired to form an angiogenic ability and a vascular network (medicine, medicine, dentistry, etc.). In particular, the present invention is also useful for treating lifestyle-related diseases (eg, myocardial infarction, cerebral infarction, ischemic diseases such as obstructive aortic sclerosis).
Claims
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2004-107075 | 2004-03-31 | ||
| JP2004107075 | 2004-03-31 |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2005094865A1 true WO2005094865A1 (en) | 2005-10-13 |
Family
ID=35063524
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/JP2005/006124 Ceased WO2005094865A1 (en) | 2004-03-31 | 2005-03-30 | Compound having angiogenic effect |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| WO (1) | WO2005094865A1 (en) |
Cited By (4)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| RU2301072C1 (en) * | 2006-06-22 | 2007-06-20 | Общество С Ограниченной Ответственностью "Сиа Пептайдс" | Agent for normalizing of blood-vessel function and method for production thereof |
| WO2008026634A1 (en) * | 2006-08-31 | 2008-03-06 | Osaka University | Mesenchymal cell proliferation stimulator and skeletal system biomaterial |
| WO2011119008A3 (en) * | 2010-03-26 | 2012-04-26 | Industry-Academic Cooperation Foundation, Sookmyung Women's University | Peptides for promoting angiogenesis and an use thereof |
| WO2020116062A1 (en) * | 2018-12-03 | 2020-06-11 | 株式会社ハイペップ研究所 | Novel compound and angiogenic agent comprising same |
Citations (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| WO2003003925A1 (en) * | 2001-07-04 | 2003-01-16 | Adam James | Method and apparatus for stitchin |
-
2005
- 2005-03-30 WO PCT/JP2005/006124 patent/WO2005094865A1/en not_active Ceased
Patent Citations (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| WO2003003925A1 (en) * | 2001-07-04 | 2003-01-16 | Adam James | Method and apparatus for stitchin |
Non-Patent Citations (2)
| Title |
|---|
| ASOU Y. ET AL.: "Osteopontin facilitates angiogenesis, accumulation of osteoclastst and resorption in ectopic bone.", ENDOCRINOLOGY, vol. 142, no. 3, 2001, pages 1325 - 1332, XP002994514 * |
| HAMADA Y. ET AL.: "Angiogenic activity of osteopontin-derived peptide SVVYGLR", BIOCHEM BOPHYS RES.COMMUN., vol. 310, no. 1, 2003, pages 153 - 157, XP004457198 * |
Cited By (12)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| RU2301072C1 (en) * | 2006-06-22 | 2007-06-20 | Общество С Ограниченной Ответственностью "Сиа Пептайдс" | Agent for normalizing of blood-vessel function and method for production thereof |
| EA010734B1 (en) * | 2006-06-22 | 2008-10-30 | Общество С Ограниченной Ответственностью "Сиа Пептайдс" | Medicament normalizing blood vessel functions, and method for preparing thereof |
| WO2008026634A1 (en) * | 2006-08-31 | 2008-03-06 | Osaka University | Mesenchymal cell proliferation stimulator and skeletal system biomaterial |
| US8222216B2 (en) | 2006-08-31 | 2012-07-17 | Osaka University | Mesenchymal cell proliferation promoter and skeletal system biomaterial |
| WO2011119008A3 (en) * | 2010-03-26 | 2012-04-26 | Industry-Academic Cooperation Foundation, Sookmyung Women's University | Peptides for promoting angiogenesis and an use thereof |
| US9249185B2 (en) | 2010-03-26 | 2016-02-02 | Industry-Academic Cooperation Foundation, Sookmyung Women's University | Peptides for promoting angiogenesis and an use thereof |
| WO2020116062A1 (en) * | 2018-12-03 | 2020-06-11 | 株式会社ハイペップ研究所 | Novel compound and angiogenic agent comprising same |
| CN113366013A (en) * | 2018-12-03 | 2021-09-07 | 株式会社海培普研究所 | Novel compound and angiogenesis agent comprising same |
| JPWO2020116062A1 (en) * | 2018-12-03 | 2021-11-18 | 株式会社ハイペップ研究所 | New compounds and angiogenic agents containing them |
| EP3907235A4 (en) * | 2018-12-03 | 2023-01-11 | HiPep Laboratories | NEW COMPOUND AND ANGIOGENIC AGENT COMPRISING THEM |
| JP7475051B2 (en) | 2018-12-03 | 2024-04-26 | 株式会社ハイペップ研究所 | Novel compound and angiogenic agent containing the same |
| US12103983B2 (en) | 2018-12-03 | 2024-10-01 | Hipep Laboratories | Compound and angiogenic agent comprising same |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| CA2125174C (en) | Novel polypeptides for promoting cell attachment | |
| EA034847B1 (en) | Fgf21 mutants and uses thereof | |
| AU731160B2 (en) | Method for the synthesis of analogs of parathyroid hormone and parathyroid hormone related peptide | |
| CN102655877A (en) | FGF21 mutants and uses thereof | |
| NO335982B1 (en) | Binding agents which inhibit myostatin, process for their preparation, pharmaceutical composition thereof and use thereof for the preparation of a preparation, method for detecting or diagnosing a myostatin-related disorder, and method for measuring myostatin in a sample. | |
| MXPA04004489A (en) | Peptides effective in the treatment of tumors and other conditions requiring the removal or destruction of cells. | |
| RS51704B (en) | Compositions and methods for treating fibrotic disorders | |
| US6313265B1 (en) | Neurite outgrowth-promoting polypeptides containing fibronectin type III repeats and methods of use | |
| JP2018529729A (en) | Treatment of bile acid disorders | |
| EP2464656A1 (en) | Novel peptide and use thereof | |
| EP1452182B1 (en) | Angiogenesis drugs | |
| JP4303958B2 (en) | Cyclic peptide and its preparation method and use as an angiogenesis inhibitor or promoter | |
| US8227411B2 (en) | FGF growth factor analogs | |
| JP7791593B2 (en) | Cell-penetrating peptide variants and uses thereof | |
| EP2599788B1 (en) | Angiogenesis-inhibiting peptide and application thereof | |
| WO2005094865A1 (en) | Compound having angiogenic effect | |
| TWI638830B (en) | Sialylated sugar chain added polypeptide | |
| CN100371442C (en) | Ligand/receptor specificity exchangers that redirect antibodies to receptors on pathogens | |
| WO2005099742A1 (en) | Vascular network forming agent | |
| AU2006301494B2 (en) | Antagonists against interaction of PF4 and RANTES | |
| CN104341489B (en) | A new class of peptides inhibiting neovascularization and their applications | |
| WO2012013110A1 (en) | Polypeptide having angiogenesis-inhibiting activity | |
| WO2006029487A2 (en) | Platelet factor 4 variant 1 (pf4var1) related inhibitors of angiogenesis | |
| WO2005095443A1 (en) | Drug delivery system using peptide modification | |
| EP2772498B1 (en) | Polypeptides inhibiting neovascularization and uses thereof |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| AK | Designated states |
Kind code of ref document: A1 Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BW BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE EG ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NA NI NO NZ OM PG PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL SM SY TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW |
|
| AL | Designated countries for regional patents |
Kind code of ref document: A1 Designated state(s): GM KE LS MW MZ NA SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IS IT LT LU MC NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG |
|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application | ||
| NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
| WWW | Wipo information: withdrawn in national office |
Country of ref document: DE |
|
| 122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase | ||
| NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: JP |